ATEN KE6900AR User Manual

Displayed below is the user manual for KE6900AR by ATEN which is a product in the KVM Extenders category. This manual has pages.

Related Manuals

ATEN ATEN Manual

ATEN IC485AI Manual

ATEN VS461 Manual

ATEN CE250A Manual

ATEN AS251S Manual

ATEN SN3101 Manual

ATEN CE800B Manual

KVM over IP Matrix Series:

KVM over IP Extender &

CCKM KE Matrix Manager Software

User Manual

www.aten.com

KVM over IP Matrix System User Manual

EMC Information

FEDERAL COMMUNICATIONS COMMISSION INTERFERENCE

STATEMENT: This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the

limits for a Class A digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These

limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful

interference when the equipment is operated in a commercial environment.

This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if

not installed and used in accordance with the instruction manual, may cause

harmful interference to radio communications. Operation of this equipment in

a residential area is likely to cause harmful interference in which case the user

will be required to correct the interference at his own expense.

The device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the

following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause harmful interference,

and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including

interference that may cause undesired operation.

FCC Caution: Any changes or modifications not expressly approved by the

party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate this

equipment.

Warning: Operation of this equipment in a residential environment could

cause radio interference.

Achtung: Der Gebrauch dieses Geräts in Wohnumgebung kann

Funkstörungen verursachen.

KCC Statement

RoHS

This product is RoHS compliant.

Manual Date: 2021-01-04

other brand names and trademarks are the registered property of their respective owners. The terms HDMI,

HDMI High-Definition Multimedia Interface, and the HDMI Logo are trademarks or registered trademarks of

HDMI Licensing Administrator, Inc.

KVM over IP Matrix System User Manual

iii

User Information

Online Registration

Be sure to register your product at our online support center:

Telephone Support

For telephone support, call this number:

User Notice

All information, documentation, and specifications contained in this manual

are subject to change without prior notification by the manufacturer. The

manufacturer makes no representations or warranties, either expressed or

implied, with respect to the contents hereof and specifically disclaims any

warranties as to merchantability or fitness for any particular purpose. Any of

the manufacturer's software described in this manual is sold or licensed as is.

Should the programs prove defective following their purchase, the buyer (and

not the manufacturer, its distributor, or its dealer), assumes the entire cost of all

necessary servicing, repair and any incidental or consequential damages

resulting from any defect in the software.

The manufacturer of this system is not responsible for any radio and/or TV

interference caused by unauthorized modifications to this device. It is the

responsibility of the user to correct such interference.

The manufacturer is not responsible for any damage incurred in the operation

of this system if the correct operational voltage setting was not selected prior

to operation. PLEASE VERIFY THAT THE VOLTAGE SETTING IS

CORRECT BEFORE USE.

International http://eservice.aten.com

International 886-2-8692-6959

China 86-400-810-0-810

Japan 81-3-5615-5811

Korea 82-2-467-6789

North America 1-888-999-ATEN ext 4988

1-949-428-1111

KVM over IP Matrix System User Manual

About This Manual

This User Manual is provided to help you get the most from your KVM over

IP Matrix System. It covers all aspects of installation, configuration and

operation. An overview of the information found in the manual is provided

below.

The KVM over IP Extender models covered in this user manuals are:

Models Product Names

KE6900 DVI Single Display KVM over IP Extender (Transmitter & Receiver)

KE6900A DVI-I Single Display KVM over IP Extender (Transmitter & Receiver)

KE6900AiT DVI-I Single Display KVM over IP Extender (Transmitter) with Internet

Access

KE6900ST DVI KVM over IP Extender Lite

KE6910 DVI-D Dual Link KVM over IP Extender (Transmitter & Receiver)

KE6912 DVI-D Dual Link KVM over IP Extender (Transmitter & Receiver) with PoE

KE6920 DVI-D Dual Link KVM over IP Extender (Transmitter & Receiver) with Dual

SFP

KE6922 DVI-D Dual Link KVM over IP Extender (Transmitter & Receiver) with Dual

SFP & PoE

KE6940 DVI Dual Display KVM over IP Extender (Transmitter & Receiver)

KE6940A DVI-I Dual Display KVM over IP Extender (Transmitter & Receiver)

KE6940AiT DVI-I Dual Display KVM over IP Extender (Transmitter) with Internet Access

KE8900S Slim HDMI KVM over IP Extender (Transmitter & Receiver)

KE8950 4K HDMI Single Display KVM over IP Extender (Transmitter & Receiver)

KE8952 4K HDMI Single Display KVM over IP Extender (Transmitter & Receiver)

with PoE

KE9900ST Slim DisplayPort KVM over IP Extender (Transmitter)

KE9950 4K DisplayPort KVM over IP Extender (Transmitter & Receiver)

KE9952 4K DisplayPort KVM over IP Extender (Transmitter & Receiver) with PoE

KVM over IP Matrix System User Manual

Chapter 1, Introduction, introduces you to the KVM over IP Matrix

System. Its purpose, features and benefits are presented, and its front and back

panel components are described.

Chapter 2, Hardware Setup, provides step-by-step instructions for setting

up your installation, and explains some basic operation procedures.

Chapter 3, OSD Operation, explains the fundamental concepts involved in

operating the KE6900 / KE6900A / KE6900AiT / KE6900ST / KE6910 /

KE6912 / KE6920 / KE6922 / KE6940 / KE6940A / KE6940AiT / KE8900S /

KE8950 / KE8952 / KE9900ST / KE9950 / KE9952, and provides a complete

description of the On Screen Displays (OSDs) and how to work with them.

Chapter 4, Software Installation, explains the administrative procedures

that are required to download and install the KE Matrix Manager software on

Windows and Linux computers.

Chapter 5, Browser / Telnet Operation, explains how to log in to the KE

Matrix Manager with a web browser, and describes the features, functions, and

how to work with the browser's main interface.

Chapter 6, System Status, explains how to use the KE Matrix Manager’s

System Status panel to manage Transmitters, Receivers, Users, Profiles and

Logs.

Chapter 7, System Settings, explains the KE Matrix Manager’s system

settings, which include the General, ANMS, LDAP/AD, RADIUS, TACACS+

authentication, F/W Upgrade, Redundancy, Backup/Restore, Certificates, and

Sessions tabs.

Chapter 8, Connections, describes how to use the KE Matrix Manager ‘s

Connections panel to view and disconnect Transmitter and Receiver

connections.

Chapter 9, Scheduled Profile, describes how to use the KE Matrix

Manager’s Scheduled Profile panel to view active profile schedules.

Chapter 10, Sessions, describes how to use the KE Matrix Manager’s

Sessions panel to view and disconnect user sessions.

Chapter 11, Remote Viewer (AiT Models only), describes how to use

the Remote Viewer to view and control video sources connected to AiT

transmitters.

Chapter 12, Firmware Upgrade Utility, explains how to download and

use the Firmware Upgrade Utility to install new firmware on the devices.

KVM over IP Matrix System User Manual

Chapter 13, CLI Commands, provides a complete list of the serial

protocol and TCP/IP commands used when utilizing the RS-232 Serial Port or

a network connection to configure the KE devices.

Appendix, at the end of the manual provides technical and troubleshooting

information.

KVM over IP Matrix System User Manual

vii

Contents

EMC Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ii

RoHS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ii

User Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .iii

Online Registration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .iii

Telephone Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .iii

User Notice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .iii

About This Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iv

Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . vii

Package Contents. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .xvi

KE6900 / KE6940 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .xvi

KE6900A / KE6940A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .xvi

KE6900AiT / KE6940AiT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xvii

KE6900ST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xvii

KE6910 / KE6912 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xvii

KE6920 / KE6922 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xviii

KE8900S . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xviii

KE8950 / KE8952 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .xix

KE9900ST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .xix

KE9950 / KE9952 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xx

Conventions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .xxi

Product Information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .xxi

1. Introduction

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1

Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4

Supported Video Resolutions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7

Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8

Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8

Computers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8

Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8

Minimum Hardware/Software Requirements. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9

Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10

KE6900T (Transmitter) Front View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10

KE6900T (Transmitter) Rear View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11

KE6900R (Receiver) Front View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13

KE6900R (Receiver) Rear View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15

KE6900AT (Transmitter) Front View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17

KE6900AT (Transmitter) Rear View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18

KE6900AR (Receiver) Front View. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20

KE6900AR (Receiver) Rear View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21

KE6900AiT (Transmitter) Front View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23

KE6900AiT (Transmitter) Rear View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24

KE6910T / KE6912T (Transmitter) Front View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26

KVM over IP Matrix System User Manual

viii

KE6910T / KE6912T (Transmitter) Rear View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27

KE6910R / KE6912R (Receiver) Front View. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29

KE6910R / KE6912R (Receiver) Rear View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30

KE6920T / KE6922T (Transmitter) Front View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32

KE6920T / KE6922T (Transmitter) Rear View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33

KE6920R / KE6922R (Receiver) Front View. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35

KE6920R / KE6922R (Receiver) Rear View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36

KE6940T (Transmitter) Front View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38

KE6940T (Transmitter) Rear View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39

KE6940R (Receiver) Front View. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41

KE6940R (Receiver) Rear View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43

KE6940AT (Transmitter) Front View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45

KE6940AT (Transmitter) Rear View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46

KE6940AR (Receiver) Front View. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48

KE6940AR (Receiver) Rear View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49

KE6940AiT (Transmitter) Front View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51

KE6940AiT (Transmitter) Rear View. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52

KE6900ST (Transmitter) Front, Rear and Top View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54

KE8950T / KE8952T (Transmitter) Front View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56

KE8950T / KE8952T (Transmitter) Rear View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57

KE8950R / KE8952R (Receiver) Front View. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59

KE8950R / KE8952R (Receiver) Rear View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60

KE8900ST (Transmitter) Front, Rear and Side View . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62

KE8900SR (Receiver) Front, Rear and Side View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64

KE9900ST (Transmitter) Front, Rear and Side View . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66

KE9950T / KE9952T (Transmitter) Front View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68

KE9950T / KE9952T (Transmitter) Rear View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69

KE9950R / KE9952R (Receiver) Front View. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70

KE9950R / KE9952R (Receiver) Rear View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71

PoE Power Redundancy. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73

2. Hardware Setup

Mounting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75

Attaching the Bracket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76

Non-Slim Transmitters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76

Slim Transmitters - KE6900ST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77

Slim Transmitters - KE8900ST / KE9900ST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77

Rack Mount. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79

Non-Slim Transmitters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79

Slim Transmitters - KE6900ST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80

Slim Transmitters - KE8900ST / KE9900ST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80

Wall Mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81

Non-Slim Transmitters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81

Slim Transmitters - KE6900ST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82

Slim Transmitters - KE8900ST / KE9900ST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82

KE6900 / KE6940 Point-to-Point Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83

KVM over IP Matrix System User Manual

KE6900 / KE6940 Point-to-Point Installation 1 of 2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84

KE6900 / KE6940 Point-to-Point Installation 2 of 2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85

KE6900A / KE6940A Point-to-Point Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86

KE6900A / KE6940A Point-to-Point Installation 1 of 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . 87

KE6900A / KE6940A Point-to-Point Installation 2 of 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . 88

KE6900AiT / KE6940AiT Point-to-Point Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89

KE6940AiT Point-to-Point Installation 1 of 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .90

KE6940AiT Point-to-Point Installation 2 of 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .91

KE6910 / KE6912 Point-to-Point Installation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .92

KE6910 / KE6912 Point-to-Point Installation 1 of 2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93

KE6910 / KE6912 Point-to-Point Installation 2 of 2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94

KE6920 / KE6922 Point-to-Point Installation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .95

KE6920 / KE6922 Point-to-Point Installation 1 of 2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96

KE6920 / KE6922 Point-to-Point Installation 2 of 2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97

KE8950 / KE8952 Point-to-Point Installation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .98

KE8950 / KE8952 Point-to-Point Installation 1 of 2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99

KE8950 / KE8952 Point-to-Point Installation 2 of 2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100

KE6900ST Point-to-Point Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101

Setting up a LAN Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .101

KE8900S Point-to-Point Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103

Setting up a LAN Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .103

KE9900ST Point-to-Point Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105

Setting up a LAN Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .105

KE9950 / KE9952 Point-to-Point Installation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .107

KE9950 / KE9952 Point-to-Point Installation 1 of 2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108

KE9950 / KE9952 Point-to-Point Installation 2 of 2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109

KE6900 / KE6940 LAN Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110

KE6900 / KE6940 Network Installation Diagram 1 of 2. . . . . . . . . . . 112

KE6900 / KE6940 Network Installation Diagram 2 of 2. . . . . . . . . . . 113

KE6900A / KE6940A LAN Installation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114

KE6900A / KE6940A Network Installation Diagram 1 of 2 . . . . . . . .115

KE6900A / KE6940A Network Installation Diagram 2 of 2 . . . . . . . .116

KE6900AiT / KE6940AiT LAN Installation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .117

KE6900AiT / KE6940AiT Network Installation Diagram 1 of 2 . . . . . 118

KE6900AiT / KE6940AiT Network Installation Diagram 2 of 2 . . . . . 119

KE6910 / KE6912 LAN Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120

KE6910 / KE6912 Network Installation Diagram 1 of 2. . . . . . . . . . . 121

KE6910 / KE6912 Network Installation Diagram 2 of 2. . . . . . . . . . . 122

KE6920 / KE6922 LAN Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123

KE6920 / KE6922 Network Installation Diagram 1 of 2. . . . . . . . . . . 124

KE6920 / KE6922 Network Installation Diagram 2 of 2. . . . . . . . . . . 125

KE8950 / KE8952 LAN Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126

KE8950 / KE8952 Network Installation Diagram 1 of 2. . . . . . . . . . . 128

KE8950 / KE8952 Network Installation Diagram 2 of 2. . . . . . . . . . . 129

KE9950 / KE9952 LAN Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130

KVM over IP Matrix System User Manual

KE9950 / KE9952 Network Installation Diagram 1 of 2. . . . . . . . . . . 131

KE9950 / KE9952 Network Installation Diagram 2 of 2. . . . . . . . . . . 132

Network Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133

Exit OSD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134

Default IP Addresses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134

KE I/O Ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135

LED Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136

3. OSD Operation

Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137

Invoking the OSD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137

Touch Screen Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137

OSD Hotkeys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138

Non-OSD Hotkeys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138

Reverting to Previous . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138

Hotkey Mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138

Microphone Hotkey . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139

OSD Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139

Logging in for the First Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140

Receiver Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141

Network. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141

Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142

Regular Version . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142

Slim Version . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145

System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147

Transmitter Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148

Network. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148

Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149

System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152

Internet Port (AiT Models only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153

IP Installer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154

Service Ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154

IPv4 Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154

IPv6 Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155

CCVSR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156

Working Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156

User Preferences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157

OSD Matrix Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158

Connections Page. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159

List Mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159

Array Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162

Profile Page. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164

Push Content . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165

Pull Content. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167

KVM over IP Matrix System User Manual

4. Software Installation

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169

Download . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169

KE Matrix Manager Software Install . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171

Upgrading License . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .174

Linux Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175

5. Browser / Telnet Operation

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179

Logging In . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179

The KE Matrix Manager Main Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181

Web Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182

Installation Wizard. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .183

Instant Link . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .186

RS-232 / Telnet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188

Telnet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .188

RS-232 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .189

Configuration Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .190

Main Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190

1. Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191

2. Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .191

3. System. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192

6. System Status

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193

System Status. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .194

Transmitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .196

Transmitter Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .198

Internet Port (AiT models only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203

Basic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .204

CCVSR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .205

Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .205

IPv4 Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205

IPv6 Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206

Private Certificate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .206

Certificate Signing Request . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207

Copy & Paste. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210

Virtual Transmitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211

Intelligent Dual Video Output Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212

Transmitter Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .213

Transmitter Permissions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214

Receiver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .216

Receiver Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218

Copy & Paste. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222

Receiver Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223

KVM over IP Matrix System User Manual

xii

Video Wall. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224

Receiver Permissions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228

Account. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228

Users. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229

Adding Users. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229

Modifying Users . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231

Deleting Users. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231

Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232

Adding Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232

Modifying Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233

Deleting Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233

Permissions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234

Assigning Device Permissions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234

Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236

Adding a Profile. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237

Adding a Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240

Log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241

7. System Settings

Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243

General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243

Connection Redundancy. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246

ANMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250

Event Destination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250

Authentication & Authorization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252

SNMP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255

FW Upgrade . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256

Firmware Upgrade Recovery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257

Redundancy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258

Backup / Restore . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260

Backup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261

Restore . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261

Certificates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262

Private Certificate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262

Certificate Signing Request. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263

Sessions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265

8. Connections

Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267

Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268

9. Scheduled Profile

Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271

KVM over IP Matrix System User Manual

xiii

10.Sessions

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273

11.Remote Viewer (AiT Models only)

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275

Windows and Java Client Viewer (web access) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .276

The Windows/Java Client AP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278

Download . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .278

Starting Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279

The Control Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281

Control Panel Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .282

Macros. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .284

Hotkeys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .284

Video Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .286

Gamma Adjustment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287

Virtual Media . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289

Virtual Media Icons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .289

Virtual Media Redirection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289

Smart Card Reader . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292

Zoom . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292

The On-Screen Keyboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .293

Mouse Pointer Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294

Mouse DynaSync Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .294

Automatic Mouse Synchronization (DynaSync). . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295

Manual Mouse Synchronization. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295

Control Panel Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296

12.Firmware Upgrade Utility

Preparation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299

Starting the Upgrade . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300

Upgrade Succeeded . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .302

Firmware Upgrade Recovery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .303

13.CLI Commands

Serial Control Protocol Commands. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305

Configuring the Serial Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305

Device/Profile Commands. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306

Telnet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .306

Verification. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .306

Switch Port Command. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307

Mute Command. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .311

Profile Command. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313

EDID Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .315

Reset Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317

RS-232 Command. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .318

KVM over IP Matrix System User Manual

xiv

OSD Command. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321

List Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322

Read Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324

Set Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328

Appendix

Safety Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337

General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337

Rack Mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339

Technical Support. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340

International . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340

North America . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340

Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341

KE6900T / KE6940T . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341

KE6900R / KE6940R . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343

KE6900AT / KE6940AT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344

KE6900AR / KE6940AR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 346

KE6900AiT / KE6940AiT. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347

KE6900ST. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 349

KE6910 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350

KE6912 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 352

KE6920 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 354

KE6922 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 356

KE8900S. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 358

KE8950T / KE8952T . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 359

KE8950R / KE8952R . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 360

KE9900ST. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 361

KE9950 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 362

KE9952 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 364

Optional Rack Mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 366

Dual Rack Mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 366

Transmitter Dual Rack Mounting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 366

Receiver Dual Rack Mounting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 368

Single Rack Mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 370

IP Installer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372

Trusted Certificates. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 373

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 373

Self-Signed Private Certificates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 374

Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 374

Importing the Files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 374

Reset All Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 375

Default Password Pins . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 376

RS-232 Pin Assignments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 382

Transmitter Front RS-232 Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 382

Multicast IP Address. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 383

KVM over IP Matrix System User Manual

KE Multicast Rule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 383

Multicast IP Formula . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 383

If X is between 0 ~ 127 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 383

If X is between 128 ~ 192 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .384

If X is 192 or higher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .384

Keys to Network Performance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 385

Build a Network Diagram. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 385

Other Factors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 385

Choose a High Performance Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .387

Layer 2 or Layer 3 Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 387

Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .387

Number of ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .387

Stackable verse Standalone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 387

What Stackable Switches Can do:. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .388

Switch Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 388

Configuring Switches and KE Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 389

KE transmitter Settings: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 389

Recommended Network Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 389

Additional Mouse Synchronization Procedures. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .391

Windows:. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 391

Sun / Linux . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 392

Virtual Media Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 393

WinClient ActiveX Viewer / WinClient AP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 393

Java Applet Viewer / Java Client AP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 393

Setup CCKM Server IP address on Windows. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 394

Limited Warranty. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .395

KVM over IP Matrix System User Manual

xvi

Package Contents

KE6900 / KE6940

Package content of KE6900T / KE6940T DVI Single/Dual Display KVM over

IP Extender (Transmitter):

1 Transmitter

1 USB DVI-D KVM Cable

1 DVI-D Cable 1.8 m (for KE6940T)

1 Foot Pad Set

1 Power Adapters

1 Mounting Kit

1 User Instructions*

Package content of KE6900R / KE6940R DVI Single/Dual Display KVM over

IP Extender (Receiver):

1 Receiver

1 Power Adapters

1 User Instructions*

KE6900A / KE6940A

Package content of KE6900AT / KE6940AT DVI-I Single / Dual Display

KVM over IP Transmitter:

1 Transmitter

1 USB DVI-D KVM Cable

1 DVI-D Cable 1.8 m (for KE6940AT)

1 Power Adapter & Power Cord

1 Foot Pad Set

1 Mounting Kit

1 User Instructions*

Package content of KE6900AR / KE6940AR DVI-I Single / Dual Display

KVM over IP Receiver:

KVM over IP Matrix System User Manual

xvii

1 Receiver

1 Power Adapter & Power Cord

1 User Instructions*

KE6900AiT / KE6940AiT

Package content of KE6900AiT / KE6940AiT DVI Single/Dual Display KVM

over IP Extender (Transmitter) with Internet:

1 Transmitter

1 USB DVI-D KVM Cable

1 DVI-D Cable 1.8 m (for KE6940AiT)

1 Foot Pad Set

1 Power Adapters

1 Mounting Kit

1 User Instructions*

KE6900ST

Package content of KE6900ST DVI KVM over IP Extender Lite:

1 Transmitter

1 USB DVI-D KVM Cable

1 Foot Pad Set

1 Power Adapter

1 Mounting Kit

1 User Instructions*

KE6910 / KE6912

Package content of KE6910T / KE6912T DVI-D Dual Link KVM over IP

Extender (Transmitter):

1 Transmitter

1 USB DVI-D KVM Cable

1 Power Adapter & Power Cord (for KE6910T)

1 Foot Pad Set

KVM over IP Matrix System User Manual

xviii

1 Mounting Kit

1 User Instructions*

Package content of KE6910R / KE6912R DVI-D Dual Link KVM over IP

Extender (Receiver):

1 Receiver

1 Power Adapter & Power Cord (for KE6910R)

1 User Instructions*

KE6920 / KE6922

Package content of KE6920T DVI-D Dual Link KVM over IP Extender with

Dual SFP (Transmitter) / KE6922T DVI-D Dual Link KVM over IP Extender

with Dual SFP & PoE (Transmitter):

1 Transmitter

1 USB DVI-D KVM Cable

1 Power Adapter & Power Cord (for KE6910T)

1 Foot Pad Set

1 Mounting Kit

1 User Instructions*

Package content of KE6920R DVI-D Dual Link KVM over IP Extender with

Dual SFP (Receiver) / KE6922R DVI-D Dual Link KVM over IP Extender

with Dual SFP & PoE (Receiver):

1 Receiver

1 Power Adapter & Power Cord (for KE6910R)

1 User Instructions*

KE8900S

Package content of KE8900ST Slim HDMI KVM over IP Extender

(Transmitter):

1 Transmitter

1 USB HDMI KVM Cable

1 Foot Pad Set

1 Power Adapter

KVM over IP Matrix System User Manual

xix

1 Mounting Kits

1HDMI Lockpro

1 User Instructions*

Package content of KE8900SR Slim HDMI KVM over IP Extender

(Receiver):

1 Receiver

1 Power Adapter

1 Mounting Kits

1HDMI Lockpro

1 User Instructions*

KE8950 / KE8952

Package content of KE8950T / KE8952T 4K HDMI Single Display KVM over

IP Extender (Transmitter):

1 Transmitter

1 USB HDMI KVM Cable

1 Foot Pad Set

1 Power Adapter & Power Cord (for KE8950T)

1 Mounting Kit

1HDMI Lockpro

1 User Instructions*

Package content of KE8950R / KE8952R 4K HDMI Single Display KVM over

IP Extender (Receiver):

1 Receiver

1 Power Adapter & Power Cord (for KE8950R)

1HDMI Lockpro

1 User Instructions*

KE9900ST

Package content of KE9900ST Slim DisplayPort KVM over IP Extender

(Transmitter):

KVM over IP Matrix System User Manual

1 Transmitter

1 DisplayPort Cable

1 USB 2.0 Type-A to Type-B Cable

1 Power Adapter

1 Mounting Kit

1 User Instructions*

KE9950 / KE9952

Package content of KE9950T / KE9952T 4K DisplayPort KVM over IP

Extender (Transmitter):

1 Transmitter

1 DisplayPort Cable

1 USB 2.0 Type-A to Type-B Cable

1 Foot Pad Set

1 Power Adapter & Power Cord (for KE9950T)

1 Mounting Kit

1 User Instructions*

Package content of KE9950R / KE9952R 4K DisplayPort KVM over IP

Extender (Receiver):

1 Receiver

1 Power Adapter & Power Cord (for KE9950R)

1 User Instructions*

*Features may have been added to the KE6900 / KE6900A / KE6900AiT /

KE6900ST / KE6910 / KE6912 / KE6920 / KE6922 / KE6940 / KE6940A /

KE6940AiT / KE8900S / KE8950 / KE8952 / KE9900ST / KE9950 /

KE9952 since this manual was published. Please visit our website to

download the most up-to-date version.

Check to make sure that all of the components are present and in good order. If anything

is missing, or was damaged in shipping, contact your dealer. Read this manual

thoroughly and follow the installation and operation procedures carefully to prevent any

damage to the KE6900 / KE6900A / KE6900AiT / KE6900ST / KE6910 / KE6912 /

KVM over IP Matrix System User Manual

xxi

KE6920 / KE6922 / KE6940 / KE6940A / KE6940AiT / KE8900S / KE8950 / KE8952

/ KE9900ST / KE9950 / KE9952 or to any other devices on the installation.

Conventions

This manual uses the following conventions:

Product Information

For information about all ATEN products and how they can help you connect

without limits, visit ATEN on the Web or contact an ATEN Authorized

Reseller. Visit ATEN on the Web for a list of locations and telephone numbers:

Monospaced Indicates text that you should key in.

[ ] Indicates keys you should press. For example, [Enter] means

to press the Enter key. If keys need to be chorded, they appear

together in the same bracket with a plus sign between them:

[Ctrl+Alt].

1. Numbered lists represent procedures with sequential steps.

♦Bullet lists provide information, but do not involve sequential

steps.

→Indicates selecting the option (on a menu or dialog box, for

example), that comes next. For example, Start

→

Run means

to open the Start menu, and then select Run.

Indicates critical information.

International http://www.aten.com

North America http://www.aten-usa.com

KVM over IP Matrix System User Manual

xxii

This Page Intentionally Left Blank

Chapter 1

Introduction

Overview

The KVM over IP Matrix System is a solution that combines KE Series KVM

over IP Extenders (KE6900, KE6900A, KE6900AiT, KE6940, KE6940A,

KE6940AiT, KE6900ST, KE6910, KE6912, KE6920, KE6922, KE8900S,

KE8950, KE8952, KE9900ST, KE9950, KE9952), with the KE Matrix

Manager Software (CCKM) to extend, control and monitor access to

computers, across a network, in a multitude of ways. The system lets you setup

a matrix of remote KVM consoles that access computers across a network, with

the flexibility to control and configure each connection.

The high-performance IP-based KE Extenders are consisted of a transmitter

and a receiver. The transmitter connects to a computer to deliver the

computer’s data to the receiver to collectively provide console access from a

remote or separate location. The computer can be accessed from the remote

console via a standard TCP/IP network or direct Ethernet cable connection.

This is perfect for any installation where you need to place the console where

it is convenient, but you want the computer to reside in a secure location - away

from the keyboard, mouse and display.

The extenders support flawless and lossless video compression quality with

ultra low latency, some extenders also support 2K x 2K video resolution (2048

x 2048 @ 60Hz), which is used widely in the Air Traffic Control (ATC)

industry. For a list of video resolution support, refer to Supported Video

Resolutions on page 7.

For power redundancy, some extenders have dual power supplies, some

provide single power supply with a Power over Ethernet (PoE) LAN port,

while some provide dual power supplies and a PoE LAN port.

Some extenders support Fiber Channel over Ethernet via SFP fiber modules*

which connect to a network switch at speeds up to 1 Gbps. The extenders can

connect unit-to-unit or over a TCP/IP network via Gigabit Ethernet or the SFP

ports. Connecting both methods allows network failover.

The non-slim KE over IP Extenders have local On Screen Display (OSD) on

the receiver end to configure both receiver and transmitter - for easy setup and

operation. Both the transmitter and receiver have RS-232 ports to connect to a

KVM over IP Matrix System User Manual

serial terminal for configuration or serial devices such as touchscreens and

barcode scanners.

The AiT models can connect to an Office LAN to support the Control Center

Video Session Recorder (CCVSR) software and WinClient/JavaClient. The

CCVSR records all operations made on servers accessed through KVM over

IP switches. Every operation and change are recorded and saved to a secure

video file for security reference and troubleshooting purposes, etc.. By using

WinClient/JavaClient, you are provided with console access from a separate

location over intranet and/or Internet.

Slimmer versions of KE over IP Extenders are also available. These are

KE6900ST, KE8900S or KE9900ST, and are cost and space saving

alternatives for installations with extenders that don't need a local console or

audio transmission, but want the connectivity features of advanced KE models.

KE6900ST is a slim KVM over IP Transmitter that supports DVI input.

KE8900S offers a slim KVM over IP Transmitter (KE8900ST) and a slim

KVM over IP Receiver (KE8900SR) to respectively support HDMI video

input from the computer and one HDMI monitor output. KE9900ST is a slim

KVM over IP Transmitter that supports DisplayPort input. In addition to a DC

power jack, both the KE8900ST and KE9900ST transmitters have an extra DC

terminal block each for convenient installation.

Since different KE over IP Extenders support different types of video

interfaces (DVI, HDMI, DisplayPort, etc.), video resolutions, power

redundancy function and network failover feature, administrators/users may

select and tailor what is currently best for your environment, and for expected

or unexpected future expansions.

Refer to the table below for the variations in interfaces, functions and features:

Models

DVI HDMI DisplayPort Power Redun-

dancy via PoE*

Power Redun-

dancy via Second

Power Jack

Network Failover -

SFP

KE6900 1 - - - - -

KE6900A 1 - - - 1 1

KE6900AiT 1 - - - 1 1

KE6900ST 1 - - - - -

KE6910 1 - - - 1 1

KE6912 1 - - 1 - 1

KE6920 1 - - - 1 2

KE6922 1 - - 1 1 2

KE6940 2 - - - - -

KE6940A 2 - - - 1 1

KE6940AiT 2 - - - 1 1

KE8900S - 1 - - - -

KE8950 - 1 - - - 1

Chapter 1. Introduction

*Power redundancy via PoE requires power board version B01G or later (see

PoE Power Redundanc y on page 73 for more details).

KVM over IP Extenders allow flexible setup as they can make console-to-

computer connections in several ways: one-to-one (Extender mode), one-to-

many (Splitter mode), many-to-one (Switch mode), or many-to-many (Matrix

mode).

The KE Matrix Manager Software (CCKM) allows you to define the

aforementioned matrix connections and manage KE Extenders with features

such as auto-detection of KE Extenders, username/password authentication,

switching and sharing of connections, scheduling, permissions and more.

Whether you're extending computer access for Monitoring, Broadcasting,

Editing or Workstation setup, the KVM over IP Matrix System gives you the

flexibility and control to manage one or hundreds of extended connections. For

more detailed feature list, refer to Features on page 4.

Note: The SFP module is sold separately. You can choose the 2A-136G, a

multi-mode SFP module that provides 1 GbE connectivity up to 550

meters; or the 2A-137G, a single-mode SFP module that provides 1 GbE

connectivity up to 10 kilometers. Visit ATEN's website or contact your

ATEN dealer for more information.

KE8952 - 1 - 1 - 1

KE9900ST - - 1 - - -

KE9950 - - 1 - 1 1

KE9952 - - 1 1 - 1

Models

DVI HDMI DisplayPort Power Redun-

dancy via PoE*

Power Redun-

dancy via Second

Power Jack

Network Failover -

SFP

KVM over IP Matrix System User Manual

Features

Remote KVM console access of computers over LAN or Ethernet cable

connection

Dual console operation – control your system from both the Transmitter

and Receiver by USB keyboard, monitor, and mouse

RS-232 serial ports

allows you to connect to a serial terminal for

configuration, and serial devices such as touchscreens and barcode

scanners

Superior video quality

– up to 1920 x 1200 @ 60 Hz with 24-bit color

depth (KE69 Series); up to 3840 x 2160 @ 30 Hz (4:4:4) with 36-bit color

depth (KE89 Series, KE99 Series)

Supports standard resolutions from 640 x 480 to 1920 x 1200 @ 60 Hz

(KE69 Series); and resolutions from 640 x 480 to 3840 x 2160 @ 30 Hz

(KE89 Series, KE99 Series)

Supports 2K x 2K video resolution (2048 x 2048 @ 60Hz) (KE6910/

KE6912/KE6920/KE6922)

OSD (On Screen Display) on the Receiver configures Tx / Rx devices

Supports KE Matrix Manager Web GUI

administration

Supports Power over Ethernet (PoE) functionality – compliant with IEEE

802.3at and 802.3af standards (KE6912, KE6922, KE8952 and KE9952)

Boundless Switching – simply move the mouse cursor across screen

boundaries to switch between different receivers

Intelligent Dual Video Output Management – split two video sources from

a dual display Transmitter and connect to each from different Receivers

(KE6940/KE6940A)

Gigabit Ethernet port

Remote login security

DVI digital and analog monitor support (KE6900/KE6900A/KE6900AiT/

KE6900ST/KE6910/KE6912/KE6920/KE6922/KE6940/KE6940A/

KE6940AiT)

HDMI monitor support (KE8900S/KE8950/KE8952)

DisplayPort monitor support (KE9900ST/KE9950/KE9952)

Built-in ESD protection and surge protection

Supports 2 channel analog (KE69 Series) and 7.1 channel surround sound

(KE89/KE99 Series) stereo speakers and microphone

Chapter 1. Introduction

Auto-MDIX - automatically detects cable type

Supports widescreen formats

Supports High-Quality Video streaming

Virtual Media Support

Hot pluggable

Rack Mountable

Upgradeable firmware

Supports digital audio (KE8900S/KE8950/KE8952/KE9900ST/KE9950/

KE9952)

Adaptive Fast Switching – automatically fast switches between different

Tx video resolutions on a Rx display within 0.3 second (KE6910/KE6912)

Authentication Lock – automatically logs in when the power of the system

is resumed after power off

Connection Redundancy – automatically connects to another transmitter

(Tx) after disconnection with the original Tx, ensuring constant access to

servers (KE6900A/KE6900AiT/KE6910/KE6912/KE6920/KE6922/

KE6940A/KE6940AiT)

Disconnection Alert – Pop-up warning message and looping alarm

beeping notify users the disconnection status (KE6910/KE6912)

Instant Link – Switch intuitively and efficiently between transmitter (Tx)

on a receiver (Rx) display

Supports recording of remotely-accessed computer operations using

ATEN CCVSR Video Session Recording Software

“Push” and “Pull” – shares content instantly to/from a single Rx or video

wall by just one click

Video Walls – create multiple video walls with up to 8 x 8 (64 displays

max.) in each layout

Four selectable access modes for multiple simultaneous access (Exclusive/

Occupy/Share/ View only mode)

Supports remote access via WinClient / JavaClient over intranet or Internet

Rx access control – users at the Tx local console can enable / disable Rx

access by simply pressing a control button

Note: 1. RS-232 serial ports support Tx/Rx/CTS/RTS/DTR/DSR signals only.

2. Refer to Supported Video Resolutions below for details.

KVM over IP Matrix System User Manual

3. The KE Matrix Manager web GUI can be updated from the CCKM

page on our website (www.aten.com) or via eService website (http://

eservice.aten.com). The free version supports up to 8 KE devices. To

obtain a license for the full version of the software, please contact

your ATEN dealer.

4. The KVM over IP Access Control Box (2XRT-0015G) is sold

separately. Contact your ATEN dealer for product information.

Chapter 1. Introduction

Supported Video Resolutions

Resolutions

KE6900/KE6940

KE6900A/KE6940A

KE6900AiT/

KE6940AiT

KE6910/KE6912

KE6920/KE6922

KE8950/KE8952

KE9950/KE9952

KE6900ST

KE8900S

KE9900ST

3840 x 2160 @ 24/25/30 Hz ●

3440 x 1440 @ 50 Hz ●

2560 x 2048 @ 50 Hz ●

2560 x 1600 @ 60 Hz ●●

2560 x 1440 @ 60 Hz ●●

2560 x 1080 @ 24/25/30/50/

60/100/120 Hz ●

2048 x 2048 @ 30/60 Hz ●

2048 x 1536 @ 60 Hz ●●

2048 x 1536 @ 30 Hz ●

2048 x 1152 @ 60 Hz ●

1600 x 1600 @ 60 Hz ●

1920 x 2160 @ 60 Hz ●

1920 x 2160 @ 30 Hz ●●

1920 x 1440 @ 60 Hz ●●

1920 x 1200 @ 60 Hz ●●●●

1920 x 1080 @ 60 Hz ●●●●

1600 x 1200 @ 60 Hz ●●●●

1680 x 1050 @ 60 Hz ●●●●

1400 x 1050 @ 60 Hz ●●●●

1280 x 1024 @ 60/75 Hz ●●●●

1280 x 960 @ 60 Hz ●●●●

1280 x 800 @ 60 Hz ●

1600 x 900 @ 60 Hz ●●●●

1440 x 900 @ 60 Hz ●●●●

1152 x 864 @ 75 Hz ●●●●

1366 x 768 @ 60 Hz ●●●●

1280 x 720 @ 60 Hz ●●●●

1024 x 76 8 @ 60/70/75/85 Hz ●●●●

848 x 480 @ 60 Hz ●

800 x 600 @ 56/60/72/75/85

Hz ●●●●

720 x 400 @ 70/85 Hz ●●●●

640 x 480 @ 60/72/75/85 Hz ●●●●

KVM over IP Matrix System User Manual

Requirements

Console

(KE6900/KE6900A/KE6900AiT/KE6900ST/KE6910/KE6912/KE6920/

KE6922) One DVI compatible monitor capable of the highest possible

resolution

(KE6940/KE6940A/KE6940AiT) Two DVI compatible monitors capable

of the highest possible resolution

(KE8900S/KE8950/KE8952) One HDMI compatible monitor capable of

the highest possible resolution

(KE9900ST/KE9950/KE9952) One DisplayPort compatible monitor

capable of the highest possible resolution

A USB mouse

A USB keyboard

Microphone and speakers

Computers

The following equipment must be installed on each computer that is to be

connected to the system:

(KE6900/KE6900A/KE6900AiT/KE6900ST/KE6910/KE6912/KE6920/

KE6922) One DVI port

(KE6940/KE6940A/KE6940AiT) Two DVI ports

(KE8900S/KE8950/KE8952) One HDMI port

(KE9900ST/KE9950/KE9952) One DisplayPort port

USB Type A port

Audio ports

Cables

For optimal signal integrity and to simplify the setup, we strongly

recommend that you only use the high quality custom USB KVM Cable

that is provided with this package.

Chapter 1. Introduction

Minimum Hardware/Software Requirements

The minimum hardware and software requirements for the computer running

the KE Matrix Manager software are:

Processor: Pentium 4, 2.60 GHz or above

Memory: 1GB or above

HDD: 500MB or above

Web browser: Internet Explorer 10 (or later), Chrome 70 (or later), Firefox

62 (or later)

Operating System Requirements:

Windows 7, 8.1, 10, server 2008, server 2012, or server 2016

Linux Ubuntu 16.04, CentOS 7

Note: Only Java Runtime Environment (JRE) 8 andOpenJDK 8 is supported.

KVM over IP Matrix System User Manual

Components

KE6900T (Transmitter) Front View

No. Component Description

1 Audio Ports These mini stereo ports are for the speakers (green)

and microphone (pink).

2 KVM Ports The USB KVM cable supplied with the package that

links the Transmitter to the computer plugs into these

ports.

3 RS-232 Port This RS-232 serial port is for connecting to the

computer for serial control.

4 Remote / Local LED Lights Green to indicate which side of the installation

(Local or Remote) currently has KVM control of the

computer.

5 LAN LED This LED indicates the network status.



Lights when connected to the LAN and blinks when

the Ethernet connection is active:



Orange: 10 Mbps



Orange + Green: 100 Mbps



Green: 1000 Mbps



Off when not connected to the LAN.

6 Power LED Lights blue to indicate the unit is turned on.

3456

Chapter 1. Introduction

KE6900T (Transmitter) Rear View

No. Component Description

1 Grounding Terminal The wire used to ground the unit connects here.

2 Reset This switch must be pushed with a thin object, such as

the end of a paper clip.



Press and release to reboot the device.



Power off, hold reset then power on the device

while pressing reset to recover from a firmware

upgrade failure.



Press and hold it in for more then three seconds

resets the unit back to its factory default

settings*.

Note: The Reset to Factory Default function resets everything

but the login information (username/password) to the factory

default settings. To reset the login information, refer to Reset

All Information on page 381.

3 Audio Ports These mini stereo ports are for the speakers (green)

and microphone (pink).

4 Power Jack The cable from the DC Power adapter connects here.

5 Function Switch Use this slide switch to set the unit’s mode to:



Auto: Shared (simultaneous) KVM control of the

computer at the Transmitter and Receiver console.*



RS-232 Config: The device is ready to be

configured via serial commands through the RS-232

port. When connected to a KVM over IP Access

Control Box (2XRT-0015G), users can enable /

disable control privileges of the connected

receivers.



Local: Only the local Transmitter has KVM control

of the computer. The Receiver’s KVM access to the

computer is locked.

Note: In Auto mode, RS-232 and audio functions will

work on the Receiver but not on the Transmitter.

789

KVM over IP Matrix System User Manual

6 RS-232 Port This RS-232 serial port is for connecting to a serial

terminal.

7 Console Ports The unit’s USB keyboard and USB mouse plug into

these ports.

8 LAN Port The cable that connects the unit to the LAN plugs in

here.

9 DVI-I Output The cable from the local DVI monitor plugs in here.

No. Component Description

Chapter 1. Introduction

KE6900R (Receiver) Front View

No. Component Description

1 Power LED Lights blue to indicate the unit is turned on.

2 LAN LED This LED indicates the network status.



Lights when connected to the LAN and blinks when

the Ethernet connection is active:



Orange: 10 Mbps



Orange + Green: 100 Mbps



Green: 1000 Mbps



Off when not connected to the LAN.

3 Local LED Lights green to Indicate the Transmitter has KVM

access of the computer.

4 Remote LED Lights green to Indicate the Receiver has KVM access

of the computer.

5 Graphics Pushbutton Sets the image quality of the display to the highest

possible grade so that images are optimized. This

toggle button turns off the Video Pushbutton option.

Graphics mode is selected by default.

6 OSD Pushbutton Use this pushbutton to open the OSD menu.

7 Video Pushbutton Sets the image quality of the display to a grade that is

optimized for playing videos. This toggle button turns

off the Graphics Pushbutton option.

1432

Graphics OSD Video

POWER LAN LOCAL REMOTE

56 7 8

KVM over IP Matrix System User Manual

8 USB Port Use this port for virtual media or a USB peripheral

device.

Note: 1. When using a USB disk plugged into this

port, see USB Mode, page 226.

2. This USB port does not support isochronous

endpoints, therefore USB peripherals that

stream audio or video data, such as

speakers or webcams, will not work.

No. Component Description

Chapter 1. Introduction

KE6900R (Receiver) Rear View

No. Component Description

1 Grounding

Terminal

The wire used to ground the unit connects here.

2 Reset This switch must be pushed with a thin object, such as the

end of a paper clip.



Press and release to reboot the device.



Power off, hold reset then power on the device while

pressing reset to recover from a firmware upgrade

failure.



Press and hold it in for more then three seconds

resets the unit back to its factory default settings*.

Note: The Reset to Factory Default function resets everything but

the login information (username/password) to the factory default

settings. To reset the login information, refer to Reset All Information

on page 381.

3 Audio Ports These mini stereo ports are for the local speakers (green)

and microphone (pink).

4 USB Port Use this port for virtual media or a USB peripheral device.

Note: 1. When using a USB disk plugged into this port, see

USB Mode, page 226.

2. This USB port does not support isochronous

endpoints, therefore USB peripherals that stream

audio or video data, such as speakers or

webcams, will not work.

5 Power Jack The cable from the DC Power adapter connects here.

6 Function Switch Use this slide switch to set the unit’s mode:



Extension: Sets the device to use the normal TX to RX

extension mode.



RS-232 Config: The device is ready to be configured via

serial commands through the RS-232 port.

7 RS-232 Port This RS-232 serial port is for connecting to a serial terminal.

567

8910

KVM over IP Matrix System User Manual

8 Console Ports The unit’s USB keyboard and USB mouse plug into these

ports. When using a keyboard or mouse with special

functions, see USB Mode, page 226.

9 LAN Port The cable that connects the unit to the LAN plugs in here.

10 DVI-I Output The cable from the local DVI monitor plugs in here.

No. Component Description

Chapter 1. Introduction

KE6900AT (Transmitter) Front View

No. Component Description

1 Audio Ports These mini stereo ports are for the speakers (green)

and microphone (pink).

2 KVM Ports The USB KVM cable supplied with the package that

links the Transmitter to the computer plugs into these

ports.

3 RS-232 Port This RS-232 serial port is for connecting to the

computer for serial control.

4 Remote / Local LED Lights Green to indicate which side of the installation

(Local or Remote) currently has KVM control of the

computer.

5 LAN LED This LED indicates the network status.



Lights when connected to the LAN and blinks when

the Ethernet connection is active:



Orange: 10 Mbps



Orange + Green: 100 Mbps



Green: 1000 Mbps



Off when not connected to the LAN.

6 Power LED Lights blue to indicate the unit is turned on.

3456

KVM over IP Matrix System User Manual

KE6900AT (Transmitter) Rear View

No. Component Description

1 Grounding Terminal The wire used to ground the unit connects here.

2 Reset This switch must be pushed with a thin object, such as

the end of a paper clip.



Press and release to reboot the device.



Power off, hold reset then power on the device

while pressing reset to recover from a firmware

upgrade failure.



Press and hold it in for more then three seconds

resets the unit back to its factory default

settings*.

Note: The Reset to Factory Default function resets everything

but the login information (username/password) to the factory

default settings. To reset the login information, refer to Reset

All Information on page 381.

3 Audio Ports These mini stereo ports are for the speakers (green)

and microphone (pink).

4 LAN Port The cable that connects the unit to the LAN plugs in

here.

5 Power Jack The cable from the DC Power adapter connects here.

8 9 10 11

Chapter 1. Introduction

6 Function Switch Use this slide switch to set the unit’s mode to:



Auto: Shared (simultaneous) KVM control of the

computer at the Transmitter and Receiver console.*



RS-232 Config: The device is ready to be

configured via serial commands through the RS-232

port. When connected to a KVM over IP Access

Control Box (2XRT-0015G), users can enable /

disable control privileges of the connected

receivers.



Local: Only the local Transmitter has KVM control

of the computer. The Receiver’s KVM access to the

computer is locked.

Note: In Auto mode, RS-232 and audio functions will

work on the Receiver but not on the Transmitter.

7 RS-232 Port This RS-232 serial port is for connecting to a serial

terminal.

8 Console Ports The unit’s USB keyboard and USB mouse plug into

these ports.

9 SFP Slot The Gigabit Ethernet (GbE) optical fiber cable that

connects the unit to the LAN plugs in here.

10 DVI-I Output The cable from the local DVI monitor plugs in here.

11 Power Jack Connect a second power source for power

redundancy.

No. Component Description

KVM over IP Matrix System User Manual

KE6900AR (Receiver) Front View

No. Component Description

1 Power LED Lights blue to indicate the unit is turned on.

2 LAN LED This LED indicates the network status.



Lights when connected to the LAN and blinks when

the Ethernet connection is active:



Orange: 10 Mbps



Orange + Green: 100 Mbps



Green: 1000 Mbps



Off when not connected to the LAN.

3 Local LED Lights green to Indicate the Transmitter has KVM

access of the computer.

4 Remote LED Lights green to Indicate the Receiver has KVM access

of the computer.

5 Graphics Pushbutton Sets the image quality of the display to the highest

possible grade so that images are optimized. This

toggle button turns off the Video Pushbutton option.

Graphics mode is selected by default.

6 OSD Pushbutton Use this pushbutton to open the OSD menu.

7 Video Pushbutton Sets the image quality of the display to a grade that is

optimized for playing videos. This toggle button turns

off the Graphics Pushbutton option.

8 USB Port Use this port for virtual media or a USB peripheral

device.

Note: When using a USB disk plugged into this port,

see USB Mode, page 226.

1432

Graphics OSD Video

POWER LAN LOCAL REMOTE

56 7 8

Chapter 1. Introduction

KE6900AR (Receiver) Rear View

No. Component Description

1 Grounding

Terminal

The wire used to ground the unit connects here.

2 Reset This switch must be pushed with a thin object, such as the

end of a paper clip.



Press and release to reboot the device.



Power off, hold reset then power on the device while

pressing reset to recover from a firmware upgrade

failure.



Press and hold it in for more then three seconds

resets the unit back to its factory default settings*.

Note: The Reset to Factory Default function resets everything but

the login information (username/password) to the factory default

settings. To reset the login information, refer to Reset All Information

on page 381.

3 Audio Ports These mini stereo ports are for the local speakers (green)

and microphone (pink).

4 USB Port Use this port for virtual media or a USB peripheral device.

Note: When using a USB disk plugged into this port, see

USB Mode, page 226.

5 LAN Port The cable that connects the unit to the LAN plugs in here.

6 Power Jack The cable from the DC Power adapter connects here.

7 Function Switch Use this slide switch to set the unit’s mode:



Extension: Sets the device to use the normal TX to RX

extension mode.



RS-232 Config: The device is ready to be configured via

serial commands through the RS-232 port.

8 RS-232 Port This RS-232 serial port is for connecting to a serial terminal.

910 11 12

KVM over IP Matrix System User Manual

9 Console Ports The unit’s USB keyboard and USB mouse plug into these

ports. When using a keyboard or mouse with special

functions, see USB Mode, page 226.

10 SFP Slot The Gigabit Ethernet (GbE) optical fiber cable that connects

the unit to the LAN plugs in here.

11 DVI-I Output The cable from the local DVI monitor plugs in here.

12 Power Jack Connect a second power source for power redundancy.

No. Component Description

Chapter 1. Introduction

KE6900AiT (Transmitter) Front View

No. Component Description

1 Audio Ports These mini stereo ports are for the speakers (green)

and microphone (pink).

2 KVM Ports The USB KVM cable supplied with the package that

links the Transmitter to the computer plugs into these

ports.

3 RS-232 Port This RS-232 serial port is for connecting to the

computer for serial control.

4 Remote / Local LED Lights Green to indicate which side of the installation

(Local or Remote) currently has KVM control of the

computer.

5 LAN LED This LED indicates the network status.



Lights when connected to the LAN and blinks when

the Ethernet connection is active:



Orange: 10 Mbps



Orange + Green: 100 Mbps



Green: 1000 Mbps



Off when not connected to the LAN.

6 Power LED Lights blue to indicate the unit is turned on.

3456

KVM over IP Matrix System User Manual

KE6900AiT (Transmitter) Rear View

No. Component Description

1 Grounding Terminal The wire used to ground the unit connects here.

2 Reset This switch must be pushed with a thin object, such as

the end of a paper clip.



Press and release to reboot the device.



Power off, hold reset then power on the device

while pressing reset to recover from a firmware

upgrade failure.



Press and hold it in for more then three seconds

resets the unit back to its factory default

settings*.

Note: The Reset to Factory Default function resets everything

but the login information (username/password) to the factory

default settings. To reset the login information, refer to Reset

All Information on page 381.

3 Audio Ports These mini stereo ports are for the speakers (green)

and microphone (pink).

4 LAN Port The cable that connects the unit to the LAN plugs in

here.

5 Internet Port Connect an Internet-enabled Ethernet cable to allow

access to the web interface or CCVSR recording.

6 Power Jack The cable from the DC Power adapter connects here.

910 11 12

Chapter 1. Introduction

7 Function Switch Use this slide switch to set the unit’s mode to:



Auto: Shared (simultaneous) KVM control of the

computer at the Transmitter and Receiver console.*



RS-232 Config: The device is ready to be

configured via serial commands through the RS-232

port. When connected to a KVM over IP Access

Control Box (2XRT-0015G), users can enable /

disable control privileges of the connected

receivers.



Local: Only the local Transmitter has KVM control

of the computer. The Receiver’s KVM access to the

computer is locked.

Note: In Auto mode, RS-232 and audio functions will

work on the Receiver but not on the Transmitter.

8 RS-232 Port This RS-232 serial port is for connecting to a serial

terminal.

9 Console Ports The unit’s USB keyboard and USB mouse plug into

these ports.

10 SFP Slot The Gigabit Ethernet (GbE) optical fiber cable that

connects the unit to the LAN plugs in here.

11 DVI-I Output The cable from the local DVI monitor plugs in here.

12 Power Jack Connect a second power source for power

redundancy.

No. Component Description

KVM over IP Matrix System User Manual

KE6910T / KE6912T (Transmitter) Front View

No. Component Description

1 Audio Ports These mini stereo ports are for the speakers (green)

and microphone (pink).

2 KVM Ports The USB KVM cable supplied with the package that

links the Transmitter to the computer plugs into these

ports.

3 RS-232 Port This RS-232 serial port is for connecting to the

computer for serial control.

4 Remote / Local LED Lights green to indicate which side of the installation

(Local or Remote) has KVM control of the computer.

5 LAN LED This LED indicates the network status.



Lights when connected to the LAN and blinks when

the Ethernet connection is active:



Orange: 10 Mbps



Orange + Green: 100 Mbps



Green: 1000 Mbps



Off when not connected to the LAN.

6 Power LED Lights blue to indicate the unit is turned on.

243

5 6

Chapter 1. Introduction

KE6910T / KE6912T (Transmitter) Rear View

No. Component Description

1 Grounding Terminal The wire used to ground the unit connects here.

2 Reset This switch must be pushed with a thin object, such as

the end of a paper clip.



Press and release to reboot the device.



Power off, hold reset then power on the device

while pressing reset to recover from a firmware

upgrade failure.



Press and hold it in for more then three seconds

resets the unit back to its factory default

settings*.

Note: The Reset to Factory Default function resets everything

but the login information (username/password) to the factory

default settings. To reset the login information, refer to Reset

All Information on page 381.

3 Audio Ports These mini stereo ports are for the local speakers

(green) and microphone (pink).

4 Power Jack The cable from the DC Power adapter connects here.

5 Function Switch Use this slide switch to set the unit’s mode to:



Auto: Shared (simultaneous) KVM control of the

computer at the Transmitter and Receiver console.*



RS-232 Config: The device is ready to be

configured via serial commands through the RS-232

port. When connected to a KVM over IP Access

Control Box (2XRT-0015G), users can enable /

disable control privileges of the connected

receivers.



Local: Only the local Transmitter has KVM control

of the computer. The Receiver’s KVM access to the

computer is locked.

Note: In Auto mode, RS-232 and audio functions will

work on the Receiver but not on the Transmitter.

456

789

10 11

KVM over IP Matrix System User Manual

6 RS-232 Port This RS-232 serial port is for connecting to a serial

terminal.

7 Console Ports The unit’s USB keyboard and USB mouse plug into

these ports.

8 LAN Port The cable that connects the unit to the LAN plugs in

here.

This port is PoE enabled* for KE6912 for power

redundancy or cable management.

*Requires power board version B01G or later (see

PoE Power Redundancy on page 73 for more details).

9 SFP Slot The Gigabit Ethernet (GbE) optical fiber cable that

connects the unit to the LAN plugs in here.

10 DVI-D Output The cable from the local DVI monitor plugs in here.

11 Power Jack

(KE6910T only)

Connect a second power source for power

redundancy.

No. Component Description

Chapter 1. Introduction

KE6910R / KE6912R (Receiver) Front View

No. Component Description

1 Power LED Lights blue to indicate the unit is turned on.

2 LAN LED This LED indicates the network status.



Lights when connected to the LAN and blinks when

the Ethernet connection is active:



Orange: 10 Mbps



Orange + Green: 100 Mbps



Green: 1000 Mbps



Off when not connected to the LAN.

3 Local LED Lights green to Indicate the Transmitter has KVM

access of the computer.

4 Remote LED Lights green to Indicate the Receiver has KVM access

of the computer.

5 Graphics Pushbutton Sets the image quality of the display to the highest

possible grade so that images are optimized. This

toggle button turns off the Video Pushbutton option.

Graphics mode is selected by default.

6 OSD Pushbutton Use this pushbutton to open the OSD menu.

7 Video Pushbutton Sets the image quality of the display to a grade that is

optimized for playing videos. This toggle button turns

off the Graphics Pushbutton option.

8 USB Port Use this port for virtual media or a USB peripheral

device.

Note: When using a USB disk plugged into this port,

see USB Mode, page 226.

1432

Graphics OSD Video

POWER LAN LOCAL REMOTE

56 7 8

KVM over IP Matrix System User Manual

KE6910R / KE6912R (Receiver) Rear View

No. Component Description

1 Grounding Terminal The wire used to ground the unit connects here.

2 Reset This switch must be pushed with a thin object, such as

the end of a paper clip.



Press and release to reboot the device.



Power off, hold reset then power on the device

while pressing reset to recover from a firmware

upgrade failure.



Press and hold it in for more then three seconds

resets the unit back to its factory default

settings*.

Note: The Reset to Factory Default function resets everything

but the login information (username/password) to the factory

default settings. To reset the login information, refer to Reset

All Information on page 381.

3 Audio Ports These mini stereo ports are for the local speakers

(green) and microphone (pink).

4 USB Port Use this port for virtual media or a USB peripheral

device.

Note: Note: When using a USB disk plugged into this

port, see USB Mode, page 226.

5 Power Jack The cable from the DC Power adapter connects here.

6 Function Switch Use this slide switch to set the unit’s mode:



Extension: Sets the device to use the normal TX to

RX extension mode.



RS-232 Config: The device is ready to be

configured via serial commands through the RS-232

port.

7 RS-232 Port This RS-232 serial port is for connecting to a serial

terminal.

8 Console Ports The unit’s USB keyboard and USB mouse plug into

these ports.

567

8910

11 12

Chapter 1. Introduction

9 LAN Port The cable that connects the unit to the LAN plugs in

here.

This port is PoE enabled* for KE6912 for power

redundancy or cable management.

*Requires power board version B01G or later (see

PoE Power Redundancy on page 73 for more details).

10 SFP Slot The Gigabit Ethernet (GbE) optical fiber cable that

connects the unit to the LAN plugs in here.

11 DVI-D Output The cable from the local DVI monitor plugs in here.

12 Power Jack

(KE6910R only)

Connect a second power source for power

redundancy.

No. Component Description

KVM over IP Matrix System User Manual

KE6920T / KE6922T (Transmitter) Front View

No. Component Description

1 Audio Ports These mini stereo ports are for the speakers (green)

and microphone (pink).

2 KVM Ports The USB KVM cable supplied with the package that

links the Transmitter to the computer plugs into these

ports.

3 RS-232 Port This RS-232 serial port is for connecting to the

computer for serial control.

4 Remote / Local LED Lights green to indicate which side of the installation

(Local or Remote) has KVM control of the computer.

5 LAN LED This LED indicates the network status.



Lights when connected to the LAN and blinks when

the Ethernet connection is active:



Orange: 10 Mbps



Orange + Green: 100 Mbps



Green: 1000 Mbps



Off when not connected to the LAN.

6 Power LED Lights blue to indicate the unit is turned on.

243

5 6

Chapter 1. Introduction

KE6920T / KE6922T (Transmitter) Rear View

No. Component Description

1 Grounding Terminal The wire used to ground the unit connects here.

2 Reset This switch must be pushed with a thin object, such as

the end of a paper clip.



Press and release to reboot the device.



Power off, hold reset then power on the device

while pressing reset to recover from a firmware

upgrade failure.



Press and hold it in for more then three seconds

resets the unit back to its factory default

settings*.

Note: The Reset to Factory Default function resets everything

but the login information (username/password) to the factory

default settings. To reset the login information, refer to Reset

All Information on page 381.

3 Audio Ports These mini stereo ports are for the local speakers

(green) and microphone (pink).

4 Power Jack The cable from the DC Power adapter connects here.

5 Function Switch Use this slide switch to set the unit’s mode to:



Auto: Shared (simultaneous) KVM control of the

computer at the Transmitter and Receiver console.*



RS-232 Config: The device is ready to be

configured via serial commands through the RS-232

port. When connected to a KVM over IP Access

Control Box (2XRT-0015G), users can enable /

disable control privileges of the connected

receivers.



Local: Only the local Transmitter has KVM control

of the computer. The Receiver’s KVM access to the

computer is locked.

Note: In Auto mode, RS-232 and audio functions will

work on the Receiver but not on the Transmitter.

456

789

10 11

KVM over IP Matrix System User Manual

6 RS-232 Port This RS-232 serial port is for connecting to a serial

terminal.

7 Console Ports The unit’s USB keyboard and USB mouse plug into

these ports.

8 LAN Port The cable that connects the unit to the LAN plugs in

here.

This port is PoE enabled* for KE6922 for power

redundancy or cable management.

*Requires power board version B01G or later (see

PoE Power Redundancy on page 73 for more details).

9 SFP Slots The Gigabit Ethernet (GbE) optical fiber cable that

connects the unit to the LAN can be plugged here.

10 DVI-D Output The cable from the local DVI monitor plugs in here.

11 Power Jack Connect a second power source for power

redundancy.

No. Component Description

Chapter 1. Introduction

KE6920R / KE6922R (Receiver) Front View

No. Component Description

1 Power LED Lights blue to indicate the unit is turned on.

2 LAN LED This LED indicates the network status.



Lights when connected to the LAN and blinks when

the Ethernet connection is active:



Orange: 10 Mbps



Orange + Green: 100 Mbps



Green: 1000 Mbps



Off when not connected to the LAN.

3 Local LED Lights green to Indicate the Transmitter has KVM

access of the computer.

4 Remote LED Lights green to Indicate the Receiver has KVM access

of the computer.

5 Graphics Pushbutton Sets the image quality of the display to the highest

possible grade so that images are optimized. This

toggle button turns off the Video Pushbutton option.

Graphics mode is selected by default.

6 OSD Pushbutton Use this pushbutton to open the OSD menu.

7 Video Pushbutton Sets the image quality of the display to a grade that is

optimized for playing videos. This toggle button turns

off the Graphics Pushbutton option.

8 USB Port Note: Use this port for virtual media or a USB

peripheral device.When using a USB disk plugged into

this port, see USB Mode, page 226.

1432

Graphics OSD Video

POWER LAN LOCAL REMOTE

56 7 8

KVM over IP Matrix System User Manual

KE6920R / KE6922R (Receiver) Rear View

No. Component Description

1 Grounding Terminal The wire used to ground the unit connects here.

2 Reset This switch must be pushed with a thin object, such as

the end of a paper clip.



Press and release to reboot the device.



Power off, hold reset then power on the device

while pressing reset to recover from a firmware

upgrade failure.



Press and hold it in for more then three seconds

resets the unit back to its factory default

settings*.

Note: The Reset to Factory Default function resets everything

but the login information (username/password) to the factory

default settings. To reset the login information, refer to Reset

All Information on page 381.

3 Audio Ports These mini stereo ports are for the local speakers

(green) and microphone (pink).

4 USB Port Use this port for virtual media or a USB peripheral

device.

Note: Note: When using a USB disk plugged into this

port, see USB Mode, page 226.

5 Power Jack The cable from the DC Power adapter connects here.

6 Function Switch Use this slide switch to set the unit’s mode:



Extension: Sets the device to use the normal TX to

RX extension mode.



RS-232 Config: The device is ready to be

configured via serial commands through the RS-232

port.

7 RS-232 Port This RS-232 serial port is for connecting to a serial

terminal.

8 Console Ports The unit’s USB keyboard and USB mouse plug into

these ports.

567

8910

11 12

Chapter 1. Introduction

9 LAN Port The cable that connects the unit to the LAN plugs in

here.

This port is PoE enabled* for KE6922 for power

redundancy or cable management.

*Requires power board version B01G or later (see

PoE Power Redundancy on page 73 for more details).

10 SFP Slots The Gigabit Ethernet (GbE) optical fiber cable that

connects the unit to the LAN can be plugged here.

11 DVI-D Output The cable from the local DVI monitor plugs in here.

12 Power Jack Connect a second power source for power

redundancy.

No. Component Description

KVM over IP Matrix System User Manual

KE6940T (Transmitter) Front View

No. Component Description

1 Audio Ports These mini stereo ports are for the speakers (green)

and microphone (pink).

2 KVM Ports The USB KVM cable supplied with the package that

links the Transmitter to the computer plugs into these

ports.

3 RS-232 Port This RS-232 serial port is for connecting to the

computer for serial control.

4 Remote / Local LED Lights green to indicate which side of the installation

(Local or Remote) has KVM control of the computer.

5 LAN LED This LED indicates the network status.



Lights when connected to the LAN and blinks when

the Ethernet connection is active:



Orange: 10 Mbps



Orange + Green: 100 Mbps



Green: 1000 Mbps



Off when not connected to the LAN.

6 Power LED Lights blue to indicate the unit is turned on.

243

5 6

Chapter 1. Introduction

KE6940T (Transmitter) Rear View

No. Component Description

1 Grounding Terminal The wire used to ground the unit connects here.

2 Reset This switch must be pushed with a thin object, such as

the end of a paper clip.



Press and release to reboot the device.



Power off, hold reset then power on the device

while pressing reset to recover from a firmware

upgrade failure.



Press and hold it in for more then three seconds

resets the unit back to its factory default

settings*.

Note: The Reset to Factory Default function resets everything

but the login information (username/password) to the factory

default settings. To reset the login information, refer to Reset

All Information on page 381.

3 Audio Ports These mini stereo ports are for the local speakers

(green) and microphone (pink).

4 Power Jack The cable from the DC Power adapter connects here.

5 Function Switch Use this slide switch to set the unit’s mode to:



Auto: Shared (simultaneous) KVM control of the

computer at the Transmitter and Receiver console.*



RS-232 Config: The device is ready to be

configured via serial commands through the RS-232

port. When connected to a KVM over IP Access

Control Box (2XRT-0015G), users can enable /

disable control privileges of the connected

receivers.



Local: Only the local Transmitter has KVM control

of the computer. The Receiver’s KVM access to the

computer is locked.

Note: In Auto mode, RS-232 and audio functions will

work on the Receiver but not on the Transmitter.

456

789

KVM over IP Matrix System User Manual

6 RS-232 Port This RS-232 serial port is for connecting to a serial

terminal.

7 Console Ports The unit’s USB keyboard and USB mouse plug into

these ports.

8 LAN Port The cable that connects the unit to the LAN plugs in

here.

9 DVI-I Output The cable from the local DVI monitor plugs in here.

No. Component Description

Chapter 1. Introduction

KE6940R (Receiver) Front View

No. Component Description

1 Power LED Lights blue to indicate the unit is turned on.

2 LAN LED This LED indicates the network status.



Lights when connected to the LAN and blinks when

the Ethernet connection is active:



Orange: 10 Mbps



Orange + Green: 100 Mbps



Green: 1000 Mbps



Off when not connected to the LAN.

3 Local LED Lights green to Indicate the Transmitter has KVM

access of the computer.

4 Remote LED Lights green to Indicate the Receiver has KVM access

of the computer.

5 Graphics Pushbutton Sets the image quality of the display to the highest

possible grade so that images are optimized. This

toggle button turns off the Video Pushbutton option.

Graphics mode is selected by default.

6 OSD Pushbutton Use this pushbutton to open the OSD menu.

7 Video Pushbutton Sets the image quality of the display to a grade that is

optimized for playing videos. This toggle button turns

off the Graphics Pushbutton option.

1432

Graphics OSD Video

POWER LAN LOCAL REMOTE

56 7 8

KVM over IP Matrix System User Manual

8 USB Port Use this port for virtual media or a USB peripheral

device.

Note: 1. When using a USB disk plugged into this

port, see USB Mode, page 226.

2. This USB port does not support isochronous

endpoints, therefore USB peripherals that

stream audio or video data, such as

speakers or webcams, will not work.

No. Component Description

Chapter 1. Introduction

KE6940R (Receiver) Rear View

No. Component Description

1 Grounding

Terminal

The wire used to ground the unit connects here.

2 Reset This switch must be pushed with a thin object, such as the

end of a paper clip.



Press and release to reboot the device.



Power off, hold reset then power on the device

while pressing reset to recover from a firmware

upgrade failure.



Press and hold it in for more then three seconds

resets the unit back to its factory default settings*.

Note: The Reset to Factory Default function resets everything but

the login information (username/password) to the factory default

settings. To reset the login information, refer to Reset All

Information on page 381.

3 Audio Ports These mini stereo ports are for the local speakers (green)

and microphone (pink).

4 USB Port Use this port for virtual media or a USB peripheral device.

Note: 1. When using a USB disk plugged into this port,

see USB Mode, page 226.

2. This USB port does not support isochronous

endpoints, therefore USB peripherals that

stream audio or video data, such as speakers or

webcams, will not work.

5 Power Jack The cable from the DC Power adapter connects here.

6 Function Switch Use this slide switch to set the unit’s mode:



Extension: Sets the device to use the normal TX to RX

extension mode.



RS-232 Config: The device is ready to be configured

via serial commands through the RS-232 port.

567

8910

KVM over IP Matrix System User Manual

7 RS-232 Port This RS-232 serial port is for connecting to a serial

terminal.

8 Console Ports The unit’s USB keyboard and USB mouse plug into these

ports.

9 LAN Port The cable that connects the unit to the LAN plugs in here.

10 DVI-I Output The cable from the local DVI monitors plug in here.

No. Component Description

Chapter 1. Introduction

KE6940AT (Transmitter) Front View

No. Component Description

1 Audio Ports These mini stereo ports are for the speakers (green)

and microphone (pink).

2 KVM Ports The USB KVM cable and the DVI cable supplied with

the package plugs into these ports to link the

Transmitter to the computer.

3 RS-232 Port This RS-232 serial port is for connecting to the

computer for serial control.

4 Remote / Local LED Lights Green to indicate which side of the installation

(Local or Remote) currently has KVM control of the

computer.

5 LAN LED This LED indicates the network status.



Lights when connected to the LAN and blinks when

the Ethernet connection is active:



Orange: 10 Mbps



Orange + Green: 100 Mbps



Green: 1000 Mbps



Off when not connected to the LAN.

6 Power LED Lights blue to indicate the unit is turned on.

3456

KVM over IP Matrix System User Manual

KE6940AT (Transmitter) Rear View

No. Component Description

1 Grounding Terminal The wire used to ground the unit connects here.

2 Reset This switch must be pushed with a thin object, such as

the end of a paper clip.



Press and release to reboot the device.



Power off, hold reset then power on the device

while pressing reset to recover from a firmware

upgrade failure.



Press and hold it in for more then three seconds

resets the unit back to its factory default

settings*.

Note: The Reset to Factory Default function resets everything

but the login information (username/password) to the factory

default settings. To reset the login information, refer to Reset

All Information on page 381.

3 Audio Ports These mini stereo ports are for the speakers (green)

and microphone (pink).

4 LAN Port The cable that connects the unit to the LAN plugs in

here.

5 Power Jack The cable from the DC Power adapter connects here.

89 10 11

Chapter 1. Introduction

6 Function Switch Use this slide switch to set the unit’s mode to:



Auto: Shared (simultaneous) KVM control of the

computer at the Transmitter and Receiver console.*



RS-232 Config: The device is ready to be

configured via serial commands through the RS-232

port. When connected to a KVM over IP Access

Control Box (2XRT-0015G), users can enable /

disable control privileges of the connected

receivers.



Local: Only the local Transmitter has KVM control

of the computer. The Receiver’s KVM access to the

computer is locked.

Note: In Auto mode, RS-232 and audio functions will

work on the Receiver but not on the Transmitter.

7 RS-232 Port This RS-232 serial port is for connecting to a serial

terminal.

8 Console Ports The unit’s USB keyboard and USB mouse plug into

these ports.

9 SFP Slot The Gigabit Ethernet (GbE) optical fiber cable that

connects the unit to the LAN plugs in here.

10 DVI-I Output The cables from the local DVI monitors plug in here.

11 Power Jack Connect a second power source for power

redundancy.

No. Component Description

KVM over IP Matrix System User Manual

KE6940AR (Receiver) Front View

No. Component Description

1 Power LED Lights blue to indicate the unit is turned on.

2 LAN LED This LED indicates the network status.



Lights when connected to the LAN and blinks when

the Ethernet connection is active:



Orange: 10 Mbps



Orange + Green: 100 Mbps



Green: 1000 Mbps



Off when not connected to the LAN.

3 Local LED Lights green to Indicate the Transmitter has KVM

access of the computer.

4 Remote LED Lights green to Indicate the Receiver has KVM access

of the computer.

5 Graphics Pushbutton Sets the image quality of the display to the highest

possible grade so that images are optimized. This

toggle button turns off the Video Pushbutton option.

Graphics mode is selected by default.

6 OSD Pushbutton Use this pushbutton to open the OSD menu.

7 Video Pushbutton Sets the image quality of the display to a grade that is

optimized for playing videos. This toggle button turns

off the Graphics Pushbutton option.

8 USB Port Use this port for virtual media or a USB peripheral

device.

Note: Note: When using a USB disk plugged into this

port, see USB Mode, page 226.

1432

Graphics OSD Video

POWER LAN LOCAL REMOTE

56 7 8

Chapter 1. Introduction

KE6940AR (Receiver) Rear View

No. Component Description

1 Grounding

Terminal

The wire used to ground the unit connects here.

2 Reset This switch must be pushed with a thin object, such as the

end of a paper clip.



Press and release to reboot the device.



Power off, hold reset then power on the device while

pressing reset to recover from a firmware upgrade

failure.



Press and hold it in for more then three seconds

resets the unit back to its factory default settings*.

Note: The Reset to Factory Default function resets everything but

the login information (username/password) to the factory default

settings. To reset the login information, refer to Reset All Information

on page 381.

3 Audio Ports These mini stereo ports are for the local speakers (green)

and microphone (pink).

4 USB Port Use this port for virtual media or a USB peripheral device.

Note: Note: When using a USB disk plugged into this port,

see USB Mode, page 226.

5 LAN Port The cable that connects the unit to the LAN plugs in here.

6 Power Jack The cable from the DC Power adapter connects here.

7 Function Switch Use this slide switch to set the unit’s mode:



Extension: Sets the device to use the normal TX to RX

extension mode.



RS-232 Config: The device is ready to be configured via

serial commands through the RS-232 port.

8 RS-232 Port This RS-232 serial port is for connecting to a serial terminal.

910 11 12

KVM over IP Matrix System User Manual

9 Console Ports The unit’s USB keyboard and USB mouse plug into these

ports. When using a keyboard or mouse with special

functions, see USB Mode, page 226.

10 SFP Slot The Gigabit Ethernet (GbE) optical fiber cable that connects

the unit to the LAN plugs in here.

11 DVI-I Output The cables from the local DVI monitors plug in here.

12 Power Jack Connect a second power source for power redundancy.

No. Component Description

Chapter 1. Introduction

KE6940AiT (Transmitter) Front View

No. Component Description

1 Audio Ports These mini stereo ports are for the speakers (green)

and microphone (pink).

2 KVM Ports The USB KVM cable and the DVI cable supplied with

the package plugs into these ports to link the

Transmitter to the computer.

3 RS-232 Port This RS-232 serial port is for connecting to the

computer for serial control.

4 Remote / Local LED Lights Green to indicate which side of the installation

(Local or Remote) currently has KVM control of the

computer.

5 LAN LED This LED indicates the network status.



Lights when connected to the LAN and blinks when

the Ethernet connection is active:



Orange: 10 Mbps



Orange + Green: 100 Mbps



Green: 1000 Mbps



Off when not connected to the LAN.

6 Power LED Lights blue to indicate the unit is turned on.

3456

KVM over IP Matrix System User Manual

KE6940AiT (Transmitter) Rear View

No. Component Description

1 Grounding Terminal The wire used to ground the unit connects here.

2 Reset This switch must be pushed with a thin object, such as

the end of a paper clip.



Press and release to reboot the device.



Power off, hold reset then power on the device

while pressing reset to recover from a firmware

upgrade failure.



Press and hold it in for more then three seconds

resets the unit back to its factory default

settings*.

Note: The Reset to Factory Default function resets everything

but the login information (username/password) to the factory

default settings. To reset the login information, refer to Reset

All Information on page 381.

3 Audio Ports These mini stereo ports are for the speakers (green)

and microphone (pink).

4 LAN Port The cable that connects the unit to the LAN plugs in

here.

5 Internet Port Connect an Internet-enabled Ethernet cable to allow

access to the web interface or CCVSR recording.

6 Power Jack The cable from the DC Power adapter connects here.

910 11 12

Chapter 1. Introduction

7 Function Switch Use this slide switch to set the unit’s mode to:



Auto: Shared (simultaneous) KVM control of the

computer at the Transmitter and Receiver console.*



RS-232 Config: The device is ready to be

configured via serial commands through the RS-232

port. When connected to a KVM over IP Access

Control Box (2XRT-0015G), users can enable /

disable control privileges of the connected

receivers.



Local: Only the local Transmitter has KVM control

of the computer. The Receiver’s KVM access to the

computer is locked.

Note: In Auto mode, RS-232 and audio functions will

work on the Receiver but not on the Transmitter.

8 RS-232 Port This RS-232 serial port is for connecting to a serial

terminal.

9 Console Ports The unit’s USB keyboard and USB mouse plug into

these ports.

10 SFP Slot The Gigabit Ethernet (GbE) optical fiber cable that

connects the unit to the LAN plugs in here.

11 DVI-I Output The cables from the local DVI monitors plug in here.

12 Power Jack Connect a second power source for power

redundancy.

No. Component Description

KVM over IP Matrix System User Manual

KE6900ST (Transmitter) Front, Rear and Top View

No. Component Description

1 Reset This switch must be pushed with a thin object, such as

the end of a paper clip.



Press and release to reboot the device.



Power off, hold reset then power on the device

while pressing reset to recover from a firmware

upgrade failure.



Press and hold it in for more then three seconds

resets the unit back to its factory default settings*.

Note: The Reset to Factory Default function resets everything

but the login information (username/password) to the factory

default settings. To reset the login information, refer to Reset All

Information on page 381.

2 KVM Port The USB KVM cable supplied with the package that links

the Transmitter to the computer plugs into these ports.

3 RS-232 Port This RS-232 serial port is for connecting to the computer

for serial control.

Note: When a LAN connection is detected serial

commands bypass the KE6900ST and are sent across

the network to the receiver. When no LAN connection is

detected serial commands are automatically directed to

the KE6900ST for local configuration and control.

4 LAN Port The cable that connects the unit to the LAN plugs in

here.

Rear View

Front View

6 7

Top View

Chapter 1. Introduction

5 Power Jack The cable from the DC Power adapter connects here.

6 LAN LED This LED indicates the network status.



Lights when connected to the LAN and blinks when

the Ethernet connection is active:



Orange: 10 Mbps



Orange + Green: 100 Mbps



Green: 1000 Mbps



Off when not connected to the LAN.

7 Power LED Lights blue to indicate the unit is turned on.

No. Component Description

KVM over IP Matrix System User Manual

KE8950T / KE8952T (Transmitter) Front View

No. Component Description

1 Audio Ports These mini stereo ports are for the speakers (green)

and microphone (pink).

2 KVM Ports The USB KVM cable supplied with the package that

links the Transmitter to the computer plugs into these

ports.

3 RS-232 Port This RS-232 serial port is for connecting to the

computer for serial control.

4 Remote / Local LED Lights Green to indicate which side of the installation

(Local or Remote) currently has KVM control of the

computer.

5 LAN LED This LED indicates the network status.



Lights when connected to the LAN and blinks when

the Ethernet connection is active:



Orange: 10 Mbps



Orange + Green: 100 Mbps



Green: 1000 Mbps



Off when not connected to the LAN.

6 Power LED Lights blue to indicate the unit is turned on.

Chapter 1. Introduction

KE8950T / KE8952T (Transmitter) Rear View

No. Component Description

1 Grounding Terminal The wire used to ground the unit connects here.

2 Reset This switch must be pushed with a thin object, such as

the end of a paper clip.



Press and release to reboot the device.



Power off, hold reset then power on the device

while pressing reset to recover from a firmware

upgrade failure.



Press and hold it in for more then three seconds

resets the unit back to its factory default

settings*.

Note: The Reset to Factory Default function resets everything

but the login information (username/password) to the factory

default settings. To reset the login information, refer to Reset

All Information on page 381.

3 Audio Ports These mini stereo ports are for the speakers (green)

and microphone (pink).

4 Power Jack The cable from the DC Power adapter connects here.

5 Function Switch Use this slide switch to set the unit’s mode to:



Auto: Shared (simultaneous) KVM control of the

computer at the Transmitter and Receiver console.*



RS-232 Config: The device is ready to be

configured via serial commands through the RS-232

port. When connected to a KVM over IP Access

Control Box (2XRT-0015G), users can enable /

disable control privileges of the connected

receivers.



Local: Only the local Transmitter has KVM control

of the computer. The Receiver’s KVM access to the

computer is locked.

Note: In Auto mode, RS-232 and audio functions will

work on the Receiver but not on the Transmitter.

78 10

KVM over IP Matrix System User Manual

6 RS-232 Port This RS-232 serial port is for connecting to a serial

terminal.

7 Console Ports The unit’s USB keyboard and USB mouse plug into

these ports.

8 LAN Port The cable that connects the unit to the LAN plugs in

here.

This port is PoE enabled* for KE8952 for power

redundancy or cable management.

*Requires power board version B01G or later (see

PoE Power Redundancy on page 73 for more details).

9 SFP Port The Gigabit Ethernet (GbE) optical fiber cable that

connects the unit to the LAN plugs in here.

10 HDMI Output The cable from the local HDMI monitor plugs in here.

No. Component Description

Chapter 1. Introduction

KE8950R / KE8952R (Receiver) Front View

No. Component Description

1 Power LED Lights blue to indicate the unit is turned on.

2 LAN LED This LED indicates the network status.



Lights when connected to the LAN and blinks when

the Ethernet connection is active:



Orange: 10 Mbps



Orange + Green: 100 Mbps



Green: 1000 Mbps



Off when not connected to the LAN.

3 Local LED Lights green to Indicate the Transmitter has KVM

access of the computer.

4 Remote LED Lights green to Indicate the Receiver has KVM access

of the computer.

5 Graphics Pushbutton Sets the image quality of the display to the highest

possible grade so that images are optimized. This

toggle button turns off the Video Pushbutton option.

Graphics mode is selected by default.

6 OSD Pushbutton Use this pushbutton to open the OSD menu.

7 Video Pushbutton Sets the image quality of the display to a grade that is

optimized for playing videos. This toggle button turns

off the Graphics Pushbutton option.

8 USB Port Use this port for virtual media or a USB peripheral

device.

Note: Note: When using a USB disk plugged into this

port, see USB Mode, page 226.

1432

Graphics OSD Video

POWER LAN LOCAL REMOTE

56 7 8

KVM over IP Matrix System User Manual

KE8950R / KE8952R (Receiver) Rear View

No. Component Description

1 Grounding

Terminal

The wire used to ground the unit connects here.

2 Reset This switch must be pushed with a thin object, such as the

end of a paper clip.



Press and release to reboot the device.



Power off, hold reset then power on the device while

pressing reset to recover from a firmware upgrade

failure.



Press and hold it in for more then three seconds

resets the unit back to its factory default settings*.

Note: The Reset to Factory Default function resets everything but

the login information (username/password) to the factory default

settings. To reset the login information, refer to Reset All Information

on page 381.

3 Audio Ports These mini stereo ports are for the local speakers (green)

and microphone (pink).

4 USB Port Use this port for virtual media or a USB peripheral device.

Note: Note: When using a USB disk plugged into this port,

see USB Mode, page 226.

5 Power Jack The cable from the DC Power adapter connects here.

6 Function Switch Use this slide switch to set the unit’s mode:



Extension: Sets the device to use the normal TX to RX

extension mode.



RS-232 Config: The device is ready to be configured via

serial commands through the RS-232 port.

7 RS-232 Port This RS-232 serial port is for connecting to a serial terminal.

8 Console Ports The unit’s USB keyboard and USB mouse plug into these

ports. When using a keyboard or mouse with special

functions, see USB Mode, page 226.

56 7

10 11

Chapter 1. Introduction

9 LAN Port The cable that connects the unit to the LAN plugs in here.

This port is PoE enabled* for KE8952 for power

redundancy or cable management.

*Requires power board version B01G or later (see PoE

Power Redundancy on page 73 for more details).

10 SFP Port The Gigabit Ethernet (GbE) optical fiber cable that connects

the unit to the LAN plugs in here.

11 HDMI Output The cable from the local HDMI monitor plugs in here.

No. Component Description

KVM over IP Matrix System User Manual

KE8900ST (Transmitter) Front, Rear and Side View

No. Component Description

1 Reset This switch must be pushed with a thin object, such as the

end of a paper clip.



Press and release to reboot the device.



Power off, hold reset then power on the device while

pressing reset to recover from a firmware upgrade

failure.



Press and hold it in for more then three seconds

resets the unit back to its factory default settings*.

Note: The Reset to Factory Default function resets everything but

the login information (username/password) to the factory default

settings. To reset the login information, refer to Reset All Information

on page 381.

Chapter 1. Introduction

2 LAN LED This LED indicates the network status.



Lights when connected to the LAN and blinks when the

Ethernet connection is active:



Orange: 10 Mbps



Orange + Green: 100 Mbps



Green: 1000 Mbps



Off when not connected to the LAN.

3 Power LED Lights blue to indicate the unit is turned on.

4 LAN Port The cable that connects the unit to the LAN plugs in here.

5 RS-232 Port This RS-232 serial port is for connecting to the computer for

serial control.

Note: When a LAN connection is detected serial

commands bypass the KE8900ST and are sent across the

network to the receiver. When no LAN connection is

detected serial commands are automatically directed to the

KE8900ST for local configuration and control.

6 USB Type-B

Port

The USB port that links the Transmitter to the computer.

7 HDMI Input The cable from the local HDMI monitor plugs in here.

8 3-Pole Terminal

Block

Insert DC + and - wires (DC 12 to 48V) to the terminal block

for power input.

9 Power Jack The cable from the DC Power adapter connects here.

10 Grounding

Terminal

The wire used to ground the unit connects here.

No. Component Description

KVM over IP Matrix System User Manual

KE8900SR (Receiver) Front, Rear and Side View

No. Component Description

1 USB Peripheral

Port

Use this port for virtual media or a USB peripheral device.

Note: 1. When using a USB disk plugged into this port, see

USB Mode, page 226.

2. This USB port does not support isochronous

endpoints, therefore USB peripherals that stream

audio or video data, such as speakers or

webcams, will not work.

2 Console Ports The unit’s USB keyboard and USB mouse plug into these

ports.

Chapter 1. Introduction

3 Reset This switch must be pushed with a thin object, such as the

end of a paper clip.



Press and release to reboot the device.



Power off, hold reset then power on the device while

pressing reset to recover from a firmware upgrade

failure.



Press and hold it in for more then three seconds

resets the unit back to its factory default settings*.

Note: The Reset to Factory Default function resets everything but

the login information (username/password) to the factory default

settings. To reset the login information, refer to Reset All Information

on page 381.

4 LAN LED This LED indicates the network status.



Lights when connected to the LAN and blinks when the

Ethernet connection is active:



Orange: 10 Mbps



Orange + Green: 100 Mbps



Green: 1000 Mbps



Off when not connected to the LAN.

5 Power LED Lights blue to indicate the unit is turned on.

6 LAN Port The cable that connects the unit to the LAN plugs in here.

7 RS-232 Port This RS-232 serial port is for connecting to the computer for

serial control.

Note: When a LAN connection is detected serial

commands bypass the KE8900ST and are sent across the

network to the receiver. When no LAN connection is

detected serial commands are automatically directed to the

KE8900ST for local configuration and control.

8 HDMI Output The cable from the local HDMI monitor plugs in here.

9 Power Jack The cable from the DC Power adapter connects here.

10 Grounding

Terminal

The wire used to ground the unit connects here.

No. Component Description

KVM over IP Matrix System User Manual

KE9900ST (Transmitter) Front, Rear and Side View

No. Component Description

1 Reset This switch must be pushed with a thin object, such as the

end of a paper clip.



Press and release to reboot the device.



Power off, hold reset then power on the device while

pressing reset to recover from a firmware upgrade

failure.



Press and hold it in for more then three seconds

resets the unit back to its factory default settings*.

Note: The Reset to Factory Default function resets everything but

the login information (username/password) to the factory default

settings. To reset the login information, refer to Reset All Information

on page 381.

Chapter 1. Introduction

2 LAN LED This LED indicates the network status.



Lights when connected to the LAN and blinks when the

Ethernet connection is active:



Orange: 10 Mbps



Orange + Green: 100 Mbps



Green: 1000 Mbps



Off when not connected to the LAN.

3 Power LED Lights blue to indicate the unit is turned on.

4 LAN Port The cable that connects the unit to the LAN plugs in here.

5 RS-232 Port This RS-232 serial port is for connecting to the computer for

serial control.

Note: When a LAN connection is detected serial

commands bypass the KE8900ST and are sent across the

network to the receiver. When no LAN connection is

detected serial commands are automatically directed to the

KE8900ST for local configuration and control.

6 USB Type-B

Port

The USB port that links the Transmitter to the computer.

7DisplayPort

Input

The cable from the local DisplayPort monitor plugs in here.

8 3-Pole Terminal

Block

Insert DC + and - wires (DC 12 to 48V) to the terminal block

for power input.

9 Power Jack The cable from the DC Power adapter connects here.

10 Grounding

Terminal

The wire used to ground the unit connects here.

No. Component Description

KVM over IP Matrix System User Manual

KE9950T / KE9952T (Transmitter) Front View

No. Component Description

1 Audio Ports These mini stereo ports are for the speakers (green)

and microphone (pink).

2 KVM Ports The USB KVM cable supplied with the package that

links the Transmitter to the computer plugs into these

ports.

3 RS-232 Port This RS-232 serial port is for connecting to the

computer for serial control.

4 Remote / Local LED Lights Green to indicate which side of the installation

(Local or Remote) currently has KVM control of the

computer.

5 LAN LED This LED indicates the network status.



Lights when connected to the LAN and blinks when

the Ethernet connection is active:



Orange: 10 Mbps



Orange + Green: 100 Mbps



Green: 1000 Mbps



Off when not connected to the LAN.

6 Power LED Lights blue to indicate the unit is turned on.

Chapter 1. Introduction

KE9950T / KE9952T (Transmitter) Rear View

No. Component Description

1 Grounding Terminal The wire used to ground the unit connects here.

2 Reset This switch must be pushed with a thin object, such as

the end of a paper clip.



Press and release to reboot the device.



Power off, hold reset then power on the device

while pressing reset to recover from a firmware

upgrade failure.



Press and hold it in for more then three seconds

resets the unit back to its factory default

settings*.

Note: The Reset to Factory Default function resets everything

but the login information (username/password) to the factory

default settings. To reset the login information, refer to Reset

All Information on page 381.

3 Audio Ports These mini stereo ports are for the local speakers

(green) and microphone (pink).

4 Power Jack The cable from the DC Power adapter connects here.

5 Function Switch Use this slide switch to set the unit’s mode to:



Auto: Shared (simultaneous) KVM control of the

computer at the Transmitter and Receiver console.*



RS-232 Config/Access Control: The device is

ready to be configured via serial commands through

the RS-232 port. When connected to a KVM over IP

Access Control Box (2XRT-0015G), users can

enable / disable control privileges of the connected

receivers.



Local: Only the local Transmitter has KVM control

of the computer. The Receiver’s KVM access to the

computer is locked.

Note: In Auto mode, RS-232 and audio functions will

work on the Receiver but not on the Transmitter.

KVM over IP Matrix System User Manual

6 RS-232 Port This RS-232 serial port is for connecting to a serial

terminal.

7 Console Ports The unit’s USB keyboard and USB mouse plug into

these ports.

8 LAN Port The cable that connects the unit to the LAN plugs in

here.

This port is PoE enabled* for KE9952 for power

redundancy or cable management.

*Requires power board version B01G or later (see

PoE Power Redundancy on page 73 for more details).

9 SFP Slot The Gigabit Ethernet (GbE) optical fiber cable that

connects the unit to the LAN plugs in here.

10 DisplayPort Output The cable from the local DisplayPort monitor plugs in

here.

11 Power Jack

(KE9950T only)

Connect a second power source for power

redundancy.

No. Component Description

Chapter 1. Introduction

KE9950R / KE9952R (Receiver) Front View

No. Component Description

1 Power LED Lights blue to indicate the unit is turned on.

2 LAN LED This LED indicates the network status.



Lights when connected to the LAN and blinks when

the Ethernet connection is active:



Orange: 10 Mbps



Orange + Green: 100 Mbps



Green: 1000 Mbps



Off when not connected to the LAN.

3 Local LED Lights green to Indicate the Transmitter has KVM

access of the computer.

4 Remote LED Lights green to Indicate the Receiver has KVM access

of the computer.

5 Graphics Pushbutton Sets the image quality of the display to the highest

possible grade so that images are optimized. This

toggle button turns off the Video Pushbutton option.

Graphics mode is selected by default.

6 OSD Pushbutton Use this pushbutton to open the OSD menu.

7 Video Pushbutton Sets the image quality of the display to a grade that is

optimized for playing videos. This toggle button turns

off the Graphics Pushbutton option.

8 USB Port Use this port for virtual media or a USB peripheral

device.

Note: Note: When using a USB disk plugged into this

port, see USB Mode, page 226.

1432

Graphics OSD Video

POWER LAN LOCAL REMOTE

56 7 8

KVM over IP Matrix System User Manual

KE9950R / KE9952R (Receiver) Rear View

No. Component Description

1 Grounding Terminal The wire used to ground the unit connects here.

2 Reset This switch must be pushed with a thin object, such as

the end of a paper clip.



Press and release to reboot the device.



Power off, hold reset then power on the device

while pressing reset to recover from a firmware

upgrade failure.



Press and hold it in for more then three seconds

resets the unit back to its factory default

settings*.

Note: The Reset to Factory Default function resets everything

but the login information (username/password) to the factory

default settings. To reset the login information, refer to Reset

All Information on page 381.

3 Audio Ports These mini stereo ports are for the local speakers

(green) and microphone (pink).

4 USB Port Use this port for virtual media or a USB peripheral

device.

Note: Note: When using a USB disk plugged into this

port, see USB Mode, page 226.

5 Power Jack The cable from the DC Power adapter connects here.

6 Function Switch Use this slide switch to set the unit’s mode:



Extension: Sets the device to use the normal TX to

RX extension mode.



RS-232 Config: The device is ready to be

configured via serial commands through the RS-232

port.

7 RS-232 Port This RS-232 serial port is for connecting to a serial

terminal.

Chapter 1. Introduction

PoE Power Redundancy

For power redundancy with PoE-enabled models, the unit’s underside label

must be printed with a “Power Board Version: B01G” string. An example is

shown below and the string is indicated in the diagram:

8 Console Ports The unit’s USB keyboard and USB mouse plug into

these ports.

9 LAN Port The cable that connects the unit to the LAN plugs in

here.

This port is PoE enabled* for KE9952 for power

redundancy or cable management.

*Requires power board version B01G or later (see

PoE Power Redundancy on page 73 for more details).

10 SFP Slot The Gigabit Ethernet (GbE) optical fiber cable that

connects the unit to the LAN plugs in here.

11 DisplayPort Output The cable from the local DisplayPort monitor plugs in

here.

12 Power Jack

(KE9950R only)

Connect a second power source for power

redundancy.

No. Component Description

KVM over IP Matrix System User Manual

This Page Intentionally Left Blank

Chapter 2

Hardware Setup

Mounting

For convenience and flexibility, the transmitters can be mounted on system

racks or on a wall.

Note: Optional mounting options are available, refer to Optional Rack

Mounting on page 372 for more information.

It is highly recommended that the AiT unit(s) is mounted on a system

rack or on a wall and avoid stacked setup to ensure proper ventilation.

The following sections will demonstrate on how to mount the transmitters with

the included mounting kit.

1. Important safety information regarding the placement of this

device is found on page 343. Please review it before proceeding.

2. Make sure that the power to all devices connected to the

installation is turned off. You must unplug the power cords of any

computers that have the Keyboard Power On function.

KVM over IP Matrix System User Manual

Attaching the Bracket

Follow the steps below to attach the mounting bracket to the unit:

Non-Slim Transmitters

Note: Steps for the non-slim transmitters (KE6900, KE6900A, KE6900AiT,

KE6910, KE6912, KE6920, KE6922, KE6940, KE6940A,

KE6940AiT, KE8950, KE8952, KE9950, and KE9952) are the same

and KE6900 will be shown in the steps below.

1. Unscrew the screws from the side shown in the diagram below:

2. Use the screws from step 1 to screw the mounting bracket to the bottom of

the Transmitter as shown below:

M3 x 5

Chapter 2. Hardware Setup

Slim Transmitters - KE6900ST

Using the screws provided in the Mounting Kit, screw the mounting bracket

into the bottom of the Transmitter as show below:

Slim Transmitters - KE8900ST / KE9900ST

KE8900ST is used in the diagrams below.

1. Unscrew the screws from the side shown in the diagram below:

M3 x 5

KVM over IP Matrix System User Manual

2. Use the screws from step 1 to screw the mounting bracket to the bottom of

the Transmitter as shown below:

M3 x 5

Chapter 2. Hardware Setup

Rack Mount

Non-Slim Transmitters

Note: Steps for the non-slim transmitters (KE6900, KE6900A, KE6900AiT,

KE6910, KE6912, KE6920, KE6922, KE6940, KE6940A,

KE6940AiT, KE8950, KE8952, KE9950, and KE9952) are the same

and KE6900 will be shown in the steps below.

Screw the bracket into a convenient location on the rack.

Note: Rack screws are not provided. We recommend that you use M5 x 12

Phillips Type I cross recessed type screws.

KVM over IP Matrix System User Manual

Slim Transmitters - KE6900ST

Screw the bracket into a convenient location on the rack.

Note: Rack screws are not provided. We recommend that you use M5 x 12

Phillips Type I cross recessed type screws.

Slim Transmitters - KE8900ST / KE9900ST

Screw the mounting bracket to any convenient location on the rack.

Chapter 2. Hardware Setup

Wall Mounting

Non-Slim Transmitters

Note: Steps for the non-slim transmitters (KE6900, KE6900A, KE6900AiT,

KE6910, KE6912, KE6920, KE6922, KE6940, KE6940A,

KE6940AiT, KE8950, KE8952, KE9950, and KE9952) are the same

and KE6900 will be shown in the steps below.

Use the center hole to screw the bracket to a secure wall surface.

KVM over IP Matrix System User Manual

Slim Transmitters - KE6900ST

Use the center hole to screw the bracket to a secure wall surface.

Slim Transmitters - KE8900ST / KE9900ST

Use the mounting bracket’s center screw hole to mount the unit on a wall.

Chapter 2. Hardware Setup

KE6900 / KE6940 Point-to-Point Installation

Setting up the KE6900 / KE6940 system in a point-to-point configuration is

simply a matter of plugging in the cables.

Note: In a point-to-point configuration, no administrator setup is necessary.

Make sure that all the equipment is powered off. Refer to the installation

diagrams on the next two pages and do the following:

1. On the Transmitter side, plug the mouse, keyboard, DVI monitor,

microphone and speakers into the ports on the Console section of the

KE6900T / KE6940T. Each port is marked with an appropriate icon to

indicate itself.*

2. Connect the USB KVM cable provided to the KVM Ports on the front of

the KE6900T / KE6940T.

3. Connect the other end of the USB KVM cable to the keyboard, video,

mouse, speaker and microphone ports on the computer.

4. For control of serial devices, connect the RS-232 serial port on the

Transmitter to a serial port on the computer.

5. Connect a Cat 5e/6 cable to the KE6900T / KE6940T’s LAN port.

6. Plug the power adapter into an AC source; and plug the other end into the

KE6900T / KE6940T’s Power Jack.

7. On the Receiver side, plug the mouse, keyboard, DVI monitor,

microphone, and speakers into the ports on the Console section of the

KE6900R / KE6940R.**

8. Connect the other end of the Cat 5e/6 cable to the KE6900R / KE6940R's

LAN port.

9. Plug the second power adapter into an AC source; and plug the other end

into the KE6900R / KE6940R's Power Jack.

10. Power on the computer.

Note: 1. If installing the KE6940 with two DVI monitors, connect the second

DVI monitor via a DVI cable into the additional ports on the KE6940

and computer.

2. A keyboard or mouse with special functions may need to use the USB

ports for advanced features to work (see USB Mode, page 226).

KVM over IP Matrix System User Manual

KE6900 / KE6940 Point-to-Point Installation 1 of 2

Note: The diagram above shows the KE6900T and KE6900R. The KE6940

installation is the same except that an additional DVI monitor can be

connected at each end for a dual-view display setup.

KE6900R

KE6900T

Cat 5e/6 cable

Chapter 2. Hardware Setup

KE6900 / KE6940 Point-to-Point Installation 2 of 2

Note: The serial port on the Transmitter (shown above) connects to the

computer; the serial port on the Receiver (not shown) connects to a

serial device (optional).

USB KVM

cable

Local PC

KE6900T

KVM over IP Matrix System User Manual

KE6900A / KE6940A Point-to-Point Installation

Setting up the KE6900A / KE6940A system in a point-to-point configuration

is simply a matter of plugging in the cables.

Note: In a point-to-point configuration, no administrator setup is necessary.

Make sure that all the equipment is powered off. Refer to the installation

diagrams on the next two pages and do the following:

1. (Optional) Connect a grounding wire between the extender’s grounding

terminal and a suitable grounded object.

2. On the transmitter side, plug the mouse, keyboard, DVI monitor, and serial

devices into the ports on the Console section of the transmitter

(KE6900AT/KE6940AT)

3. Connect the DVI-D cable and the USB 2.0 Type-A to Type-B cable

provided with this package into the KVM Ports on the front of the

transmitter.

4. Connect the other end of the USB DVI-D KVM cable into the keyboard,

video, mouse, speaker and microphone ports on the computer.

5. For control of serial devices, connect the RS-232 port on the front of the

transmitter to a serial port on the computer.

6. Connect a Cat 5e/6 cable to the transmitter’s LAN port.

7. Plug the mouse, keyboard, DVI monitor, and serial devices into the ports

on the Console section of the receiver (KE6900AR/KE6940AR)

8. Connect the other end of the Cat 5e/6 cable to the receiver's LAN port.

9. Instead of connecting through the LAN ports, you can choose to connect

the extenders through the SFP slots. To do so, plug SFP modules into the

transmitter and receiver’s SFP slots, then connect each end of Gigabit

Ethernet (GbE) optical fiber between the SFP modules

10. Plug the power adapters into AC sources with the power cords and plug

the other ends into the transmitter and receiver’s power jacks respectively.

11. (Optional) For power redundancy, plug the second power adapters into AC

sources with the power cords and plug the other ends into the transmitter

and receiver’s power jacks.

12. Power on the computer.

Chapter 2. Hardware Setup

Note: 1. If installing the KE6940A with two DVI monitors, connect the second

DVI monitor via a DVI cable into the additional ports on the KE6940

and computer.

2. A keyboard or mouse with special functions may need to use the USB

ports for advanced features to work (see USB Mode, page 226).

3. The SFP module 2A-136G / 2A-137G is sold separately. Contact

your ATEN dealer for product information.

KE6900A / KE6940A Point-to-Point Installation 1 of 2

Note: The diagram above shows the KE6900AT and KE6900AR. The

KE6940A installation is the same except that an additional DVI monitor

can be connected at each end for a dual-view display setup.

KE6900AR (Rear)

KE6900AT (Rear)

Cat 5e/6 cable

Optical Fiber Cable

Cat 5e/6 cable

Optical Fiber Cable

DC 5V

Serial

Device

Serial

Device

KVM over IP Matrix System User Manual

KE6900A / KE6940A Point-to-Point Installation 2 of 2

Note: The serial port on the Transmitter (shown above) connects to the

computer; the serial port on the Receiver (not shown) connects to a

serial device (optional).

KE6900AT (Front)

USB DVI-D KVM

cable

Chapter 2. Hardware Setup

KE6900AiT / KE6940AiT Point-to-Point Installation

Setting up the KE6940AiT system in a point-to-point configuration is simply a

matter of plugging in the cables. Since this is a transmitter-receiver setup, we

will demonstrate using a KE6940AR.

Note: In a point-to-point configuration, no administrator setup is necessary.

It is highly recommended that the AiT unit(s) is mounted on a system

rack or on a wall and avoid stacked setup to ensure proper ventilation.

Make sure that all the equipment is powered off. Refer to the installation

diagrams on the next two pages and do the following:

1. (Optional) Connect a grounding wire between the extenders’ grounding

terminal and a suitable grounded object.

2. On the transmitter side, plug the mouse, keyboard, DVI monitor(s), and

serial devices into the ports on the Console section of the transmitter

(KE6900AiT/KE6940AiT).

3. Connect the KVM Cable (DVI-D dual-link, USB, Audio) and the DVI-D

cable (KE6940AiT only) provided with this package into the KVM Ports

on the front of the transmitter.

4. Connect the other end of the KVM cable (DVI-D dual-link, USB, Audio)

and the DVI-D cable (KE6940AiT only) into the keyboard, video, mouse,

speaker and microphone ports on the computer.

5. For control of serial devices, connect the RS-232 port on the front of the

transmitter to a serial port on the computer.

6. Plug the mouse, keyboard, DVI monitor(s), and serial devices into the

ports on the Console section of the receiver (KE6940AR is used as the

example here)

7. Connect a Cat 5e/6 cable to the transmitter’s LAN port.

8. Connect the other end of the Cat 5e/6 cable to the receiver’s LAN port.

9. To allow access to the web interface or CCVSR recording, use an Ethernet

cable to connect the unit’s Ethernet port to a network switch.

10. Instead of connecting through the LAN ports, you can choose to connect

the extenders through the SFP slots. To do so, plug SFP modules into the

transmitter and receiver’s SFP slots, then connect each end of Gigabit

Ethernet (GbE) optical fiber between the SFP modules

KVM over IP Matrix System User Manual

11. Plug the power adapters into AC sources with the power cords and plug

the other ends into the transmitter and receiver’s power jacks respectively.

12. (Optional) For power redundancy, connect another power adapter

(available for purchase separately) to the power jack of each extender and

make sure the adapter is powered.

13. Power on the computer.

Note: 1. For advanced features when connecting a keyboard or mouse with

special functions, see US B Mode, page 226.

2. The SFP module 2A-136G / 2A-137G is sold separately. Contact

your ATEN dealer for product information.

KE6940AiT Point-to-Point Installation 1 of 2

KE6940AR (Rear)

KE6940AiT (Rear)

Cat 5e/6 cable

Optical Fiber Cable

10 7

Cat 5e/6 cable

Optical Fiber Cable

DC 12V

DC 5V

Serial

Device

Serial

Device

Office LAN

DC 12V

DC 5V

Chapter 2. Hardware Setup

Note: The diagram above shows the KE6940AiT setup with a KE6940AR.

The KE6900AiT installation is the same except with one less DVI

monitor setup.

KE6940AiT Point-to-Point Installation 2 of 2

Note: The serial port on the Transmitter (shown above) connects to the

computer; the serial port on the Receiver (not shown) connects to a

serial device (optional).

KE6940AiT (Front)

USB DVI-D KVM

cable

KVM over IP Matrix System User Manual

KE6910 / KE6912 Point-to-Point Installation

Setting up the KE6910 / KE6912 system in a point-to-point configuration is

simply a matter of plugging in the cables.

Note: In a point-to-point configuration, no administrator setup is necessary.

Make sure that all the equipment is powered off. Refer to the installation

diagrams on the next two pages and do the following:

1. (Optional) Use the grounding wire to connect the extender’s grounding

terminal to a suitable grounded object.

2. On the transmitter side, plug the mouse, keyboard, DVI-D monitor, serial

devices, microphone and speakers into the ports on the Console section of

the KE6910T / KE6912T.

3. Connect the USB DVI-D KVM cable provided with this package into the

KVM Ports and the audio ports on the front of the KE6910T / KE6912T.

4. Connect the other end of the USB DVI-D KVM cable into the keyboard,

video, mouse, speaker and microphone ports on the computer.

5. For control of serial devices, connect the RS-232 port on the front of the

transmitter to a serial port on the computer.

6. Connect a Cat 5e/6 cable to the KE6910T / KE6912T’s LAN port.

7. On the receiver side, plug the mouse, keyboard, DVI-D monitor, serial

devices, microphone, and speakers into the ports on the Console section of

the KE6910R / KE6912R.

8. Connect the other end of the Cat 5e/6 cable to the KE6910R / KE6912R's

LAN port.

9. Instead of connecting through the LAN ports, you can choose to connect

the KE6910 / KE6912 through the SFP slots. To do so, plug SFP modules

into the transmitter and receiver's SFP slots, then connect each end of

Gigabit Ethernet (GbE) optical fiber between the SFP modules.*

10. Plug the power adapters into AC sources with the power cords; then plug

the other ends into the transmitter and receiver’s power jacks respectively.

The KE6912 supports Power over Ethernet (PoE), thus the power can be

supplied through PoE network switch, without the need of a power

adapter.

Chapter 2. Hardware Setup

11. (Optional) For power redundancy, plug the second power adapters into AC

sources with the power cords; then plug the other ends into the transmitter

and receiver’s power jacks.**

12. Power on the computer.

Note: 1. The SFP module 2A-136G / 2A-137G is sold separately. Contact your

ATEN dealer for product

information.

2. Available for KE6910T and KE6910R only. The second power

adapter with the power cord

is sold separately. Contact your ATEN

dealer for product information. Power redundancy for

KE6912T and

KE6912R can be achieved with the PoE function.

KE6910 / KE6912 Point-to-Point Installation 1 of 2

KVM over IP Matrix System User Manual

KE6910 / KE6912 Point-to-Point Installation 2 of 2

Chapter 2. Hardware Setup

KE6920 / KE6922 Point-to-Point Installation

Setting up the KE6920 / KE6922 system in a point-to-point configuration is

simply a matter of plugging in the cables.

Note: In a point-to-point configuration, no administrator setup is necessary.

Make sure that all the equipment is powered off. Refer to the installation

diagrams on the next two pages and do the following:

1. (Optional) Connect a grounding wire between the extender’s grounding

terminal and a suitable grounded object.

2. On the transmitter side, plug the mouse, keyboard, DVI monitor, and serial

devices into the ports on the Console section of the transmitter (KE6920T/

KE6922T).

3. Connect the DVI-D cable and the USB 2.0 Type-A to Type-B cable

provided with this package into the KVM Ports on the front of the

transmitter.

4. Connect the other end of the USB DVI-D KVM cable into the keyboard,

video, mouse, speaker and microphone ports on the computer.

5. For control of serial devices, connect the RS-232 port on the front of the

transmitter to a serial port on the computer.

6. Connect a Cat 5e/6 cable to the transmitter’s LAN port.

7. Plug the mouse, keyboard, DVI monitor, and serial devices into the ports

on the Console section of the receiver (KE6920R/KE6922R).

8. Connect the other end of the Cat 5e/6 cable to the receiver's LAN port.

9. Instead of connecting through the LAN ports, you can choose to connect

the extenders through the SFP slots. To do so, plug SFP modules into the

transmitter and receiver's SFP slots, then connect each end of Gigabit

Ethernet (GbE) optical fiber between the SFP modules

10. Plug the power adapters into AC sources with the power cords and plug

the other ends into the transmitter and receiver’s power jacks respectively.

11. (Optional) For power redundancy, plug the second power adapters into AC

sources with the power cords and plug the other ends into the transmitter

and receiver’s power jacks

12. Power on the computer.

KVM over IP Matrix System User Manual

Note: 1. The SFP module 2A-136G / 2A-137G is sold separately. Contact your

ATEN dealer for product

information.

2. Available for KE6920T and KE6920R only. The second power

adapter with the power cord

is sold separately. Contact your ATEN

dealer for product information. Power redundancy for

KE6922T and

KE6922R can be achieved with the PoE function.

KE6920 / KE6922 Point-to-Point Installation 1 of 2

KE6920R (Rear)

KE6920T (Rear)

Cat 5e/6 cable Optical Fiber Cable

DC 5V

Serial

Device

Serial

Device

Chapter 2. Hardware Setup

KE6920 / KE6922 Point-to-Point Installation 2 of 2

KE6920T (Front)

USB DVI-D KVM

cable

KVM over IP Matrix System User Manual

KE8950 / KE8952 Point-to-Point Installation

Setting up the KE8950 / KE8952 system in a point-to-point configuration is

simply a matter of plugging in the cables.

Note: In a point-to-point configuration, no administrator setup is necessary.

Make sure that all the equipment is powered off. Refer to the installation

diagrams on the next two pages and do the following:

1. On the transmitter side, plug the mouse, keyboard, HDMI monitor,

microphone and speakers into the ports on the Console section of the

KE8950T / KE8952T. Each port is marked with an appropriate icon to

indicate its function.

2. Connect the USB HDMI KVM cable provided with this package into the

KVM Ports on the front of the KE8950T / KE8952T.

3. Connect the other end of the USB HDMI KVM cable into the keyboard,

video, mouse, speaker and microphone ports on the computer.

4. For control of serial devices, connect the RS-232 serial port on the

transmitter to a serial port on the computer.

5. Connect a Cat 5e/6 cable to the KE8950T / KE8952T’s LAN port, or a

Gigabit Ethernet (GbE) optical fiber cable to the SFP port.

6. Plug the power adapter into an AC source; then plug the other end into the

KE8950T / KE8952T’s power jack.*

7. On the receiver side, plug the mouse, keyboard, HDMI monitor,

microphone, and speakers into the ports on the Console section of the

KE8950R / KE8952R.

8. Connect the other end of the Cat 5e/6 cable to the KE8950R / KE8952R's

LAN port; or the other end of the Gigabit Ethernet (GbE) optical fiber

cable to the SFP port.

9. Plug the second power adapter into an AC source; then plug the other end

into the KE8950R / KE8952R's power jack.*

10. Power on the computer.

Note: Power adapters are not provided with KE8952 units. Please contact

your ATEN dealer to purchase additional power adapters.

Chapter 2. Hardware Setup

KE8950 / KE8952 Point-to-Point Installation 1 of 2

Note: Power adapters are not provided with the KE8952. Please contact your

ATEN dealer to purchase additional power adapters, or use the Power

over Ethernet (PoE) feature to supply power to the KE8952.

KE8950R (Rear)

KE8950T (Rear)

Cat 5e/6 Cable

Optical Fiber Cable

Cat 5e/6 Cable Optical Fiber Cable

DC 5V

KVM over IP Matrix System User Manual

100

KE8950 / KE8952 Point-to-Point Installation 2 of 2

Note: The serial port on the Transmitter (shown above) connects to the

computer; the serial port on the Receiver (not shown) connects to a

serial device (optional).

USB HDMI KVM

Cable

Local PC

KE8950T (Front)

Chapter 2. Hardware Setup

101

KE6900ST Point-to-Point Installation

The KE6900ST DVI KVM over IP Extender Lite is a cost saving alternative

for installations with Transmitters that don’t need a local console or audio

transmission but want the connectivity features of advanced KE models.

Setting up the KE6900ST system in a point-to-point configuration is simply a

matter of plugging in the cables. Make sure that all the equipment is powered

off. Refer to the installation diagrams on the next page and do the following:

1. Connect the USB DVI-D KVM Cable (provided with this package) to the

USB and DVI-D ports on the front of the KE6900ST.

2. Connect the other end of the USB DVI-D KVM Cable to USB and DVI

video ports on the computer.

3. For control of serial devices, connect the RS-232 serial port on the

KE6900ST to a serial port on the computer.

4. Plug the power adapter (provided with this package) into an AC source;

and plug the other end into the KE6900ST Power Jack.

5. Connect a Cat 5e/6 cable to the KE6900ST’s LAN port.

6. Connect the other end of the Cat 5e/6 cable to the KE69x0R’s* LAN port.

7. On the Receiver side, plug the mouse, keyboard and DVI monitor into the

ports on the Console section of the KE69x0R.*

8. Plug the second power adapter into an AC source; and plug the other end

into the KE69x0R’s Power Jack.

9. Power on the computer.

Note: KE69x0R units are required and sold separately.

Setting up a LAN Installation

Setting up the KE6900ST on a network allows point-to-point, point-to-

multipoint, and multipoint-to-multipoint computer to console operation by

connecting multiple KE69x0 devices on the same TCP/IP LAN. To setup a

LAN installation, simply connect the Cat 5e/6 cable (in step 5 above) to the

network instead of directly between two KE69x0 devices and see KE6900 /

KE6940 LAN Installation, page 110 for details.

KVM over IP Matrix System User Manual

102

USB KVM

cable

Local PC

KE6900ST (Front) KE6900ST (Rear)

KE6900R

Cat 5e/5 cable

Chapter 2. Hardware Setup

103

KE8900S Point-to-Point Installation

The KE8900S Slim HDMI KVM over IP Extender is a cost saving alternative

for installations that don’t need a local console or audio transmission but want

the connectivity features of advanced KE models.

Setting up the KE8900S system in a point-to-point configuration is simply a

matter of plugging in the cables. Make sure that all the equipment is powered

off. Refer to the installation diagrams on the next page and do the following:

1. (Optional) Connect the grounding terminals of KE8900ST and KE8900SR

to a suitable grounded object using grounding wires.

2. Connect the USB HDMI KVM Cable provided with this package between

a computer and the KE8900ST. Please use the USB Type-B end of the

USB HDMI KVM Cable for the KE8900ST as it has a USB Type-B port.

3. Connect a Cat 5e/6 cable between the LAN ports of KE8900ST and

KE8900SR.

4. Connect a USB mouse/keyboard to the front panel of the KE8900SR and

HDMI monitor to the rear panel of the KE8900SR.

5. Plug the power adapters into power sockets; then plug the other ends

respectively into KE8900ST and KE8900SR’s power jacks. For

KE8900ST, you can choose to use the terminal block for power input.

Insert DC + and - wires (DC 12 to 48V) to the terminal block according to

the icon.*

6. (Optional) For control of serial devices, connect the RS-232 serial port on

the KE8900ST to a serial port on the computer.

7. Power on the computer.

Setting up a LAN Installation

Setting up the units on a network allows point-to-point, point-to-multipoint,

and multipoint-to-multipoint computer to console operation by connecting

multiple KE Series devices on the same TCP/IP LAN. To set up a LAN

installation, simply connect the Cat 5e/6 cable (in step 3) to the network instead

of directly between two KE Series devices. As an example, please refer to

KE6900 / KE6940 LAN Installation.

KVM over IP Matrix System User Manual

104

KE8900SR (Rear)

KE8900SR (Front)

KE8900ST (Rear)

DC 5V

Chapter 2. Hardware Setup

105

KE9900ST Point-to-Point Installation

The KE9900ST DisplayPort KVM over IP Extender Lite is a cost saving

alternative for installations with Transmitters that don’t need a local console or

audio transmission but want the connectivity features of advanced KE models.

Setting up the KE9900ST system in a point-to-point configuration is simply a

matter of plugging in the cables. Make sure that all the equipment is powered

off. Refer to the installation diagrams on the next page and do the following:

1. (Optional) Connect the grounding terminal of the KE9900ST to a suitable

grounded object using a grounding wire.

2. Connect the supplied DisplayPort Cable between the DisplayPort ports of

the computer and the KE9900ST.

3. With the supplied USB 2.0 Type-A to Type-B cable, connect the USB

Type-A end to the computer and the Type-B end to the KE9900ST.

4. (Optional) For control of serial devices, connect the RS-232 serial port on

the KE9900ST to a serial port on the computer.

5. Connect a Cat 5e/6 cable between the LAN ports of KE9900ST and the

receiver unit* (e.g. KE8900SR).

6. Connect a USB mouse/keyboard and HDMI monitor to their respective

ports on the KE8900SR.

7. Power the KE8900SR (e.g. plugging power adapter between the unit and a

power socket).

8. Plug the power adapter into a power socket; then plug the other end into

KE9900ST’s power jack. Alternatively, you can choose to use the terminal

block for power input. Insert DC + and - wires (DC 12 to 48V) to the

terminal block according to the icon.

9. Power on the computer.

Note: A KE Series receiver unit is required and sold separately.

Setting up a LAN Installation

Setting up the units on a network allows point-to-point, point-to-multipoint,

and multipoint-to-multipoint computer to console operation by connecting

multiple KE Series devices on the same TCP/IP LAN. To set up a LAN

installation, simply connect the Cat 5e/6 cable (in step 5) to the network instead

KVM over IP Matrix System User Manual

106

of directly between two KE Series devices. As an example, please refer to

KE6900 / KE69 40 LAN Installation.

KE8900SR (Rear)

KE8900SR (Front)

KE9900ST (Rear)

DC 5V

Chapter 2. Hardware Setup

107

KE9950 / KE9952 Point-to-Point Installation

Setting up the KE9950 / KE9952 system in a point-to-point configuration is

simply a matter of plugging in the cables.

Note: In a point-to-point configuration, no administrator setup is necessary.

Make sure that all the equipment is powered off. Refer to the installation

diagrams on the next two pages and do the following:

1. (Optional) Connect the extender’s grounding terminal to a suitable

grounded object using the grounding wire.

2. On the transmitter side, plug the mouse, keyboard, DisplayPort monitor,

serial devices, microphone and speakers into the ports on the Console

section of the KE9950T / KE9952T.

3. Connect the DisplayPort cable, the USB 2.0 Type-A to Type-B cable

provided with this package and the audio ports into the KVM Ports on the

front of the KE9950T / KE9952T.

4. Connect the other end of the DisplayPort cable and the USB 2.0 Type-A to

Type-B and audio cables into the keyboard, video, mouse, speaker and

microphone ports on the computer.

5. For control of serial devices, connect the RS-232 port on the front of the

transmitter to a serial port on the computer.

6. Connect a Cat 5e/6 cable to the KE9950T / KE9952T’s LAN port.

7. On the receiver side, plug the mouse, keyboard, DisplayPort monitor,

serial devices, microphone and speakers into the ports on the Console

section of the KE9950R / KE9952R.

8. Connect the other end of the Cat 5e/6 cable to the KE9950R / KE9952R’s

LAN port.

9. Instead of connecting through the LAN ports, you can choose to connect

the KE9950 / KE9952 through the SFP slots. To do so, plug SFP modules

into the transmitter and receiver's SFP slots, then connect each end of

Gigabit Ethernet (GbE) optical fiber between the SFP modules.*

10. Plug the power adapters into AC sources with the power cords and plug

the other ends into the transmitter and receiver’s power jacks respectively.

The KE9952 supports Power over Ethernet (PoE) where power can be

supplied through a PoE network switch instead of using a power adapter.

KVM over IP Matrix System User Manual

108

11. (Optional) For power redundancy, plug the second power adapters into AC

sources with the power cords and plug the other ends into the transmitter

and receiver’s second power jacks.**

12. Power on the computer.

Note: 1. The SFP module 2A-136G / 2A-137G is sold separately. Contact your

ATEN dealer for product

information.

2. Available for KE9950T and KE9950R only. The second power

adapter with the power cord

is sold separately. Contact your ATEN

dealer for product information. Power redundancy for

KE9952T and

KE9952R can be achieved with the PoE function.

KE9950 / KE9952 Point-to-Point Installation 1 of 2

Chapter 2. Hardware Setup

109

Note: Power adapters are not provided with the KE9952. Please contact your

ATEN dealer to purchase additional power adapters, or use the Power

over Ethernet (PoE) feature to supply power to the KE9952.

KE9950 / KE9952 Point-to-Point Installation 2 of 2

Note: The serial port on the Transmitter (shown above) connects to the

computer; the serial port on the Receiver (not shown) connects to a

serial device (optional).

KVM over IP Matrix System User Manual

110

KE6900 / KE6940 LAN Installation

Setting up the units on a network allows point-to-point, point-to-multipoint,

and multipoint-to-multipoint computer to console operation by connecting

multiple KE6900 / KE6900ST / KE6940 devices on the same TCP/IP LAN.

Prior to setup we recommended laying out the plans for your KE installation

using our performance guide (see Keys to Network Performance, page 391).

A few points to note during your setup:

The units are preconfigured with factory-default network settings. If you

install only one set of KE Series units, you do not need to change these

default network settings. See Default IP Addresses, page 134, for further

details.

In a network setup with multiple units, each Transmitter and Receiver

must be configured with a unique IP address. See Network Configuration,

page 133, for further details.

We recommended using 1000Mbps Gigabit Ethernet switches (wire

speeds, non-blocking with 1Gbps/1.5Mpps performance per port) between

KE Series devices installed on different LAN segments. 10/100Mbps

switches might cause poor performance.

In multipoint configurations, the IGMP and flow control function of your

network switches/hubs must be enabled to avoid the deterioration of data

throughput. To ensure functionality use a layer 3 switch that supports

IGMP queries.

If your network uses cascaded switches, please check to ensure the data

throughput is sufficient.

To get the best performance, we suggest creating a private network for KE

devices, as they are bandwidth-intensive devices.

Make sure that all the equipment is powered off. Refer to the installation

diagram on the following page, and do the following:

1. On the Transmitter side, plug the mouse, keyboard, DVI monitor,

microphone and speakers into the ports on the Console section of the

KE6900T / KE6940T.* Each port is marked with an appropriate icon to

indicate itself.

2. Connect the USB KVM cable provided to the KVM Ports on the front of

the KE6900T / KE6940T.

3. Connect the other end of the USB KVM cable to the keyboard, video,

mouse, speaker and microphone ports on the computer.

Chapter 2. Hardware Setup

111

4. For control of serial devices, connect the RS-232 serial port on the

Transmitter to a serial port on the computer.

5. Use a Cat 5e/6 cable to connect the KE6900T / KE6940T’s LAN port to

the local area TCP/IP network.

6. Plug the power adapter into an AC source; and plug the other end into the

KE6900T / KE6940T’s Power Jack.

7. On the Receiver side, plug the mouse, keyboard, DVI monitor,

microphone, and speakers into the ports on the Console section of the

KE6900R / KE6940R.**

8. Use a Cat 5e/6 cable to connect the KE6900R / KE6940R’s LAN port to

the local area TCP/IP network.

9. Plug the second power adapter into an AC source; and plug the other end

into the KE6900R / KE6940R's Power Jack.

10. Use the OSD on the Receiver to configure the network settings for both

devices (See Network Configurat ion, page 133).

11. Repeat these steps for each Transmitter and Receiver you wish to install on

the network.

12. Power on the computer(s).

Note: 1. If installing the KE6940 with two DVI monitors, connect the second

DVI monitor via a DVI cable into the additional ports on the KE6940

and computer.

2. For specifically designed USB keyboards/mouses, see USB Mode,

page 226.

KVM over IP Matrix System User Manual

112

KE6900 / KE6940 Network Installation Diagram 1 of 2

Note: The diagram above shows the KE6900T and KE6900R. The KE6940

installation is the same except that an additional DVI monitor can be

connected at each end for a dual-view display setup.

KE6900T

Cat 5e/6 cable

KE6900R

Cat 5e/6 cable

TCP/IP

LAN

Chapter 2. Hardware Setup

113

KE6900 / KE6940 Network Installation Diagram 2 of 2

Note: The serial port on the Transmitter (shown above) connects to the

computer; the serial port on the Receiver (not shown) connects to a

serial device (optional).

USB KVM

cable

Local PC

KE6900T

KVM over IP Matrix System User Manual

114

KE6900A / KE6940A LAN Installation

Setting up the units on a network allows point-to-point, point-to-multipoint,

and multipoint-to-multipoint computer to console operation by connecting

multiple extender devices on the same TCP/IP LAN. Prior to setup we

recommended laying out the plans for your KE installation using our

performance guide (see Keys to Network Performance, page 391).

A few points to note during your setup:

The units are preconfigured with factory-default network settings. If you

install only one set of KE Series units, you do not need to change these

default network settings. See Default IP Addresses, page 134, for further

details.

In a network setup with multiple units, each Transmitter and Receiver

must be configured with a unique IP address. See Network Configuration,

page 133, for further details.

We recommended using 1000Mbps Gigabit Ethernet switches (wire

speeds, non-blocking with 1Gbps/1.5Mpps performance per port) between

KE Series devices installed on different LAN segments. 10/100Mbps

switches might cause poor performance.

In multipoint configurations, the IGMP and flow control function of your

network switches/hubs must be enabled to avoid the deterioration of data

throughput. To ensure functionality use a layer 3 switch that supports

IGMP queries.

If your network uses cascaded switches, please check to ensure the data

throughput is sufficient.

To get the best performance, we suggest creating a private network for KE

devices, as they are bandwidth-intensive devices.

The unit supports network redundancy. Where both LAN and SFP ports

are connected, a network redundancy is established. Please note that if you

use copper SFP modules, the module has to be removed for the unit to

switch to the LAN port’s network.

For specifically designed USB keyboards/mouses, see USB Mode,

page 226.

Make sure that all the equipment is powered off before the installation.

The installation is similar to that of KE69 00A / KE6 940 A Poin t-t o-Po in t

Installation on page 86, with the difference in connecting the transmitter and

Chapter 2. Hardware Setup

115

the receiver to a local area TCP/IP network. Refer to the diagrams on the

following page and connect accordingly.

Repeat these steps for each Transmitter and Receiver you wish to install on the

network then power on the computer(s).

KE6900A / KE6940A Network Installation Diagram 1 of 2

TCP/IP

LAN

KE6900AT (Rear)

Cat 5e/6 cable

Optical Fiber Cable

DC 5V

Serial

Device

KE6900AR (Rear)

Cat 5e/6 cable

Optical Fiber Cable

DC 5V

Serial

Device

KVM over IP Matrix System User Manual

116

KE6900A / KE6940A Network Installation Diagram 2 of 2

KE6900AT (Front)

USB DVI-D KVM

cable

Chapter 2. Hardware Setup

117

KE6900AiT / KE6940AiT LAN Installation

Setting up the units on a network allows point-to-point, point-to-multipoint,

and multipoint-to-multipoint computer to console operation by connecting

multiple extender devices on the same TCP/IP LAN. Prior to setup we

recommended laying out the plans for your KE installation using our

performance guide (see Keys to Network Performance, page 391).

A few points to note during your setup:

The units are preconfigured with factory-default network settings. If you

install only one set of KE Series units, you do not need to change these

default network settings. See Default IP Addresses, page 134, for further

details.

In a network setup with multiple units, each Transmitter and Receiver

must be configured with a unique IP address. See Network Configuration,

page 133, for further details.

We recommended using 1000Mbps Gigabit Ethernet switches (wire

speeds, non-blocking with 1Gbps/1.5Mpps performance per port) between

KE Series devices installed on different LAN segments. 10/100Mbps

switches might cause poor performance.

In multipoint configurations, the IGMP and flow control function of your

network switches/hubs must be enabled to avoid the deterioration of data

throughput. To ensure functionality use a layer 3 switch that supports

IGMP queries.

If your network uses cascaded switches, please check to ensure the data

throughput is sufficient.

To get the best performance, we suggest creating a private network for KE

devices, as they are bandwidth-intensive devices.

The unit supports network redundancy. Where both LAN and SFP ports

are connected, a network redundancy is established. Please note that if you

use copper SFP modules, the module has to be removed for the unit to

switch to the LAN port’s network.

For specifically designed USB keyboards/mouses, see USB Mode,

page 226.

Make sure that all the equipment is powered off before the installation.

The installation is similar to that of KE6900AiT / KE6940AiT Point-to-Point

Installation on page 89, with the difference in connecting the transmitter and

the receiver to a local area TCP/IP network. Refer to the diagrams on the

following page and connect accordingly.

KVM over IP Matrix System User Manual

118

Repeat these steps for each Transmitter and Receiver you wish to install on the

network then power on the computer(s).

Note: If you wish to use CCVSR and/or remote access with Winclient/

Javaclient, you will still need to connect the Internet Port of the

KE6900AiT / KE6940AiT to an Office LAN.

It is highly recommended that the AiT unit(s) is mounted on a system

rack or on a wall and avoid stacked setup to ensure proper ventilation.

KE6900AiT / KE6940AiT Network Installation Diagram 1 of 2

KE6940AR (Rear)

KE6940AiT (Rear)

Cat 5e/6 cable

Optical Fiber Cable

Cat 5e/6 cable

Optical Fiber Cable

DC 12V

DC 5V

Serial

Device

Serial

Device

Office LAN

DC 12V

DC 5V

TCP/IP

LAN

Chapter 2. Hardware Setup

119

KE6900AiT / KE6940AiT Network Installation Diagram 2 of 2

KE6940AiT (Front)

USB DVI-D KVM

cable

KVM over IP Matrix System User Manual

120

KE6910 / KE6912 LAN Installation

Setting up the units on a network allows point-to-point, point-to-multipoint,

and multipoint-to-multipoint computer to console operation by connecting

multiple KE6910 / KE6912 devices on the same TCP/IP LAN. Prior to setup

we recommended laying out the plans for your KE installation using our

performance guide (see Keys to Network Performance, page 391).

A few points to note during your setup:

The units are preconfigured with factory-default network settings. If you

install only one set of KE Series units, you do not need to change these

default network settings. See Default IP Addresses, page 134, for further

details.

In a network setup with multiple units, each Transmitter and Receiver

must be configured with a unique IP address. See Network Configuration,

page 133, for further details.

We recommended using 1000Mbps Gigabit Ethernet switches (wire

speeds, non-blocking with 1Gbps/1.5Mpps performance per port) between

KE Series devices installed on different LAN segments. 10/100Mbps

switches might cause poor performance.

In multipoint configurations, the IGMP and flow control function of your

network switches/hubs must be enabled to avoid the deterioration of data

throughput. To ensure functionality use a layer 3 switch that supports

IGMP queries.

If your network uses cascaded switches, please check to ensure the data

throughput is sufficient.

To get the best performance, we suggest creating a private network for KE

devices, as they are bandwidth-intensive devices.

Make sure that all the equipment is powered off before the installation.

The installation is similar to that of KE69 10 / KE69 12 Poi nt- to-Point

Installation on page 92, with the difference in connecting the transmitter and

the receiver to a local area TCP/IP network. Refer to the diagrams on the

following page and connect accordingly.

Repeat these steps for each Transmitter and Receiver you wish to install on the

network then power on the computer(s).

Chapter 2. Hardware Setup

121

KE6910 / KE6912 Network Installation Diagram 1 of 2

KE6910R (Rear)

KE6910T (Rear)

Cat 5e/6 cable Optical Fiber Cable

DC 5V

TCP/IP

LAN

KVM over IP Matrix System User Manual

122

KE6910 / KE6912 Network Installation Diagram 2 of 2

KE6910T (Front)

Chapter 2. Hardware Setup

123

KE6920 / KE6922 LAN Installation

Setting up the units on a network allows point-to-point, point-to-multipoint,

and multipoint-to-multipoint computer to console operation by connecting

multiple KE6920 / KE6922 devices on the same TCP/IP LAN. Prior to setup

we recommended laying out the plans for your KE installation using our

performance guide (see Keys to Network Performance, page 391).

A few points to note during your setup:

The units are preconfigured with factory-default network settings. If you

install only one set of KE Series units, you do not need to change these

default network settings. See Default IP Addresses, page 134, for further

details.

In a network setup with multiple units, each Transmitter and Receiver

must be configured with a unique IP address. See Network Configuration,

page 133, for further details.

We recommended using 1000Mbps Gigabit Ethernet switches (wire

speeds, non-blocking with 1Gbps/1.5Mpps performance per port) between

KE Series devices installed on different LAN segments. 10/100Mbps

switches might cause poor performance.

In multipoint configurations, the IGMP and flow control function of your

network switches/hubs must be enabled to avoid the deterioration of data

throughput. To ensure functionality use a layer 3 switch that supports

IGMP queries.

If your network uses cascaded switches, please check to ensure the data

throughput is sufficient.

To get the best performance, we suggest creating a private network for KE

devices, as they are bandwidth-intensive devices.

Make sure that all the equipment is powered off before the installation.

The installation is similar to that of KE6920 / KE6922 Point-to-Point

Installation on page 95, with the difference in connecting the transmitter and

the receiver to a local area TCP/IP network. Refer to the diagrams on the

following page and connect accordingly.

Repeat these steps for each Transmitter and Receiver you wish to install on the

network then power on the computer(s).

Note: 1. The unit supports network redundancy. Where both LAN and SFP

ports are connected, a network redundancy is established. Please note

KVM over IP Matrix System User Manual

124

that if you use copper SFP modules, the module has to be removed for

the unit to switch to the LAN port’s network.

2. The KE6922’s LAN port provides Power over Ethernet (PoE)

functionality which supplies power to the unit when connected to a

compatible PoE network switch.

3. Power adapters are not provided with KE6922 units. Please contact

your ATEN dealer to purchase additional power adapters, or use the

Power over Ethernet (PoE) feature to supply power to KE6922 units.

4. For specifically designed USB keyboards/mouses, see USB Mode,

page 226.

KE6920 / KE6922 Network Installation Diagram 1 of 2

TCP/IP

LAN

KE6920T (Rear)

Cat 5e/6 cable Optical Fiber Cable

DC 5V

Serial

Device

KE6920R (Rear)

Cat 5e/6 cable Optical Fiber Cable

DC 5V

Serial

Device

Chapter 2. Hardware Setup

125

KE6920 / KE6922 Network Installation Diagram 2 of 2

KE6920T (Front)

USB DVI-D KVM

cable

KVM over IP Matrix System User Manual

126

KE8950 / KE8952 LAN Installation

Setting up the units on a network allows point-to-point, point-to-multipoint,

and multipoint-to-multipoint computer to console operation by connecting

multiple KE8950 / KE8952 devices on the same TCP/IP LAN. Prior to setup

we recommended laying out the plans for your KE installation using our

performance guide (see Keys to Network Performance, page 391).

A few points to note during your setup:

The units are preconfigured with factory-default network settings. If you

install only one set of KE Series units, you do not need to change these

default network settings. See Default IP Addresses, page 134, for further

details.

In a network setup with multiple units, each Transmitter and Receiver

must be configured with a unique IP address. See Network Configuration,

page 133, for further details.

We recommended using 1000Mbps Gigabit Ethernet switches (wire

speeds, non-blocking with 1Gbps/1.5Mpps performance per port) between

KE Series devices installed on different LAN segments. 10/100Mbps

switches might cause poor performance.

In multipoint configurations, the IGMP and flow control function of your

network switches/hubs must be enabled to avoid the deterioration of data

throughput. To ensure functionality use a layer 3 switch that supports

IGMP queries.

If your network uses cascaded switches, please check to ensure the data

throughput is sufficient.

To get the best performance, we suggest creating a private network for KE

devices, as they are bandwidth-intensive devices.

Make sure that all the equipment is powered off.

Refer to the installation diagram on the following page, and do the following:

1. On the Transmitter side, plug the mouse, keyboard, HDMI monitor,

microphone and speakers into the ports on the Console section of the

KE8950T / KE8952T. Each port is marked with an appropriate icon to

indicate itself.

2. Connect the USB KVM cable provided to the KVM Ports on the front of

the KE8950T / KE8952T.

3. Connect the other end of the USB KVM cable to the keyboard, video,

mouse, speaker and microphone ports on the computer.

Chapter 2. Hardware Setup

127

4. For control of serial devices, connect the RS-232 serial port on the

Transmitter to a serial port on the computer.

5. Connect a Cat 5e/6 cable to the LAN port, or a Gigabit Ethernet (GbE)

optical fiber cable to the SFP port* to connect the KE8950T / KE8952T to

the local area TCP/IP network.**

6. Plug the power adapter into an AC source; and plug the other end into the

KE8950T / KE8952T’s Power Jack.***

7. On the Receiver side, plug the mouse, keyboard, HDMI monitor,

microphone, and speakers into the ports on the Console section of the

KE8950R / KE8952R.****

8. Connect a Cat 5e/6 cable to the LAN port, or a Gigabit Ethernet (GbE)

optical fiber cable to the SFP port* to connect the KE8950R / KE8952R to

the local area TCP/IP network.**

9. Plug the power adapter into an AC source; and plug the other end into the

KE8950R / KE8952R's Power Jack.***

10. Use the OSD on the Receiver to configure the network settings for both

devices (See Network Configurat ion, page 133).

11. Repeat these steps for each Transmitter and Receiver you wish to install on

the network.

12. Power on the computer(s).

Note: 1. The unit supports network redundancy. Where both LAN and SFP

ports are connected, a network redundancy is established. Please note,

though, that if you use copper SFP modules, the module has to be

removed for the unit to switch to the LAN port’s network.

2. The KE8952’s LAN port provides Power over Ethernet (PoE)

functionality which supplies power to the unit when connected to a

compatible PoE network switch.

3. Power adapters are not provided with KE8952 units. Please contact

your ATEN dealer to purchase additional power adapters, or use the

Power over Ethernet (PoE) feature to supply power to KE8952 units.

4. For specifically designed USB keyboards/mouses, see USB Mode,

page 226.

KVM over IP Matrix System User Manual

128

KE8950 / KE8952 Network Installation Diagram 1 of 2

Note: Power adapters are not provided with KE8952 units. Please contact

your ATEN dealer to purchase additional power adapters, or use the

Power over Ethernet (PoE) feature to supply power to KE8952 units.

KE8950R (Rear)

KE8950T (Rear)

Cat 5e/6 Cable

Optical Fiber Cable

Cat 5e/6 Cable Optical Fiber Cable

DC 5V

TCP/IP

LAN

Chapter 2. Hardware Setup

129

KE8950 / KE8952 Network Installation Diagram 2 of 2

Note: The serial port on the Transmitter (shown above) connects to the

computer; the serial port on the Receiver (not shown) connects to a

serial device (optional).

USB HDMI KVM

Cable

Local PC

KE8950T (Front)

KVM over IP Matrix System User Manual

130

KE9950 / KE9952 LAN Installation

Setting up the units on a network allows point-to-point, point-to-multipoint,

and multipoint-to-multipoint computer to console operation by connecting

multiple KE9950 / KE9952 devices on the same TCP/IP LAN. Prior to setup

we recommended laying out the plans for your KE installation using our

performance guide (see Keys to Network Performance, page 391).

A few points to note during your setup:

The units are preconfigured with factory-default network settings. If you

install only one set of KE Series units, you do not need to change these

default network settings. See Default IP Addresses, page 134, for further

details.

In a network setup with multiple units, each Transmitter and Receiver

must be configured with a unique IP address. See Network Configuration,

page 133, for further details.

We recommended using 1000Mbps Gigabit Ethernet switches (wire

speeds, non-blocking with 1Gbps/1.5Mpps performance per port) between

KE Series devices installed on different LAN segments. 10/100Mbps

switches might cause poor performance.

In multipoint configurations, the IGMP and flow control function of your

network switches/hubs must be enabled to avoid the deterioration of data

throughput. To ensure functionality use a layer 3 switch that supports

IGMP queries.

If your network uses cascaded switches, please check to ensure the data

throughput is sufficient.

To get the best performance, we suggest creating a private network for KE

devices, as they are bandwidth-intensive devices.

Make sure that all the equipment is powered off.

The installation is similar to that of KE69 00 / KE69 40 Poi nt- to-Point

Installation on page 83, with the difference in connecting the transmitter and

the receiver to a local area TCP/IP network. Refer to the diagrams on the

following page and connect accordingly.

Repeat these steps for each Transmitter and Receiver you wish to install on the

network then power on the computer(s).

Chapter 2. Hardware Setup

131

KE9950 / KE9952 Network Installation Diagram 1 of 2

KVM over IP Matrix System User Manual

132

KE9950 / KE9952 Network Installation Diagram 2 of 2

Chapter 2. Hardware Setup

133

Network Configuration

This section provides instructions to configure the network settings with a

fixed IP address, subnet mask, and default gateway. To use the IP Installer to

configure the IP address, see IP Installer, page 378.

Note: 1. Both devices are preconfigured with factory-default network settings.

If you install only one set of KE Series units, you do not need to

change these default network settings. See Default IP Addresses,

page 134, for further details.

2. In a network setup with multiple units, each transmitter and receiver

must be configured with a unique IP address. See Network

Configuration, page 133, for further details.

3. We recommended using 1000Mbps Gigabit Ethernet switches (wire

speeds, non-blocking with 1Gbps/1.5Mpps performance per port)

between devices installed on different LAN segments. 10/100Mbps

switches might cause poor performance.

4. In multipoint configurations, the IGMP and flow control function of

your network switches/hubs must be enabled to avoid the

deterioration of data throughput. To ensure functionality use a layer 3

switch that supports IGMP queries.

5. If your network uses cascaded switches, please check to ensure the

data throughput is sufficient.

6. To get the best performance, we suggest creating a private network

for KE device, as they are bandwidth-intensive devices.

To configure the network settings, do the following:

1. Setup the hardware and connect the Transmitter and Receiver to the local

area network (see KE6900 / KE6 940 LAN Insta llation, page 110, or

KE8950 / KE 8952 LAN Installatio n, page 126).

2. From the Receiver, tap the Scroll Lock key twice to invoke the OSD.

3. Select the Receiver or Transmitter from the sidebar menu.

4. Enter the password and click Configure.

The default password is: password.

5. From the Network tab select Set IP address manually and enter the

following:

KVM over IP Matrix System User Manual

134

IP Ad dress– sets the IP address for the KE device. Key in a valid

unique IP address.

Note: See Default IP Addresses, page 134, for the preconfigured

factory-default settings.

Subnet Mask – sets the subnet mask for the KE device. Key in a valid

subnet mask value.

Note: The default setting is 255.255.255.0

Default Gateway– sets the default gateway for the KE device. Key in a

valid default gateway.

6. Click Save.

Exit OSD

To exit the OSD, press [Esc] on the keyboard, click Logout; tap the Scroll

Lock key twice; or return to the OSD main page and press the front panel OSD

pushbutton (Receiver only).

At this point the Receiver can connect to the Transmitter to access the remote

computer (see OSD Matrix Mode, page 160 for instructions).

Default IP Addresses

The preconfigured factory-default IP addresses for the KE Series devices are

as follows:

Transmitters – 192.168.0.61

Receivers – 192.168.0.60

Chapter 2. Hardware Setup

135

KE I/O Ports

The following table provides the I/O port use of KE Series devices.

Device Port Number

KE Matrix Manager (TCP) HTTP 8080

HTTPS 8443

Device TCP 9110

CLI 9111

Redundancy 9120

Database Service 1527

KE Matrix Manager (UDP) Port 9110

Broadcast 9000

KE TX/RX Device (TCP) Manager 9110

Service 9000

Telnet 23

SSH 22

KE TX Device (TCP) VM 9001

vUSB 9002

Serial 9003

USB Access Mode 9009

KE RX Device (TCP) CLI 9130

KE TX/RX Device (UDP) Manager 9110

Service 9000

Array Mode 9120

Video 0xFE00(65024) - 0xFE03(65027)

Audio 0xFE04(65028) - 0xFE05(65029)

KVM over IP Matrix System User Manual

136

LED Display

Both the Transmitter and Receiver have front panel LEDs to indicate their

operating and power status, as explained in the table below:

LED Indication

LAN This LED indicates the network status.



Lights when connected to the LAN and blinks when the Ethernet

connection is active:



Orange: 10 Mbps



Orange + Green: 100 Mbps



Green: 1000 Mbps



Off when not connected to the LAN.

Power



Lights blue when the unit is powered on.



OFF when power is off.

Local



Lights green to Indicate the Transmitter has KVM focus of the

computer

Remote



Lights green to Indicate the Receiver has KVM focus of the

computer.

137

Chapter 3

OSD Operation

Overview

This chapter provides instructions to configure and operate KE Series devices

using the local On Screen Display (OSD). To configure the network settings

with the OSD, see Network Configuration, page 133.

Invoking the OSD

The On Screen Display (OSD) is a keyboard/mouse-driven application on the

receiver used to configure the transmitter and receiver settings. Once the

receiver has discovered the transmitter over a network* or Ethernet cable

connection, you can use the OSD on the receiver to configure the transmitter.

To invoke the OSD, press the OSD pushbutton on the front of the receiver, or

from the keyboard tap the Scroll Lock key twice. The OSD main page will

appear (see Press the Esc key to cancel., page 139).

To exit the OSD, press [Esc] on the keyboard; click Logout; tap the Scroll

Lock key twice; or return to the OSD main page and press the OSD pushbutton

on the front of the receiver. The OSD disappears and the computer desktop

screen or the System Login prompt is displayed.

Note: 1. For the Receiver to discover the Transmitter over a network, both

must be on the same subnet of the LAN.

2. To change the OSD hotkeys, see page 157.

3. If the keyboard/mouse won’t work when the OSD is invoked, see

USB Mode, page 226.

Touch Screen Calibration

If you’re using a touch screen monitor and the OSD appears off center, you can

use the blinking

at each corner to adjust the position of the OSD.

KVM over IP Matrix System User Manual

138

OSD Hotkeys

The OSD hotkeys navigate the Receiver’s OSD screens. The hotkeys work

after logging in from the System Logi n screen (see page 158) but not the OSD

Configuration screen. Pressing a hotkey will immediately take you to the

corresponding OSD screen.

Users can also use the [Page Up] and [Page Down] keys to jump to the previous

and next configuration pages.

Non-OSD Hotkeys

The following are the hotkeys that can be used without entering the OSD

screen:

Reverting to Previous

Users can use the [Alt] + [K] hotkey to switch back to the transmitter channel

previously accessed.

Hotkey Mode

The Hotkey Mode allows users to quickly switch from one transmitter to

another. Either press [Num Lock] + [-] or [Ctrl] + [F12] to enter Hotkey Mode.

Once in Hotkey Mode, you can use the [Next Arrow] and [Previous Arrow]

keys to quickly switch between different transmitters. You can also press a

[Number Key] + [S] / [O] / [E] / [V] to access a transmitter based on its order

number in Favorites (see page 160) by Share / Occupy / Exclusive / View Only

mode.

Hotkey OSD Screen Page

[F1] Connections Page 1 in List Mode 159

[F2] Connections Page 1 in Array Mode 162

[F3] Profile Page 1 164

[F5] Push Content Page 1 165

[F6] Pull Content Page 1 167

[F7] Receiver > Properties 142

[F8] User Preferences 157

[F9] OSD Login Screen

(logs user off)

158

Chapter 3. OSD Operation

139

Microphone Hotkey

You can switch microphone access between Receivers with a hotkey:

1. Press and hold down [Num Lock].

2. Press and release [-].

3. Release [Num Lock].

4. Press 1.

Press the Esc key to cancel.

OSD Interface

After you invoke the OSD, the main page appears:

Note: A password is required to enter the OSD. The default password is:

password. For security purposes, the system will prompt you to change

the password.

The OSD components are described in the table below:

No. Item Description

1 Receiver Select this radio button, enter a password, and click

Configure to enter the Receiver Configuration screen.

KVM over IP Matrix System User Manual

140

Logging in for the First Time

If you are the administrator, and are logging in for the first time (Receiver or

User Preference radio button), use the default password (password).

For security purposes, the system will prompt you to change the login

password immediately as shown below:

Click OK and change the password in the dialog box shown below:

Enter the password and confirm it in the next field. The password must be

different from your original password.

2 Transmitter Select this radio button, enter a password, and click

Configure to enter the Transmitter Configuration screen.

Note: Receiver must first discover the transmitter over the

network for this option to be available.

3 User Preferences Select this radio button, enter a password, and click

Configure to enter the User Preferences screen.

4 About About provides information regarding the OSD version.

5 Password Input the OSD password and click Configure to enter the

selected configuration screen. See note for password.

6 Configure After entering a password, click Configure to enter the

selected configuration screen.

7Back to

Connection

Clicking this button exits the OSD and returns you to the

computer’s video display.

No. Item Description

Chapter 3. OSD Operation

141

Receiver Configuration

Select the Receiver radio button and click Configure to login, the Network tab

appears:

Network

The Network tab allows you to configure the Receiver’s IP address settings:

After entering the information, click Save.

Item Description

IP Installer The IP Installer is an external Windows-based utility for

assigning an IP address to the device. Click one of the radio

buttons to select Enable, View Only, or Disable for the IP

Installer utility. See IP Installer, page 378 for instructions.

Note: For security, we strongly recommend that you set this to

View Only or Disable after each use.

Network

Configuration

For dynamic IP address assignment (DHCP), select the Obtain

IP address automatically radio button.

To specify a fixed IP Address, Subnet Mask, and Default

Gateway select the Set IP address manually radio button and

fill in the fields with values appropriate for your network.

For help configuring network settings with the OSD, see

Network Configuration, page 133.

KVM over IP Matrix System User Manual

142

Properties

There are two versions of Properties for KE Series, a Regular Version, and a

Slim Version.

The Properties tab allows you to configure the Receiver’s settings.

Note: KE8900ST, KE8900SR, and KE9900ST are

Slim Version.

Regular Version

Item Description

Mode Select Extender mode for simple one-to-one (Transmitter to

Receiver) setups that are managed with the Receiver’s OSD

menu.

Select Matrix mode to manage devices and connections from

the KE Matrix Manager web GUI. This mode is for advanced

administration of Transmitter to Receiver connections (see

Browser / Telnet Operation, page 185).

Properties If you selected Extender mode (above) set the Transmitter IP

address for the Receiver’s Video, Audio, USB, and RS232

source signals.

If you selected Matrix mode (above) the Properties will be

grayed out. Use Channels to configure the Transmitter

connections (see Browser / Telnet Operation, page 185).

Chapter 3. OSD Operation

143

RS232 Settings Configure the serial device settings for the Receiver. The

default settings are:

Baud Rate: 9600

Parity: None

Data Bits: 8 bits

Stop bits: 1 bit

Flow Control: None

Enable Media Select which type of media the Receiver can stream from

Transmitters: Video, Audio, USB, and RS232. For KE8950

Series models, use the radio button to set the source of the

audio signal: HDMI, Analog, or Both.

Manager

Address

Set the IP address and Port number of the computer running

the KE Matrix Manager software. The default port number is

9110.

Beeper Check this box to allow the Receiver to beep when configuration

changes are made to it.

Touch Screen

Calibration

Use this button to calibrate the surface of a USB touch screen

connected to the unit. When the calibration screen appears,

touch the flashing + symbol at each corner until the process is

complete.

Item Description

KVM over IP Matrix System User Manual

144

After entering the information, click Save.

USB Mode Select the type of USB device you will connect to the USB ports:

Virtual Media: Only select this option if you are plugging a USB

disk into the USB ports. This will give you the highest data

transfer speeds but will not allow other USB devices plugged

into the USB ports to work. When Receivers connected to the

same transmitter mount or unmount USB disk drives, the

keyboard and mouse operations will experience a brief delay.

Transmitters can support up to 12 virtual media connections at

the same time (keyboard/mouse included).

vUSB (Generic USB device): Use this option to plug USB

peripherals* into the USB ports. This option also allows a

keyboard and mouse with special functions to plug into the USB

ports for console use. Use this only if the special functions of the

keyboard or mouse are required but do not work when plugged

into the console ports. When the keyboard and mouse are

plugged into the USB ports, they will not work within the OSD

menus. To work within the OSD menus, the keyboard and

mouse must be plugged into the console ports. KE6900ST/

KE8900ST/KE9900ST transmitters do not support vUSB

(Generic USB Device) mode. In this mode, KE6900/KE6940

transmitters supports up to 2 USB connections, KE8950/

KE8952 transmitters support up to 5 USB connections

(keyboard/mouse excluded), and KE8900SR supports 1 vUSB

connection.

Encryption: Check this box to encrypt USB drives plugged into

the USB ports.

Receiver

Keyboard

Use the Keyboard Country Code drop-down menu to select the

Receiver’s language keyboard for use in the OSD.

Disable front

video button

You can enable or disable the function (select video mode or

graphic mode) of the video pushbutton on the front of the

receiver.

Check Disable to disable.

Uncheck Disable to enable.

Item Description

Chapter 3. OSD Operation

145

Slim Version

Item Description

Mode Select Extender mode for simple one-to-one (Transmitter to

Receiver) setups that are managed with the Receiver’s OSD

menu.

Select Matrix mode to manage devices and connections from

the KE Matrix Manager web GUI. This mode is for advanced

administration of Transmitter to Receiver connections (see

Browser / Telnet Operation, page 185).

Properties If you selected Extender mode (above) set the Transmitter IP

address for the Receiver’s Video, Audio, USB, and RS232

source signals.

If you selected Matrix mode (above) the Properties will be

grayed out. Use Channels to configure the Transmitter

connections (see Browser / Telnet Operation, page 185).

RS232 Settings Configure the serial device settings for the Receiver. The

default settings are:

Baud Rate: 9600

Parity: None

Data Bits: 8 bits

Stop bits: 1 bit

Flow Control: None

Enable Media Select which type of media the Receiver can stream from

Transmitters: Video, Audio, USB, and RS232. For KE8950

Series models, use the radio button to set the source of the

audio signal: HDMI, Analog, or Both.

KVM over IP Matrix System User Manual

146

After entering the information, click Save.

Manager

Address

Set the IP address and Port number of the computer running

the KE Matrix Manager software. The default port number is

9110.

Beeper Check this box to allow the Receiver to beep when configuration

changes are made to it.

Touch Screen

Calibration

Use this button to calibrate the surface of a USB touch screen

connected to the unit. When the calibration screen appears,

touch the flashing + symbol at each corner until the process is

complete.

USB Mode Select the type of USB device you will connect to the USB ports:

Virtual Media: Only select this option if you are plugging a USB

disk into the USB ports. This will give you the highest data

transfer speeds but will not allow other USB devices plugged

into the USB ports to work. When Receivers connected to the

same transmitter mount or unmount USB disk drives, the

keyboard and mouse operations will experience a brief delay.

Transmitters can support up to 12 virtual media connections at

the same time (keyboard/mouse included).

vUSB (Generic USB device): Use this option to plug USB

peripherals* into the USB ports. This option also allows a

keyboard and mouse with special functions to plug into the USB

ports for console use. Use this only if the special functions of the

keyboard or mouse are required but do not work when plugged

into the console ports. When the keyboard and mouse are

plugged into the USB ports, they will not work within the OSD

menus. To work within the OSD menus, the keyboard and

mouse must be plugged into the console ports. KE6900ST/

KE8900ST/KE9900ST transmitters do not support vUSB

(Generic USB Device) mode. In this mode, KE6900/KE6940

transmitters supports up to 2 USB connections; and KE8950/

KE8952 transmitters support up to 5 USB connections

(keyboard/mouse excluded).

Encryption: Check this box to encrypt USB drives plugged into

the USB ports.

Receiver

Keyboard

Use the Keyboard Country Code drop-down menu to select the

Receiver’s language keyboard for use in the OSD.

Video Quality

(KE8900ST /

8900SR /

9900ST)

You can select video mode or graphic mode for the video

qualtiy, the Slim Version KE Series does not have a phsycial

pushbutton on the front of the receiver.

Item Description

Chapter 3. OSD Operation

147

System

The System tab allows you to configure the Receiver’s general settings:

After entering the information, click Save.

Item Description

Device

Information

Enter the Name, and Description of the Receiver. It also

displays the IP Address, MAC Address, F/W Version, and Serial

Number of the Receiver.

Reboot Check the box and click Reboot to reset the Receiver’s settings

back to the factory default. All custom settings (but not the login

information) will be lost.

Receiver

Password

Change

Check Enable to require a password for access to the

Receiver’s OSD configuration screen. Enter the Old Password,

enter a New Password, and confirm the new password in the

Confirm Password box.

KVM over IP Matrix System User Manual

148

Transmitter Configuration

When you select the Transmitter radio button and click Configure to login, the

Network tab appears:

Network

The Network tab allows you to configure the Transmitter’s IP address settings:

After entering the information, click Save.

Item Description

IP Installer The IP Installer is an external Windows-based utility for

assigning an IP address to the device. Click one of the radio

buttons to select Enable, View Only, or Disable for the IP

Installer utility. See IP Installer, page 378 for instructions.

Note: For security, we strongly recommend that you set this to

View Only or Disable after each use.

Network

Configuration

For dynamic IP address assignment (DHCP), select the Obtain

IP address automatically radio button.

To specify a fixed IP Address, Subnet Mask, and Default

Gateway select the Set IP address manually radio button and

fill in the fields with values appropriate for your network.

For help configuring network settings with the OSD, see

Network Configuration, page 133.

Chapter 3. OSD Operation

149

Properties

The Properties tab allows you to configure the Transmitter’s extender settings:

Item Description

Mode Select Extender mode for simple one-to-one (Transmitter to

Receiver) setups that are managed with the Receiver’s OSD

menu.

Select Matrix mode to manage devices and connections from

the KE Matrix Manager web GUI. This mode is for advanced

administration of Transmitter to Receiver connections (see

Browser / Telnet Operation, page 185).

KVM over IP Matrix System User Manual

150

Properties Port OS: Use the drop-down menu to select the operating

system of the computer connected to the Transmitter.

OS Language: Use the drop-down menu to select the

operating system language of the computer connected to the

Transmitter.

Enable Multicast Video: Check this box to allow a broadcast of

the Transmitter’s video signal to be sent out to multiple

Receivers.

Enable Multicast Audio: Check this box to allow a broadcast

of the Transmitter’s audio signal to be sent out to multiple

Receivers.

EDID Mode Selection: EDID contains a display's basic

information and is used by the source device to utilize the best

resolution across different monitors. When Manual or Remix is

selected, the Receiver’s OSD will have a button allowing the

local EDID setting to be configured for the connection. Select

how you want the source device to acquire the display's EDID:



Default: EDID is set to the default ATEN configuration. This

setting must be used when connecting KE6900 devices to

KE8950 devices.



Auto: Checks the EDID of all connected displays and the

ATEN default EDID to use the best common resolution for all

displays.



Manual: Manually set the EDID configuration from the

Connections Page (see page 159).



Remix: Manually checks the EDID of all connected displays

and the ATEN default EDID to use the best common

resolution for all displays (see page 159).

Enable Media Select which type of media the Transmitter can stream to

Receivers: Video, Audio, USB, and RS232.

RS232 Settings Configure the serial device settings for the Transmitter. The

default settings are:

Baud Rate: 9600

Parity: None

Data Bits: 8 bits

Stop bits: 1 bit

Flow Control: None

Manager

Address

Set the IP address and Port number of the computer running

the KE Matrix Manager software. The default port number is

9110.

Item Description

Chapter 3. OSD Operation

151

After entering the information, click Save.

Transmitter

Video Attributes

To set the Transmitter’s video settings:

Video Type: Select the DVI video connector being used by the

display: Digital (DVI-D) or Digital (DVI-I). This option is available

for KE6900, KE6940, KE6900A, KE6940A units and will be

grayed out for other models.

Color Depth: Select the number of bits to use for the color

depth: 24, 16, or 8. This is the number of bits used to describe

the color of a single pixel. A bit depth determines the number of

colors that can be displayed at one time.

Bandwidth Limit: Select the maximum bandwidth that the

Transmitter can use to transmit video over the network. A lower

bandwidth setting transmits lower quality video; a higher

bandwidth setting sends higher quality video but this can affect

network speed.

Video Quality: Select the video quality to use. 5 is the highest

video quality, and 1 is the lowest video quality. Options are: 1~5.

Background Refresh: Sets how often the Transmitter

refreshes the background image on the connected display.

Options are to refresh every 256,128, 64, 32,16, or 0 frames.

Beeper Check this box to allow the device to beep every time a

configuration change is made.

Occupy Timeout Set a time threshold for devices whose Access Mode has been

set to Occupy (see Acce ss Type, page 221). If there is no

activity from the Receiver occupying the port for the amount of

time set here, the Receiver is timed out and the port is released.

The first Receiver to send keyboard or mouse input after the

port has been released gets to occupy the port. Input a value

from 1 to 240 seconds.

Item Description

KVM over IP Matrix System User Manual

152

System

The System tab allows you to configure the Transmitter’s general settings:

After entering the information, click Save.

Item Description

Device

Information

Enter the Name and Description of the Transmitter. It also

displays the IP Address, MAC Address, F/W Ve rsio n, and Serial

Number of the Transmitter.

Reboot Check the box and click Reboot to reset the Transmitter’s

settings back to the factory default. All custom settings (but not

the login information) will be lost.

Transmitter

Password

Change

Check Enable to require a password for access to the

Transmitter’s OSD configuration screen. Enter the Old

Password, enter a New Password, and confirm the new

password in the Confirm Password box.

Chapter 3. OSD Operation

153

Internet Port (AiT Models only)

The Internet Port tab allows you to configure the Transmitter’s Internet Port

settings:

KVM over IP Matrix System User Manual

154

IP Installer

The IP Installer is an external Windows-based utility for assigning IP addresses

to the transmitter. Click one of the radio buttons to select Enabled, Disabled,

or View Only for the IP Installer utility. See p. 378 for IP Installer details.

Note: 1. If you select View Only , you will be able to see the transmitter in the

IP Installer’s Device List, but you will not be able to change the IP

address.

2. For security, we strongly recommend that you set this to View Only

or Disabled after using it.

Service Ports

Specify the ports that the transmitter uses for various network services.

Program: This is the port number for connecting to the transmitter from

the Windows Client and Java Viewers, and from the Windows and Java

Client AP programs. The default is 9000.

HTTP: The port number for a browser login. The default is 80.

HTTPS: The port number for a secure browser login. The default is 443.

Note: 1. Valid entries for all of the Service Ports are from 1–65535.

2. The service ports cannot have the same value. You must set a

different value for each one.

3. If there is no firewall (on an Intranet, for example), it does not matter

what these numbers are set to, since they have no effect.

If a firewall is being used, the Administrator can specify the port numbers that

the firewall will allow (and set the firewall accordingly). If a port other than the

default is set, users must specify the port number as part of the IP address when

they log in. If not, an invalid port number (or no port number) is specified, the

transmitter will not be found.

IPv4 Settings

The transmitter can either have its IP address assigned dynamically at bootup

(DHCP), or it can be given a fixed IP address.

For dynamic IP address assignment, select the DHCP radio button. (This

is the default setting.)

Chapter 3. OSD Operation

155

To specify a fixed IP address, select the Manual radio button and fill in the

IP address.

Note: 1. If you choose DHCP, when the transmitter starts up it waits to get its

IP address from the DHCP server. If it has not obtained the address

after one minute, it automatically reverts to its factory default IP

address, 192.168.0.61.

2. If the transmitter is on a network that uses DHCP to assign network

addresses, and you need to ascertain its IP address, you can use the IP

installer. See IP Installer, page 378 for information.

The transmitter can either have its DNS server address assigned automatically,

or a fixed address can be specified.

For automatic DNS Server address assignment, select the Obtain DNS

server address automatically radio button.

To specify a fixed address, select the Set DNS server address manually

radio button and fill in the required information.

Note: Specifying at the alternate DNS Server address is optional.

IPv6 Settings

The transmitter can either have its IPv6 address assigned dynamically at

bootup (DHCP), or it can be given a fixed IPv6 address.

For dynamic IP address assignment, select the DHCP radio button. (This

is the default setting.)

To specify a fixed IP address, select the Manual radio button and fill in the

IP address.

The transmitter can either have its DNS server address assigned automatically,

or a fixed address can be specified.

For automatic DNS Server address assignment, select the Obtain DNS

server address automatically radio button.

To specify a fixed address, select the Set DNS server address manually

radio button and fill in the required information.

Note: Specifying at the alternate DNS Server address is optional.

KVM over IP Matrix System User Manual

156

CCVSR

Important operations occur on the transmitter can be recorded using the

CCVSR program.

Check Enable to enable the CCVSR function and specify the MAC address

and the Service Port of the computer the CCVSR runs on.

Note: The valid port range is 1–65535. The port number must different than

the one used for the Program port (see Service Ports, page 154).

Working Mode

Use this section to set the working mode parameters.

Enable ICMP: Check to enable ICMP service.

Disable Browser Service: Check to disable a particular access. Available

options are: browser, http or https.

Enable Client AP Device List: Check to enable this function. When

enabled, the unit will be discoverable in the Server List when using the

WinClient or Java Client AP (see Starting Up on page 285). Disabling this

function will render the unit undiscoverable in the Server List but can still

be connected to.

After entering the information, click Save.

Chapter 3. OSD Operation

157

User Preferences

When you select the User Preferences radio button and click Configure to

When you have made your choices, Click Save.

Item Description

User Password

Change

This section allows you to change the OSD password:

1. Key in the old password in the Old password field.

2. Key in the new password in the New password field.

3. Key in the new password again in the Confirm password

field.

OSD Language Click the drop-down menu to select the language you want to

use for OSD sessions. Choices are: English, Chinese

(Simplified), Chinese (Traditional), Japanese, Korean, Dutch,

French, Spanish, Portuguese, and Russian.

OSD Hotkey Select the hotkey combination to invoke the OSD screen.

Logout Timeout If there is no user input for the amount of time set with this

function, the user is automatically logged out of the OSD. A

Screen Blanker Set how many minutes the OSD waits when a session is idle

before turning off the display.

KVM over IP Matrix System User Manual

158

OSD Matrix Mode

If you set the system to Matrix mode (in Properties), you will see the System

Con nection Page by entering a username and password:

Note: 4. If the Receiver does not require a login, click Login to sy stem (see

Extender and Desktop/Matrix modes, see Mode, page 142.

After you login the Connection Page appears, as shown on the next page.

Chapter 3. OSD Operation

159

Connections Page

List Mode

The Con nect ion Page components are described in the table below:

No. Item Description

1 Channel Name Lists the Channel connections available for the

Receiver. A Channel is a defined connection to

Transmitters, created in the Device Management tab

of the KE Matrix Manager (see Browser / Telnet

Operation, page 185).

2 Channel Status This field provides thestatus information of the

Channel, including the device name of the

receiver(s) currently accessing and its operation

mode.

Operation modes are abbreviated as S, O, E and E

for Share, Occupy, Exclusive and View Only,

respectively.

3 Search Search for transmitters based on the keyword(s)

entered.

KVM over IP Matrix System User Manual

160

4 Connect To connect the Receiver to a Channel, click the

access type:

Exclusive: The first Receiver to access the Channel

has exclusive control over the Channel. No other

Receivers can view the Channel. The Timeout

function does not apply to this setting.

Occupy: The first Receiver to access the Channel

has control over the Channel. However, additional

Receivers may view the Channel's video display. If

the Receiver controlling the Channel is inactive for

longer than the time set in the Timeout box, control

is transferred to the first Receiver to move the

mouse or strike the keyboard.

Share: Can simultaneously share control over the

Channel. Input from the Receivers is placed in a

queue and executed chronologically.

View Only: Receiver connects with view only access

to the Channels video display.

5 Next Arrow Use these two buttons to navigate to the next page

or to the end of the list if there are more Channels

available than can be seen on the page.

6 Previous Arrow Use these two buttons to navigate to the previous

page or to the beginning of the list if there are more

Channels available than can be seen on the page.

7 Favorites Click Favorites to list only the Channels marked as

favorites. Channels marked as favorites appear with

a heart icon.

To add/remove a Favorite, select a Channel and

then right click with the mouse to select Add to

Favorite or Remove from Favorite.

Note: A maximum of 50 channels can be marked as

Favorites.

8 Array Mode Click to view the Channel connections with a video

preview of each source. The list will be shown in

groups of six at a time. The Array Mode is discussed

on page 162.

9 List Mode This option appears after selecting Array mode.

Click to view the Channel connections in a list that

can be sorted by name or with favorites listed first.

Click the Channel Name heading to change the sort.

No. Item Description

Chapter 3. OSD Operation

161

10 EDID Mode When a Transmitter's EDID is configured, depending

on its setting, different buttons will or won't appear to

configure the Receiver's EDID for the connection.

The following rules apply to the Receiver’s OSD

according to the Transmitter's EDID setting:



Under Default or Auto EDID mode, no EDID

button appears as there is nothing to configure.



Under Manual or Remix EDID mode, the EDID

button appears allowing you to select Manual

EDID or Remix EDID.

Click Manual or Remix to adjust the EDID setting

locally.

To set the Transmitter’s EDID Mode, see Properties,

page 150.

11 Logout Click this button to log out of the Connection Page.

12 Go to Configuration

Window

Click this button to return to the main OSD screen.

No. Item Description

KVM over IP Matrix System User Manual

162

Array Mode

Note that Array Mode is not supported by slim KVM over IP Receivers.

In Array Mode the screen is divided into a grid of panels, with each panel

showing the video display of a particular Channel. Right-click a panel and

select a mode to connect: E: Exclusive, O: Occupy, S: Share, V: View Only,

X: Exit. While the mouse cursor hovers over a panel displaying video, if audio

is being sent from that Transmitter, it can be heard at the Receiver.

No. Item Description

1 Next Arrow Use these two buttons to navigate to the next page or to

the end of the list if there are more Channels available

than can be seen on the page.

2 Previous Arrow Use these two buttons to navigate to the previous page

or to the beginning of the list if there are more Channels

available than can be seen on the page.

3 Grid Selection Select a range for how many Channels you want to

display. Options are: 2x2, 3x3, 4x4, 5x5, and 6x6.

Chapter 3. OSD Operation

163

4 Favorites Click Favorites to list only the Channels marked as

favorites. Click All to list all Channels.

To add/remove a Favorite, go to List Mode, select a

Channel and then right click with the mouse to select

Add to Favorite or Remove from Favorite.

Note: A maximum of 50 channels can be marked as

Favorites.

5 List Mode Click to view the Channel connections in a list that can

be sorted by name or with favorites listed first. Click the

Channel Name heading to change the sort. List Mode is

discussed on page 160.

6 Logout Click this button to log out of the Connection Page.

10 Configure Click this button to return to the main OSD screen.

No. Item Description

KVM over IP Matrix System User Manual

164

Profile Page

Click the Profile Page tab and the following screen appears:

The Profile Page components are described in the table below:

No. Item Description

1 Name Lists the Profiles available. Profiles give Receivers access

to Channels and allow you to push the connection.

2 Description The field provides a description of the Profile that was

entered when it was created.

3 Connect Click Connect and the Receiver will connect with the

settings of that Profile (see Adding a Profile, page 243).

4 Disconnect Click Disconnect to end the current Profile connection.

5 Next Arrow Use these two buttons to navigate to the next page or to

the end of the list if there are more Profiles available than

can be seen on the page.

6 Previous Arrow Use these two buttons to navigate to the previous page or

to the beginning of the list if there are more Profiles

available than can be seen on the page.

7 Logout Click this button to log out of the Connection Page.

8 Go to Configuration

Window

Click this button to return to the main OSD screen.

Chapter 3. OSD Operation

165

Push Content

Push Content allows you to push the Receiver’s computer connection to

another Receiver’s console, allowing both to access to the computer. Select the

Push Content tab and the following screen appears:

The Push Content Page components are described in the table, below:

No. Item Description

1 Receiver Name Lists the Receivers that can be selected to push the

local Receiver’s computer connection to.

2 Description The field provides a description of the Receiver that

was entered when it was created.

3 Connect Click Push Content to push the local Receiver’s

computer connection to the selected Receiver’s

console. The local Receiver’s computer connection

will appear on the Receiver that it was pushed to and

both will share access to the computer. The access

mode selected at the local Receiver will determine

how access is shared (see Transmitter Permissions,

page 220 for details).

5 Next Arrow Use these two buttons to navigate to the next page

or to the end of the list if there are more choices

available than can be seen on the page.

KVM over IP Matrix System User Manual

166

6 Previous Arrow Use these two buttons to navigate to the previous

page or to the beginning of the list if there are more

choices available than can be seen on the page.

9 Logout Click this button to log out of the Connection Page.

10 Go to Configuration

Window

Click this button to return to the main OSD screen.

No. Item Description

Chapter 3. OSD Operation

167

Pull Content

Pull Content allows you to pull a Receiver’s computer connection to the local

Receiver’s console, allowing both to access to the computer. Click the Pull

Content tab and the following screen appears:

The Pull Content Page components are described in the table, below:

No. Item Description

1 Receiver Name Lists the Receiver names currently connected to the

Channel listed under Channel Status.

2 Channel Status Lists the name, description and access type of each

available Channel connection.

3 Connect Click Pull Content and the Receiver will pull the

Channel connection to the local console using the

access mode displayed under Channel Status.

5 Next Arrow Use these two buttons to navigate to the next page

or to the end of the list if there are more choices

available than can be seen on the page.

6 Previous Arrow Use these two buttons to navigate to the previous

page or to the beginning of the list if there are more

choices available than can be seen on the page.

9 Logout Click this button to log out of the Connection Page.

10 Go to Configuration

Window

Click this button to return to the main OSD screen.

KVM over IP Matrix System User Manual

168

This Page Intentionally Left Blank

169

Chapter 4

Software Installation

Overview

The CCKM KE Matrix Manager Software is a browser based GUI that provides

management of KE Series devices over a network. You can download the KE

Matrix Manager Software for free and manage up to 8 KE devices, or purchase

a licensefor the KE Matrix Manager Software. To purchase a license, contact

your local authorized ATEN dealer. To download the free KE Matrix Manager

Software, use the instructions below.

Download

To download the KE Matrix Manager software, do the following:

1. Visit our website and click Support & Downloads

→

ESERVICE.

2. Under Account, click Create New or Log In.

KVM over IP Matrix System User Manual

170

3. After logging in, click Product Registration to register the KE device(s)

you have purchased.

4. After you have registered the KE device(s), click Trial Software

Download.

Note: The downloaded version of the KE Matrix Manager software

includes full functions and can configure up to 8 KE Series devices.

If you would like to configure more KE Series devices, please

contact your ATEN reseller to purchase a license and upgrade the

license of your software, see page 174.

5. Click the software version you would like to download, then click Save.

6. Unzip the cckm_win_Vx.x.xxx.zip or cckm_linux_Vx.x.xxx.zip file and

double click the *.exe file to start the installation.

7. Follow the instructions on the next page to install the software.

Chapter 4. Software Installation

171

KE Matrix Manager Software Install

The following are instructions to install the full version of the KE Matrix

Manager software on a primary or secondary computer. For software

requirements, see Minimum Hardware/Software Requirements, page 8.

1. Insert the USB license key into a USB port on your computer.

Note: If you have more than 8 KE Series devices in your setup, a USB

license key is required to install the KE Matrix Manager.

2. Double click the KEMatr ixManagerSetup file to start the setup. When the

Introduction screen appears, click Next.

3. The License Agreement appears:

KVM over IP Matrix System User Manual

172

If you agree with the License Agreement, select I accept the terms of

the license agreement, and click Next.

4. The Choose Install Folde r screen appears:

Select where you would like to install the program, and click Next.

5. The Choose Shortcut Folder screen appears:

Select where to create shortcuts for the program by selecting the options

provided, and click Next.

Chapter 4. Software Installation

173

6. The Pre-Installation Summary screen appears:

Confirm the settings you’ve selected. If you want to make a change

click Previous to go back, or click Install to begin the software

installation.

7. When the process is done, the Install Complete screen appears:

Click Done.

KVM over IP Matrix System User Manual

174

Upgrading License

After you purchase a license to upgrade the KE Matrix Manager software, go

to the Settings - General tab (see page 249), and at the top page, select Click

to Upgrade:

Chapter 4. Software Installation

175

Linux Installation

The following are instructions to install the full version of the KE Matrix

Manager software on a Linux server. For software requirements, see Minimum

Hardware/Software Requirements, page 8.

1. Download the KE Matrix Manager installation file to the Linux server.

2. Change the properties of the installation file so that its executable by

running the command: chmod a+x filename

Example: chmod a+x kemanager_setup.bin

3. Start the installation with the command:

sudo sh ./kemanager_setup.bin

4. When the Introduction screen appears, click Next.:

5. The License Agreement appears:

KVM over IP Matrix System User Manual

176

If you agree with the License Agreement, select I accept the terms of

the license agreement, and click Next.

6. When the Ch oose In stall Fol der screen appears, select the location and

continue through the installation by clicking Next.

7. After the software installs successfully, a directory provides useful links:

8. The "Uninstall_Matrix_Manager" can be used to uninstall the software.

By default the root folder can be accessed as shown below:

sudo –i cd /root cd KeManager sudo ./Uninstall_Matrix_Manager

9. To check and stop the KE Matrix Manager service, use the following

commands:

cd KeManager sudo ./Query_Service

Stop service:

sudo ./Stop_Service

Chapter 4. Software Installation

177

10. To check and start the KE Matrix Manager service, use the following

commands:

cd KeManager sudo ./Query_Service

Stop service:

sudo ./Start_service

KVM over IP Matrix System User Manual

178

This Page Intentionally Left Blank

179

Chapter 5

Browser / Telnet Operation

Overview

The CCKM KE Matrix Manager Software can be accessed through most

standard web browsers and via Telnet. Once users log in and are authenticated,

the browser GUI comes up. The first section explains the login procedure and

web browser components. The last section provides details for connecting via

Telnet.

Logging In

To log into the KE Matrix Manager, do the following:

1. Open the browser and specify the IP address of the computer installed with

the KE Matrix Manager software, in the browser’s URL location bar.

Note: If the administrator has configured the HTTP or HTTPS port setting

as something other than the default, you must include http:// or

https:// before the IP address, and specify the port number along

with the IP address. For example:

https://192.168.1.20:8443

Where 8443 is the https port number, or 8080 is the http port

number, and a colon is inserted between it and the IP address.

2. If a Security Alert box appears, accept the certificate – it can be trusted

(See Trusted Cert ificates, page 379 for details). The Login page appears:

3. Enter the Username and Password, and click Login.

KVM over IP Matrix System User Manual

180

Note: Only administrator accounts can be used to login. By default, the

username and password are administrator and password,

respectively.

4. For security purposes, the system will prompt you to change the password

immediately.

Click OK for the password change dialog box.

5. Enter the new password and confirm it by entering the password again.

6. Click OK to complete the change and the KE matrix manager main page

appears. Refer to the next page for more details.

Chapter 5. Browser / Telnet Operation

181

The KE Matrix Manager Main Page

After you have successfully logged in, the web browser’s main page appears:

Web Components

The web components are described in the table below:

No. Item Description

1 Install Wizard This icon helps you locate Transmitters/Receivers

on the LAN to add them to the KE Matrix Manager

(see Installation Wizard, page 183). If a device can’t

be found, check the Network settings in the device’s

OSD menu (see page 142 & 150).

2 System Settings Click this icon to enter the System Setting section

where you can configure the KE Matrix Manager

software. The Settings are discussed on page 249.

3 Logout Click this button to log out of your KE Matrix

Manager web session.

4 Interactive Display Panel This is your main work area. Scroll the page up or

down to view the various selections. Some items can

be clicked to open a settings page, while others

provide status information.

5 Instant Link Clicking this icon opens the lower bar which allows

you to instantly connect KE devices. Instant Link is

discussed on page 186.

KVM over IP Matrix System User Manual

182

Interactive Display Panel

The functions associated with each of the icons on the main Interactive Display

Panel are explained in the table below:

Icon Function

System Status: System Status provides an overview of the

transmitter, receiver, user, profile, and log status. Each heading can

be clicked to open the respective settings page. System Status is

discussed on page 199.

Connections: Connections provides a visual display of current

transmitter and receiver connections. Connections is discussed on

page 273.

Scheduled Profile: Scheduled Profile provides an overview of

connection profiles that are scheduled to run. Scheduled Profile is

discussed on page 277.

Sessions: Sessions provides a list of current user sessions.

Sessions is discussed on page 279.

Refresh: The Refresh button provides a way to update the

information currently being displayed on the page.

To Top: This button appears at the bottom right corner of the

Interactive Display Panel and allows you to jump back to the top of

the page.

Chapter 5. Browser / Telnet Operation

183

Installation Wizard

Use the Install Wizard to add Transmitters and Receivers to the CCKM. The

wizard locates devices on the network and walks you through adding them. To

add devices, do the following:

1. Connect all Transmitters and Receivers to the LAN.

2. On the CCKM main page, click the Install Wizard icon (page 181).

3. When the installation wizard appears, select options to locate devices:

4. Check the boxes under Transmitter / Receiver to select the devices you

want to add, then click Next.

(Continues on nex t pa ge.)

Item Description

Search Local Check this box and click the Refresh button to search the

local area network for Transmitters/Receivers.

Search Subnet Check this box, enter a subnet IP and then click the

Refresh button to search the subnet for Transmitters/

Receivers.

Transmitter / Receiver Displays the number of Transmitters and Receivers that

have been discovered on the network. Use the check

boxes next to the Transmitters/Receivers to select the

devices you want to add.

The Refresh button provides a way to update the

information currently being displayed in the install wizard

window.

KVM over IP Matrix System User Manual

184

5. Under Assign IP Address select an option to configure the network

settings, then click Next.

6. Use the Naming Rule radio button to create a naming convention (Title +

Number); or U se Original Name to use the name currently configured on

the Transmitter/Receiver, then click Next.

Item Description

IP Range Select the IP Range radio button to enter a series of

static IP addresses to assign to the Transmitters/

Receivers that you are adding.

DHCP Select the DHCP radio button for dynamic IP address

assignment.

Use Original IP Setting Select this radio button to use the IP address currently

configured on the Transmitter/Receiver.

Chapter 5. Browser / Telnet Operation

185

7. Confirm each Transmitter’s Name, IP Address, Audio setting and check

the boxes to set Permissions*, then click Next and repeat the process for

Receivers.

Note: See Transmitter Permissions, page 220, and Receiver Permissions ,

page 233 for information about setting permissions.

8. Click Done.

KVM over IP Matrix System User Manual

186

Instant Link

At the bottom of the KE Matrix Manager Main Page is the Instant Link bar. In

this section you can quickly connect Receivers to Transmitters.

The top panel provides the Receiver List, and the bottom panel provides the

Transmitter List. To create a connection, click a Receiver in the top panel and

use the drop-down menu to select a Transmitter (as shown in the image below);

or drag-and-drop Transmitters from the bottom panel to Receivers in the top

panel. Configure as many Receiver to Transmitter connections as needed, and

then click Apply.

Item Description

Instant Link The Instant Link bar provides access to quickly connect

Receivers to Transmitters. Click the bar to open the

panel, click again to minimize the panel. The top panel

provides a list of all the Receivers discovered on the

LAN.Click a Receiver and use the drop-down menu to

select a Transmitter.

Transmitter List Click the Transmitter List bar to open the panel. The

panel provides a list of all the Transmitters discovered on

the LAN. Drag-and-drop Transmitters in the bottom panel

to Receivers in the top panel to establish connections.

The panel size of the Transmitter List is adjustable by

clicking-and-dragging its border.

Location Use the drop-down menu to select a location to filter the

Receivers or Transmitters displayed on the page.

Chapter 5. Browser / Telnet Operation

187

Ratio Use the drop-down list to adjust the icon size of the

Receivers / Transmitters.

Click and type keywords to filter/search for Receivers /

Transmitters.

Click this icon to show individual Receivers.

Click this icon to show only video wall Receivers.

Click this icon to show only Receiver Group Receivers.

Access Mode Click a device and use the drop-down box to set the

access mode: Occupy, Vie w Onl y , or Exclusive.

Auto Apply Checking this box allows you to drag and drop devices

and apply the connection immediately without having to

click the Apply button.

Apply Click Apply to connect the devices.

Cancel Click Cancel to exit without connecting.

Item Description

KVM over IP Matrix System User Manual

188

RS-232 / Telnet

The KE Series can be operated and configured via a remote terminal session

using Telnet. This is a useful means for configuring devices when they are first

setup and connected to the network.

Telnet

To log into the KE Series device by means of a Telnet session, do the

following:

1. On your computer, open a terminal (command line) session.

2. At the prompt, key in the KE device’s IP address with port 23 in the

following way:

telnet [IP address] [port]

3. Please press “Enter” to start “Te x tMenu” The login screen appears. At

the login prompt, provide the Password.

Note: The default password for Telnet sessions is password.

Chapter 5. Browser / Telnet Operation

189

RS-232

To log into the KE Series device by means of a RS-232 session, do the

following:

1. The controller’s serial port should be configured the same as the

Receiver’s default configuration, as shown below:

The Receiver’s Function Switch should be set to RS-232 Config (see page 43).

Before executing RS-232 commands across a network you must install the KE

Matrix Manager software on a computer and ensure that it is online. For the

Slim Version of KE Series (KE8900ST/8900SR/9900ST). Please make sure

the RS-232 Serial Port is not connected before executing commands.

2. Please press “Enter” to start “TextM e nu” The login screen appears. At

the login prompt, provide the Password.

Note: The default password for Telnet sessions is password.

Baud Rate 9600

Data Bits 8

Parity None

Stop Bits 1

Flow Control None

KVM over IP Matrix System User Manual

190

Configuration Menu

Once a Telnet connection to the KE device is established, the device’s text-

based Configuration Menu comes up, allowing you to select options by

entering a number on the following screens:

Main Menu

+++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++

KE6900 Receiver

-- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- --

Receiver Configuration

+++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++

1. Network

2. Properties

3. System

Q. Logout

Select one:

Chapter 5. Browser / Telnet Operation

191

1. Network

+++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++

KE6900 Receiver

-- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- --

Network Settings

+++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++

1. IP Installer [Enabled]

2. DHCP [Disabled]

3. IP Address [172.17.17.34]

4. Subnet Mask [255.255.255.0]

5. Default Gateway [172.17.17.254]

Q. Exit

Select one:

2. Properties

+++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++

KE6900 Receiver

-- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- --

Device Properties

+++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++

1. Mode [Matrix]

2. Transmitter Video IP Address [172.17.17.35]

3. Transmitter Audio IP Address [172.17.17.35]

4. Transmitter USB IP Address [172.17.17.35]

5. Transmitter RS232 IP Address [172.17.17.35]

6. UART Configuration

7. Video [Enabled]

8. Audio [Enabled]

9. USB [Enabled]

10. RS232 [Enabled]

11. KE Matrix Manager IP [172.17.17.33]

12. KE Matrix Manager Port [9110]

13. Beeper [Enabled]

14. USB Mode [VM]

15. USB Secure Transmit [Disabled]

Q. Exit

Select one:

KVM over IP Matrix System User Manual

192

3. System

+++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++

KE6900 Receiver

-- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- --

System Setting

+++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++

1. Device Name [KE6900R]

2. Device Description [Receiver1]

Device IP Address: 172.17.17.34

Device MAC Address: 00:10:74:A8:01:23

Device FW Version: V1.1.109

Device Serial Number:

3. Password [Enabled]

4. Change Password

5. System Reboot/Reset to Factory Default

Q. Exit

Select one:

Note: The Reset to Factory Default function resets everything but the login

information to the factory default settings. To reset the login

information, refer to Reset All Informa tion on page 381.

Chapter 6. System Status

193

Chapter 6

System Status

Overview

The System Status panel is found at the top of the KE Matrix Manager Main

Page. This section provides status information about Transmitters, Receivers,

Users, Profiles and Logs. Click on a selection to open a Settings page, which

are discussed in the sections that follow.

KVM over IP Matrix System User Manual

194

System Status

The System Status panel has five sections that provide information and a link

to each settings page. Each settings page can be accessed by Clicking within

the section: Transmitter, Receiver, Users, Profile or Log. Each section is

explained in the table below and the Settings on the pages that follow.

Item Description

Transmitter This section provides an overview of the Transmitters

added to the KE Matrix Manager:



Active: Shows the number of Transmitters that are

currently online and connected to a Receiver.



Standby: Shows the number of Transmitters that are

online but not connected to a Receiver.



Offline: Shows the number of Transmitters added to

the KE Matrix Manager that are not online.



Total: Displays the total number of Transmitters added

to the KE Matrix Manager.

Receiver This section provides an overview of the Receivers

added to the KE Matrix Manager:



Active: Shows the number of Receivers that are

currently online and connected to a Transmitter.



Standby: Shows the number of Receivers that are

online but not connected to a Transmitter.



Offline: Shows the number of Receivers added to the

KE Matrix Manager that are not online.



Total: Displays the total number of Receivers added to

the KE Matrix Manager.

Chapter 6. System Status

195

Users This section provides an overview of users with KE

Matrix Manager sessions:



Online: Shows the number of users that are logged

into OSD or KE Matrix Manager web sessions.



Idle: Shows the number of users not logged into OSD

or KE Matrix Manager web sessions.

Profile This section provides an overview of Profile and Profile

Schedules:



Total: Shows the total number of Profiles available.



Next scheduled to run: Shows the name of the next

Profile scheduled to run.



Days later: Shows the number of days until the next

Profile is scheduled to run.

Log This section provides an overview of system logs:



Warning: Shows the number of warnings logs

generated since the event log was cleared.



Error: Shows the number of error logs generated since

the event log was cleared.



Information: Shows the number of information logs

generated since the log was cleared.

Redundancy Status This section provides information about the Redundancy

mode. The first set of brackets shows which server is

hosting the KE Matrix Manager database: [Primary] or

[Secondary]. If Redundancy is disabled the first bracket

will read: [Standalone]. The second set of brackets show

the status:



[Working]: The server is actively hosting the KE Matrix

Manager database.



[Standby]: This message appears when database

operations are idle.

Item Description

KVM over IP Matrix System User Manual

196

Transmitter

Click Transmitter in the System Status panel to open the settings. On this page

you can add, delete and configure Transmitters (physical transmitters), Virtual

Transmitters (multi-source) and Transmitter Groups (multi-video source). The

KE Matrix Manager automatically adds Transmitters connected to the local

area network with a valid IP address.

The meanings of the icons and headings on the page are straightforward and let

you view and configure Transmitters.



Active refers to a Transmitter connection that is online and in use.



Standby refers to a Transmitter connection that is online.



Offline refers to a Transmitter connection that is offline.



Use this drop-down menu to filter Transmitters by

location. Use Locations to limit the Transmitters seen on the page.



Click to add a new Location.



Select a Transmitter and click the Move to icon to add

devices to a Location.



Select a Location from the drop-down menu and click this

icon to delete it.

Chapter 6. System Status

197



Select a Location and click this icon to change the name.



/ Click to turn Beeper & LED Flashing on/off.



Click to delete selected Transmitters.



Click an option to have selected Transmitters:



Copy & Paste: Copy settings from one Transmitter and paste

them to another (see Copy & Paste, page 210).



Reboot: Shut down and restart.



Reset to Factory: Reset all setting to the factory default.

Note: The Reset to Factory function resets everything but the login

information to the factory default settings. To reset the login

information, refer to Reset All Information on page 381.



Click to Create Virtual TX or Create TX Group (page 211 & 213).



Click to set Transmitter permissions (page 214).



Click to search for Transmitters.



Click to filter Transmitters shown on the page.



Click to switch between Grid View and List View.

KVM over IP Matrix System User Manual

198

Transmitter Configuration

When the KE Matrix Manager discovers Transmitters on the network they

appear on the Transmitter settings page. Double-click a Transmitter to

configure its settings.

Note: For transmitter models with Internet Port (AiT models), the settings

page above is under the “Main” tab. An extra “Internet Port” tab is

available. For more information, refer to Internet Port (AiT model s

only) on page 203.

Chapter 6. System Status

199

Item Description

Basic Device Name: Enter a name for the Transmitter.

Description: Enter a description for the Transmitter.

Location: Use the drop-down menu to select a Location for the

device. Locations filter the Transmitters seen on the settings page.

Mode: Use the radio button to select how the Transmitter will be

installed and managed:



Select Extender mode for simple one-to-one (Transmitter to

Receiver) setups that are managed at the Receiver’s OSD

menu.



Select Matrix mode to manage devices and connections over

the LAN from the KE Matrix Manager software. This mode is for

advanced administration of Transmitter and Receiver

connections configured within the KE Matrix Manager Web GUI.

Enable Media: Select which source type the Transmitter can

stream: Video, Audio, USB and RS232.

Audio Input: Use this option to select the Transmitter’s audio

source signal: HDMI, Analog, or Auto. This setting should reflect

the audio setting configured on the computer.*

KVM over IP Matrix System User Manual

200

Basic EDID Mode: EDID contains a display's basic information and is

used by the source device to utilize the best resolution across

different monitors. When Manual or Remix is selected, the

Receiver’s OSD will have a button allowing the local EDID setting

to be configured for the connection (see EDID Mode, page 163).

Select how you want the source device to acquire the display's

EDID:



ATEN Default: EDID is set to the default ATEN configuration.

This setting must be used when connecting KE6900 devices to

KE8950 devices.



Auto: Checks the EDID of all connected displays and the ATEN

default EDID to use the best common resolution for all displays.



Manual: Manually set the EDID configuration from the

Receiver’s OSD (see EDID Mode, page 163).



Remix: Manually checks the EDID of all connected displays and

the ATEN default EDID to use the best common resolution for all

displays (see EDID Mode, page 163).

Multicast Video: Select Enable to allow a broadcast of the

Transmitter’s video signal to be sent to multiple Receivers.

Multicast Audio: Select Enable to allow a broadcast of the

Transmitter’s audio signal to be sent to multiple Receivers.



Occupy Timeout: Set a time threshold for Receivers whose

Access Mode has been set to Occupy If there is no activity from

the Receiver occupying the port for the amount of time set here,

the Receiver is timed out and the port is released. The first

Receiver to send keyboard or mouse input after the port has

been released gets to occupy the port. Input a value from 1 to

240 seconds.

Port OS: Use the drop-down menu to select the operating system

on the computer connected to the Transmitter.

OS Language: Use the drop-down menu to select the operating

system language on the computer connected to the Transmitter.

CCKM IP: Set the IP address and Port number of the computer

running the KE Matrix Manager software. The default port number

is 9110.

IP Installer: The IP Installer is an external Windows-based utility

for assigning an IP address to the device. Click a radio button to

select Enable, Disable or View Only for the IP Installer utility.

See IP Installer, page 378 for instructions.

Item Description

Chapter 6. System Status

201

Video Settings These refer to the Transmitter’s video settings:

Video Type: Select the DVI video connector being used by the

display: Digital (DVI-D) or Digital (DVI-I). This option is only

available for KE6900 units.

Color Depth: Select the number of bits to use for the color depth:

24, 16, or 8. This is the number of bits used to describe the color of

a single pixel. A bit depth determines the number of colors that can

be displayed at one time.

Bandwidth Limit: Select the maximum bandwidth that the

Transmitter can use to transmit video over the network. A lower

bandwidth transmits lower quality video; a higher bandwidth sends

higher quality video but this can affect network speed.

Video Quality: Select the video quality to use, with the highest to

lowest quality being Lossless > Light Compression > Medium

Compression > Heavy Compression > Maximum Compression.

Background Refresh: Sets how often the Transmitter refreshes

the background image on the connected display. Options are to

refresh every 256,128, 64, 32,16, or 0 frames.

IP Settings For dynamic IP address assignment, select the DHCP radio button.

To specify a fixed IP Address, Subnet Mask, and Default Gateway

select the Manual radio button and fill in the fields with values

appropriate for your network.

For information to configure the network settings locally on the

device, see Network Configuration, page 133.

Password

Protection

Select Enable to require a password to access the Transmitter’s

OSD configuration screens (see page 139).

Enter a Password, and confirm the password in the Confirm box.

RS232 Settings Configure the serial device settings for the Transmitter. The default

settings are:

Baud Rate: 9600

Parity: None

Data Bits: 8 bits

Stop bits: 1 bit

Flow Control: None

Item Description

KVM over IP Matrix System User Manual

202

Replace Device Click Replace Device in the top left corner to replace an old

Transmitter with a new one.* All settings are copied from the old

Transmitter to the new Transmitter. Before using this feature,

connect the new Transmitter to the network. After clicking Replace

Device, use the drop-down menu to select the new Transmitter

where the settings will be applied.

Note:

1. This option only appears when a Transmitter is offline.

2. This feature can be used for both Receivers and

Transmitters. Replacement should be carried out on a

similar model.

Save Click Save to save changes to the properties.

Cancel Click Cancel to exit without saving.

Item Description

Chapter 6. System Status

203

Internet Port (AiT models only)

For transmitter models (AiT models) with Internet Port, an “Internet Port tab”

is available for configuration.

KVM over IP Matrix System User Manual

204

Basic

IP Installer

The IP Installer is an external Windows-based utility for assigning IP addresses

to the transmitter. Click one of the radio buttons to select Enabled, Disabled,

or View Only for the IP Installer utility. See p. 378 for IP Installer details.

Note: 1. If you select View Only , you will be able to see the transmitter in the

IP Installer’s Device List, but you will not be able to change the IP

address.

2. For security, we strongly recommend that you set this to View Only

or Disabled after using it.

Ports

Specify the ports that the transmitter uses for various network services.



Program: This is the port number for connecting to the transmitter from

the Windows Client and Java Viewers, and from the Windows and Java

Client AP programs. The default is 9000.



HTTP: The port number for a browser login. The default is 80.



HTTPS: The port number for a secure browser login. The default is 443.

Note: 1. Valid entries for all of the Service Ports are from 1–65535.

2. The service ports cannot have the same value. You must set a

different value for each one.

3. If there is no firewall (on an intranet, for example), it does not matter

what these numbers are set to, since they have no effect.

If a firewall is being used, the Administrator can specify the port numbers that

the firewall will allow (and set the firewall accordingly). If a port other than the

default is set, users must specify the port number as part of the IP address when

they log in. If not, an invalid port number (or no port number) is specified, the

transmitter will not be found.

Chapter 6. System Status

205

CCVSR

Important operations occur on the transmitter can be recorded using the

CCVSR program.

Check Enable to enable the CCVSR function and specify the MAC address

and the Service Port of the computer the CCVSR runs on.

Note: The valid port range is 1–65535. The port number must different than

the one used for the Program port (see Ports, page 204).

Mode

Use this section to set the working mode parameters.



Enable ICMP: Check to enable ICMP service.



Disable Browser Service: Check to disable a particular access. Available

options are: browser, http or https.



Enable Client AP Device List: Check to enable this function. When

enabled, the unit will be discoverable in the Server List when using the

WinClient or Java Client AP (see Starting Up on page 285). Disabling this

function will render the unit undiscoverable in the Server List but can still

be connected to.

IPv4 Settings

The transmitter can either have its IP address assigned dynamically at boot-up

(DHCP), or it can be given a fixed IP address.



For dynamic IP address assignment, select the DHCP radio button. (This

is the default setting.)



To specify a fixed IP address, select the Manual radio button and fill in the

IP address.

Note: 1. If you choose DHCP, when the transmitter starts up it waits to get its

IP address from the DHCP server. If it has not obtained the address

after one minute, it automatically reverts to its factory default IP

address, 192.168.0.61.

2. If the transmitter is on a network that uses DHCP to assign network

addresses, and you need to ascertain its IP address, you can use the IP

installer. See IP Installer, page 378 for information.

KVM over IP Matrix System User Manual

206

The transmitter can either have its DNS server address assigned automatically,

or a fixed address can be specified.



For automatic DNS Server address assignment, select the Obtain DNS

server address automatically radio button.



To specify a fixed address, select the Set DNS server address manually

radio button and fill in the required information.

Note: Specifying at the alternate DNS Server address is optional.

IPv6 Settings

The transmitter can either have its IPv6 address assigned dynamically at boot-

up (DHCP), or it can be given a fixed IPv6 address.



For dynamic IP address assignment, select the DHCP radio button. (This

is the default setting.)



To specify a fixed IP address, select the Manual radio button and fill in the

IP address.

The transmitter can either have its DNS server address assigned automatically,

or a fixed address can be specified.



For automatic DNS Server address assignment, select the Obtain DNS

server address automatically radio button.



To specify a fixed address, select the Set DNS server address manually

radio button and fill in the required information.

Note: Specifying at the alternate DNS Server address is optional.

Private Certificate

When logging in over a secure (SSL) connection, a signed certificate is used to

verify that the user is logging in to the intended site. For enhanced security, the

Private Certificate section allows you to use your own private encryption key

and signed certificate, rather than the default ATEN certificate.

There are two methods for establishing your private certificate: generating a

self-signed certificate and importing a third-party certificate authority (CA)

signed certificate.

Chapter 6. System Status

207

Generati ng a Self -S i gned Cert ificate

If you wish to create your own self-signed certificate, a free utility –

openssl.exe – is available for download over the web. See Self-Signed Pr i vate

Certificates, page 380 for details about using OpenSSL to generate your own

private key and SSL certificate.

Obtaining a CA Sign e d SSL Server Certificate

For the greatest security, we recommend using a third party certificate

authority (CA) signed certificate. To obtain a third party signed certificate, go

to a CA (Certificate Authority) website to apply for an SSL certificate. After

the CA sends you the certificate, save it to a convenient location on your

computer.

Importing the Priva te Certificate

To import the private certificate, do the following:

1. Click Browse to the right of Private Key, navigate to where your private

encryption key file is located and select it.

2. Click Browse to the right of Certificate, navigate to where your certificate

file is located and select it.

3. Click Upload to complete the procedure.

Note: Both the private encryption key and the signed certificate must be

imported at the same time.

You can click Restore Default to restore any changes made previously.

Certificate Signing Request

The Certificate Signing Request (CSR) section provides an automated way of

obtaining and installing a CA signed SSL server certificate.

To perform this operation, do the following:

1. Click Create CSR. The following dialog box appears:

KVM over IP Matrix System User Manual

208

2. Fill in the form – with entries that are valid for your site – according to the

example information in the following table:

3. After filling in the form (all fields are required), click Create.

A self-signed certificate based on the information you just provided is now

stored on the transmitter.

4. Click Get CSR, and save the certificate file (csr.cer) to a convenient

location on your computer

This is the file that you give to the third party CA to apply for their signed

SSL certificate.

5. After the CA sends you the certificate, save it to a convenient location on

your computer. Click Browse to locate the file; then click Upload to store

it on the transmitter.

Information Example

Country (2 letter code) TW

State or Province Taiwan

Locality Taipei

Organization Your Company, Ltd.

Unit Techdoc Department

Common Name mycompany.com

This must be the exact domain name of the site that you

want the certificate to be valid for. If the site’s domain name is

www.mycompany.com, and you only specify

mycompany.com, the certificate will not be valid.

Email Address administrator@yourcompany.com

Chapter 6. System Status

209

Note: When you upload the file, the transmitter checks the file to make

sure the specified information still matches. If it does, the file is

accepted; if not, it is rejected.

If you want to remove the certificate (to replace it with a new one because of a

domain name change, for example), simply click Remove CSR.

KVM over IP Matrix System User Manual

210

Copy & Paste

Copy & Paste allows you to copy settings from one Transmitter and paste them

to another. To copy Transmitter settings to another device, do the following:

1. Select a Physical Transmitter.

2. On the Transmitter menu bar, click Copy & Paste (page 197).

3. Check the boxes of the settings you want to copy, and click Next.

4. Select the Transmitter(s) where you want to apply the settings, and click

Done.

Chapter 6. System Status

211

Virtual Transmitter

Creating a Virtual Transmitter allows you to create one connection that sources

media (KVM, audio, USB, serial) from different Transmitters. Virtual

Transmitters appear on the Transmitter settings page with Virtual TX in the

top right corner. Simply select an online Transmitter for each media source.

Dual Display Transmitters can be added as two separate Virtual Transmitters.

To create a Virtual Transmitter, in Transmitter settings click and then

select Create Virtual TX.

Item Description

Name Enter a name for the Virtual Transmitter.

Description Enter a description for the Virtual Transmitter.

Location Use the drop-down menu to select a location for the Virtual Transmitter

or leave it as All Devices. See Location, page 196, for details.

Video +

Keyboard +

Mouse

Use the drop-down menu to select a KVM (keyboard, video, mouse)

source for the Virtual Transmitter.

Audio Use the drop-down menu to select an audio source for the Virtual

Transmitter.

USB

Peripheral

Use the drop-down menu to select a USBPeripheral source for the

Virtual Transmitter.

Serial Use the drop-down menu to select a serial source for the Virtual

Transmitter.

Apply Click Apply to save the changes.

Cancel Click Cancel to exit without saving.

KVM over IP Matrix System User Manual

212

Intelligent Dual Video Output Management

For the A models (KE6900A, KE6940A), the Intelligent Dual Video Output

Management feature allows the separation of a Dual Display Transmitter’s

(KE6940AT) video outputs (DVI:1 and DVI:2) as two separate Virtual

Transmitters. These separated outputs can be accessed from different

Receivers (KE6900AR or KE6940AR). Receivers can switch between and

connect to both Virtual Transmitters independently with the Access Type

determining which Receiver has control (see page 214).

To use this setup, install the KE devices as shown below and create two Virtual

Transmitters, selecting DVI:1 and DVI:2 as the KVM source for each Virtual

Transmitter.

For non-A model receivers (e.g. KE6910R, KE6912R), you can select between

DVI:1 or DVI:2, but you will always be getting video output from DVI:1.

When connecting to either of the two Virtual Transmitters in the setup shown

above, the mouse cursor may reside on the main or extended dual display

screen, out of view. Therefore even if you have control of the mouse it may not

be visible. To bring the mouse cursor into view on either of the dual display

screens, first enable Boundless Switching (see Boundless Switching, page 226)

and then use the hotkey F8+F9.

Chapter 6. System Status

213

Transmitter Group

Creating a Transmitter Group allows you to create a connection that sources

the video from multiple Transmitters to view at across multiple Receiver

displays. To use this feature, connect a Transmitter Group to a Receiver

Group (page 223). Transmitter Groups appear at the bottom of the Transmitter

settings page.

To create a Transmitter Group, in Transmitter settings click and then

select Create Group TX.

Fill in the appropriate information and then double-click or drag-and-drop

Transmitters to add or remove them in the top panel. The Transmitters in the

top panel will be used as the video source for the Receiver Group at the

Receiver.

Item Description

Name Enter a name for the Transmitter Group.

Description Enter a description for the Transmitter Group.

Location Use the drop-down menu to select a location for the

Transmitter Group or leave as All Devices. See Location,

page 196, for details.

From the same PC video

output

Enable to indicate that all of the video outputs in this

Transmitter Group are from the same multi-screen PC.

Save Click Save to save the changes.

Cancel Click Cancel to exit without saving.

KVM over IP Matrix System User Manual

214

Note: 1. You can create up to 4 transmitter groups.

2. Any transmitter can only be added to 1 transmitter group with the

From the same PC video output option selected at a time.

Transmitter Permissions

Transm itter Permissions sets the users and groups that can access a

Transmitter, Virtual Transmitter, and Transmitter Group.

Select a device under Transmitter List, and then next to each user or group

click All, View, Occupy, or Exclusive to grant them permission to connect to

the Transmitter with this access type. A green block denotes that the user has

access.

To set Transmitter Permissions, in Transmitter settings, click .

Item Description

Transmitter List Lists Transmitters, Virtual Transmitters and Transmitter

Groups that can be selected to set permissions.

Drop-Down Menu Use the drop-down menu to select User or Group. After

making a selection, the list of users or groups appears.

Set permissions by selecting the access type (All,

View,Share, Occupy, Exclusive) next to each user or

group.

Chapter 6. System Status

215

Access Type Select the access you want to grant to a user or group by

clicking the boxes under the headings. This defines how

the Transmitter can be accessed by a user or group. The

access type will appear available for the user in the

Receiver's OSD Connections menu. To disable an

access type, uncheck a box in the heading.

All: Select to grant all access permissions, View, Share,

Occupy and Exclusive, to the users or user groups.

View: User can only view the remote screen, and cannot

perform operations on it.

Share: All users accessing the Transmitter can

simultaneously share control of the Transmitter. Input

from the users is placed in a queue and executed

chronologically.

Occupy: The first user to access the Transmitter has

control. However, additional users may view the

Transmitter’s video. If the user who controls the

Transmitter is inactive for longer than the time set in the

Transmitter’s Timeout box, control is transferred to the

first user to move the mouse or strike the keyboard.

Access Type Exclusive: The first user to access the Transmitter has

exclusive control over the Transmitter. No other users

can view the Transmitter. The Timeout function does not

apply when Transmitters are accessed with this setting.

Apply Click Apply to save the changes.

Cancel Click Cancel to exit without saving.

Item Description

KVM over IP Matrix System User Manual

216

Receiver

Click Receiver in the System Status panel to open the settings. The Receiver

page allows you to add, delete and configure Receivers (physical receivers),

Receiver Groups, and Video Walls. The KE Matrix Manager automatically

adds Receivers connected to the local area network with a valid IP address.

The meanings of the icons and headings on the page are straightforward and let

you view and configure Receivers.



Active refers to a Receiver connection that is online and in use.



Standby refers to a Receiver connection that is online.



Offline refers to a Receiver connection that is offline.



Use this drop-down menu to filter Receivers by location.

Use Locations to limit the Receivers seen on the page.



Click to add a new Location.



Select a Receiver and click the Move to icon to add devices

to a Location.



Select a Location from the drop-down menu and click this

icon to delete it.

Chapter 6. System Status

217



Select a Location and click this icon to change the name.



/ Click to turn Beeper & LED Flashing on/off.



Click to delete selected Receivers.



Click an option to have selected Receivers:



Copy & Paste: Copy settings from one Receiver and paste them

to another (see Copy & Paste, page 222).



Reboot: Shut down and restart.



Reset to Factory: Reset all setting to the factory default.

Note: The Reset to Factory function resets everything but the login

information to the factory default settings. To reset the login

information, refer to Reset All Information on page 381.



Click to Create Receiver Group or Video Wall (page 223 & 224).



Click to set Receiver permissions (page 227).



Click to search for Receivers.



Click to filter Receivers shown on the page.



Click to switch between Grid View and List View.

KVM over IP Matrix System User Manual

218

Receiver Configuration

When the KE Matrix Manager discovers Receivers on the network they appear

on the Receiver settings page. Double-click a Transmitter to configure its

settings.

Chapter 6. System Status

219

Item Description

Basic Device Name: Enter a name for the Receiver.

Description: Enter a description for the Receiver.

Location: Use the drop-down menu to select a Location for the

device. Locations help organize how you view Receivers on the

settings page.

Mode: Use the radio button to select how the Receivers will be

installed and managed:



Select Extender mode for simple one-to-one (Transmitter to

Receiver) setups that are managed with the Receiver’s OSD

menu.



Select Matrix mode to manage devices and connections over

the LAN from the KE Matrix Manager software. This mode is for

advanced administration of Transmitter and Receiver

connections configured within the KE Matrix Manager Web GUI.

Enable Media: Select which source type the Receiver can stream:

Video, Audio, USB and RS232.

Audio Output: Use this option to independently stream HDMI,

Analog, or Both audio signals to digital or analog audio output

devices (speakers) connected to the Receiver.*

CCKM IP: Set the IP address and Port number of the computer

running the KE Matrix Manager software. The default port number

is 9110.

IP Installer: The IP Installer is an external Windows-based utility

for assigning an IP address to the device. Click a radio button to

select Enable, Disable or View Only for the IP Installer utility.

See IP Installer, page 378 for instructions.

RS232 Settings Configure the serial device settings for the Transmitter. The default

settings are:

Baud Rate: 9600

Parity: None

Data Bits: 8 bits

Stop bits: 1 bit

Flow Control: None

Extender

Properties

If you selected Extender mode (under Basic) set the Transmitter IP

address for the Receiver’s Video, Audio, USB, and RS232 source.

If you selected Matrix mode (under Basic) the Properties will be

grayed out. Use Transmitters, Virtual Transmitters, and Transmitter

Groups to configure the connections (see Transmitter, page 196).

KVM over IP Matrix System User Manual

220

IP Settings For dynamic IP address assignment, select the DHCP radio button.

To specify a fixed IP Address, Subnet Mask, and Default Gateway

select the Manual radio button and fill in the fields with values

appropriate for your network.

For information to configure the network settings locally on the

device, see Network Configuration, page 133.

Password

Protection

Select Enable to require a password to access the Receiver’s OSD

configuration screen (see page 139).

Enter a Password, and confirm the password in the Confirm box.

USB Mode Select the type of USB device you will connect to the USB ports:

Virtual Media: Select this option only if you are plugging a USB

disk drive (including USB HDD/optical disk) into the USB ports.

This will give you the highest data transfer speeds but will not allow

other USB devices to work when plugged into the USB ports. When

Receivers connected to the same transmitter mount or unmount

USB disk drives, the keyboard and mouse operations will

experience a brief delay. Transmitters can support up to 12 virtual

media connections at the same time (keyboard/mouse included).

vUSB (Generic USB device): Use this option to plug USB

peripherals into the USB ports. KE6900ST/KE8900ST/KE9900ST

do not support the Generic USB Device mode. In this mode,

KE6900/KE6940 Transmitters support up to 2 USB connections;

and allother KE Series Transmitters support up to 5 USB

connections (keyboard/mouse excluded).

Encryption: Check this box to encrypt USB disk drives plugged

into the USB ports.

Note: The vUSB option also allows a keyboard and mouse with

special functions to plug into the USB ports for console use. Use

this only if the special functions of the keyboard or mouse are

required but do not work when plugged into the console ports.

When the keyboard and mouse are plugged into the USB ports,

they will not work within the OSD menus. To work within the OSD

menus, the keyboard and mouse must be plugged into the console

ports.

Replace Device Click Replace Device in the top left corner to replace an old

Receiver with a new one.* All settings are copied from the old

Receiver to the new Receiver. Before using this feature, connect

the new Receiver to the network. After clicking Replace Device,

use the drop-down menu to select the new Receiver where the

settings will be applied.

Note:

1. This option only appears when a Transmitter is offline.

2. This feature can be used for both Receivers and

Transmitters. Replacement should be carried out on a

similar model.

Item Description

Chapter 6. System Status

221

Save Click Save to save changes to the properties.

Cancel Click Cancel to exit without saving.

Item Description

KVM over IP Matrix System User Manual

222

Copy & Paste

Copy & Paste allows you to copy settings from one Receiver and paste them

to another. To copy Receiver settings to another device, do the following:

1. Select a Physical Receiver.

2. On the Receiver menu bar, click Copy & Paste (page 217).

3. Check the boxes of the settings you want to copy, and click Next.

4. Select the Receiver(s) where you want to apply the settings, and click

Done.

Chapter 6. System Status

223

Receiver Group

Creating a Receiver Group allows you to connect the video from multiple

transmitters to multiple Receiver displays. To use this feature, connect a

Transmitter Group (page 213) to a Receiver Group (see Instant Link,

page 192). Receiver Groups appear at the bottom of the Receiver settings page.

To create a Receiver Group, in Receiver settings, click and then select

Create RX Group.

Fill in the appropriate information and then double-click or drag-and-drop

Receivers to add or remove them in the top panel. The Receivers in the top

panel will be used to view the video from the Transmitter Group. To connect a

Transmitter Group to a Receiver Group, see Ins t ant Li nk

, page 192

Note: You can create up to 4 receiver groups.

Item Description

Name Enter a name for the Receiver Group.

Description Enter a description for the Receiver Group.

Location Use the drop-down menu to select a location for the Receiver

Group or leave it as All Devices. See Location, page 196, for

details.

Boundless

Switching

Use the radio button to enable or disable Boundless Switching. See

Boundless Switching, page 226 for details.

Group Login When enabled, users logging into or out of 1 receiver automatically

logs into or out of all other receivers within the Receiver Group,

using the same set of credentials.

Save Click Save to save the changes.

Cancel Click Cancel to exit without saving.

KVM over IP Matrix System User Manual

224

Video Wall

Creating a Video Wall allows you to create connections that combine Receiver

displays to form a large video wall. Use the options to group multiple Receivers

in the video wall. A video wall can contain multiple forms of single displays

and grouped displays in various layouts. Video Walls appear listed below

Receivers, on the Receivers settings page.

To create a Video Wall, in Receiver settings, click and then select Create

Video Wall.

Select the number of displays and then group multiple displays to form large

screens and/or use single displays for independent screens to create the video

wall's layout. Click the bar -- under the display icon to select a Receiver for

each display. This configuration should match the actual video wall layout.

Item Description

Name Enter a name for the Video Wall.

Description Enter a description for the Video Wall.

Number of Displays Use the Horizontal and Vertical drop-down menus to select

the number of displays that make up the video wall (a

maximum of 64 are supported). Match this to the physical

layout of the displays. Click the refresh icon to update the

layout.

Chapter 6. System Status

225

Bezel Dimension Use the two boxes to increase/decrease the frame size of

each active display.

Lock / Unlock Click the monitor to Lock the (2) bezel settings, so that

when one size is changed they all change.

Click the monitor to Unlock the (2) bezel settings, so that

each size can be set independently.

Layout Selection Click + or X to add or remove additional layouts to the Video

Wall. The options listed here will appear in a drop-down

menu for the Video Wall, allowing you to quickly choose

different layouts from the Receiver settings page. Arrows

below the Layout Selection box allow you to move up or

down in the list.

Three layout templates are available for quick setup. The

Videowall and Splitter options can not be changed but allow

you to select the Receivers. These three layouts can not be

deleted.



Video Wall provides a basic full screen layout where one

Transmitter connects to multiple Receivers to display the

video together as one full screen.



Splitter provides a layout that connects a Transmitter to

multiple Receivers that show the same video displayed

on separate screens independently.

3. Customized provides a basic full screen layout

that can be configured into groups (see Group

below) as desired.*When using the KE6940R in

Customized layouts, only the KE6940’s first video

port will display video because each port’s video

source is independent. When using the KE6940R

in Video Wall or Splitter layouts both video ports

will display video. Video wall only supports Share,

View Only and Occupy access modes.

Location Use the drop-down menu to select a location for the Video

Wall or leave it as All Devices. See Location, page 196, for

details.

Group Login When enabled, users logging into or out of 1 receiver

automatically logs into or out of all other receivers within the

Video Wall, using the same set of credentials.

Item Description

KVM over IP Matrix System User Manual

226

Boundless Switching Enable this feature to allow you to switch KVM control

between different receivers by moving the mouse cursor

across screen boundaries. This option is disabled by

default.

When Boundless Switching is enabled, make sure to

disable the following settings:



On the computer, under Control Panel - Mouse

Properties - Pointer Options, uncheck Enhance pointer

precision.



On the CCKM Main page, click Settings (page 249), then

on the General tab scroll down and disable Fast

Switching.

Note:



Dual Display Transmitters can be set up as two

independent Virtual Transmitters with Boundless

Switching. The placement of the KE6940 setup must

have DVI-1 as the main display on the left and DVI-2 as

a secondary display on the right.Boundless Switching

supports both single and dual video outputs from any

one computer.



For multi-display PCs, make sure of the following:

1. All video outputs are aligned in a row with top

alignment and the main screen on the far left.

2. The transmitter’s port OS has been properly set,

see page 200.

3. Users can optionally group all video outputs from

the same PC into a transmitter group. See p. 213.



If the mouse cursor disappears under a Linux operating

system, execute this command:

gsettings set org.gnome.setting-daemon.plugins.cursor active false

Use the slide bar to zoom in or out for a better view of the

Video Wall layout.

Click this icon to reset the zoom back to full size.

Select multiple display icons and click the Group button to

group the displays into one screen.

Select a group and click Ungroup to ungroup the displays.

Fit Mode Select how the video wall will be displayed:

Height: Fits the video to the height of the display.

Width: Fits the video to the width of the display.

Scale: Fits the video on the entire display.

Item Description

Chapter 6. System Status

227

Receiver Permissions

Receiver Permissions sets which users and groups can access a Receiver.

Select a device under the Receiver List, and then click under Operation to

grant a user or group permission to access the device. This will allow the user

to login to the Receiver’s OSD menu to access the Connections tab.

To set Receiver Permissions, in Receiver settings, click .

Use the RX OSD button to enable/disable showing the

Receiver’s name and IP address in the top left corner of the

connected display. This helps identify which Receiver is

connected to the display.

Save Click Save to save the changes.

Cancel Click Cancel to exit without saving.

Item Description

Receiver List Lists the Receivers which can be selected to set

permissions.

Drop-Down Menu Use the drop-down menu to select User or Group. After

making a selection, the list of users or groups appears.

Set permissions by selecting the Operation box next to

each user or group.

Item Description

KVM over IP Matrix System User Manual

228

Account

Click Users in the Syst em Status panel to open the settings. The Account page

allows you to add, delete and configure users and groups. Instructions for

adding users and groups is provide on page 229.



The Users and Group buttons appear at the top of the page.



Depending on the item selected, either Users or Groups are listed on

the page.



The sort order of the information displayed can be changed by clicking the

column headings.



Three icons in the right corner are used to add users, groups and set

permissions, as explained in the sections that follow.

Operation Click the Operation box next to each user or group to

apply access rights on the selected device. This gives

users and groups permission to log in to the Receiver’s

OSD. If a user inherits its permissions from a group, the

box will be Blue. To disable access rights for all users,

uncheck the box in the heading.

Apply Click Apply to save the changes.

Cancel Click Cancel to exit without saving.

Item Description

Chapter 6. System Status

229

Users

The KE Matrix Manager supports three types of accounts, shown in the table

below:

Adding Users

To add a user, do the following:

1. Click on the menu bar.

2. Select Add New User. The Add New User window opens:

User Type Role

Administrator Access, push/pull and management of the KE Matrix

Manager, including configuration and setting up of devices.

Manage Users, Groups, Transmitters, Receivers, Profiles

and Video Walls. Configure personal working environments.

Super User Access and push/pull Receivers, Transmitters and Profiles

they have been given permission for.

User Access Receivers to connect to Transmitters they have been

given permission for.

KVM over IP Matrix System User Manual

230

Enter the required information in the fields provided. A description of each

is given in the table below:

Field Description

Username From 1 to 32 characters are allowed depending on the Account

Policy settings.

Local User Check the Local User box if the account is for logging in to the

KE Matrix Manager software or a Receiver.

Uncheck the Local User box if the account is authenticated with

a 3rd party external source, such as RADIUS, LDAP/AD, or

TACACS+. See ANMS, page 256 for details.

Password From 6 to 32 characters are allowed depending on the Account

Policy settings.

Confirm Password To be sure there is no mistake in the password, you are asked

to enter it again. The two entries must match.

Description Additional information about the user that you may wish to

include.

Type There are three account categories: Administrator, Super User

and User.



The Administrators have full access to make changes within

the KE Matrix Manager software, which includes adding and

removing Transmitters, Receivers, accounts, preferences,

and configuration settings.



The Super Users have access to the Receiver’s OSD menu

and can connect Channels and Profiles.



The Users can log in to Receivers to connect channels.

Status Status allows you to control the user’s account and access, as

follows:



Active provides the user with access and permissions as

granted.



Disable lets you suspend a user’s account without actually

deleting it, so that it can be easily reinstated in the future.

OSD Language Click the drop-down menu to select the language you want to

use during OSD sessions for this user. Options are: Chinese

(Traditional), Simplified Chinese, Japanese, German, Korean,

Russian, French, Spanish, and Portuguese.

Toolbar Hotkey Select the hotkey combination to call the Tool Bar function for

this user. The Tool Bar is used when accessing the computer

from the Transmitter or Receiver side.

Logout Timeout If there is no user input for the amount of time set with this

function, the user is automatically logged out. A login is

necessary before the KE Matrix Manager can be accessed

again. The default is 30 minutes.

Screen Blanker Set how many minutes the device waits when a session is idle

before turning off the display.

Chapter 6. System Status

231

3. When your selections have been made click Apply.

4. When the Operation Succeeded message appears, click OK.

5. The new user appears on the main panel.



The columns show the Username; User Level, Status, OSD Language,

Description; and Group.

Modifying Users

To modify a user, do the following:

1. In the main panel, double-click the user’s name.

2. In the Edit User page that comes up, make your changes, then click Apply.

Deleting Users

To delete a user, do the following:

1. In the main panel, check the box next to the user’s name.

2. Click .

3. Click OK.

OSD Title Bar

Duration

When the accessing a port, the top left-hand corner will show a

title bar displaying the access mode and the device name.

Select how long you wish the title bar is to be displayed for, or

check Disable to not show any title bar.

Welcome Message If you want the Welcome Message to appear on screen when

the user logs into the KE Matrix Manager, select Enable.

If you want the user's Screen Name to appear with the

Welcome Message, check the Username check box.

Group Click Select and check a box to add the user to a group.

Apply Click Apply to save the changes.

Cancel Click Cancel to exit without saving.

Field Description

KVM over IP Matrix System User Manual

232

Groups

Groups allow administrators to easily and efficiently manage users and

devices. Since device access rights apply to anyone who is a member of the

group, administrators need only set them once for the group, instead of having

to set them for each user individually. Multiple groups can be defined to allow

some users access to specific devices, while restricting other users from

accessing them. Device permissions are discussed on page 234.

Adding Groups

To create a group, do the following:

1. Click Group on the Account page.

2. Click and then select Add New Group. The Add New Group

window opens:

3. Enter the required information in the appropriate fields. A description of

each of the fields is given in the table below:

4. At this point you can assign users to the group by clicking Edit.

5. When your selections have been made click Apply.

Field Description

Group Name A maximum of 32 characters is allowed.

Description Additional information about the user that you may

wish to include. A maximum of 32 characters is

allowed.

Member Lists the users that are currently in the group. To add

users, click the Edit button.

Chapter 6. System Status

233

6. When the Operation Succeeded message appears, click OK.

7. The new group appears in the main panel.



The columns show the Group Name, Description and Members that are

in the group.

Repeat the above procedure to add additional groups.

Modifying Groups

To modify a group, do the following:

1. In the main panel, double-click the group’s name.

2. Make your changes, then click Apply.

Deleting Groups

To delete a group, do the following:

1. In the main panel, check the box next to the group’s name.

2. Click .

3. Click OK.

KVM over IP Matrix System User Manual

234

Permissions

You can assign Transmitter, Receiver and Profile permissions for users and

groups from the Account page.

Assigning Device Permissions

To assign permissions for a user or group from the Account page, do the

following:

1. Click on the menu bar. The Set User Permissions window opens:

2. To set the permissions, select a user or group, then a device and select the

Access Type under each column so that it turns green. Make your

permission settings for each user or group on each device according to the

information provided below:

Item Description

User List Use the radio button to view the Users or Group list.

Click a user or group to configure their permissions.

Drop-Down Menu Use the drop-down menu to select Transmitter, Receiver

or Profile. After making a selection, a list of devices or

profiles appears. Set permissions by selecting the access

type (All, View, Share, Occupy, Exclusive) next to the

device.

Chapter 6. System Status

235

3. When you have finished making your choices, click Apply.

4. In the confirmation popup that appears, click OK.

Access Type Select the access you want to grant to a user or group by

clicking under the heading(s) next to each device. This

defines how the device can be accessed by the user or

group. When granted, the access types (All, View,

Occupy, Exclusive) for Transmitters will appear available

for the user in the Receiver's OSD Connection page (see

page 161).

All: Select to grant all access permissions, View, Share,

Occupy and Exclusive, to the users or user groups.

View: User can only view the remote screen, and cannot

perform operations on it.

Share: All users accessing the Transmitter can

simultaneously share control of the Transmitter. Input

from the users is placed in a queue and executed

chronologically.

Occupy: The first user to access the Transmitter has

control. However, additional users may view the

Transmitter’s video. If the user who controls the

Transmitter is inactive for longer than the time set in the

Transmitter’s Timeout box, control is transferred to the

first user to move the mouse or strike the keyboard.

Exclusive: The first user to access the Transmitter has

exclusive control over the Transmitter. No other users

can view the Transmitter. The Timeout function does not

apply when Transmitters are accessed with this setting.

Operation (Receiver and Profile): The Operation access

type for Receivers allows users to log into Receivers,

and for Profiles allows a user to connect the Profile from

a Receiver.

Apply Click Apply to save the changes.

Cancel Click Cancel to exit without saving.

Item Description

KVM over IP Matrix System User Manual

236

Profile

Click Profile in the System Status panel to open the settings. The Profile page

allows you to create, run and schedule connection profiles. Profiles channel

specific Receiver to Transmitter connections and can be instantly connected

from the Profile page at anytime. Profiles can be also scheduled to run

automatically at specific times.

The meanings of the icons and headings on the page are straightforward and let

you view and configure Profiles.



Click to connect the selected Profile.



Click to disconnect the selected Profile.



Click to delete the selected Profile.



Click to Create Profile or Cr eat e Schedu le (page 237 & 240).



Click and enter text to search for a Profile.



Check the box next to a Profile and click the Connect or Disconnect

icon to start/stop profile connections. Check the box next to a Schedule

and click the Enable or Disable icon to enable/disable a schedule.



Appears on the Schedule page, click to enable the selected schedule.



Appears on the Schedule page, click to disable the selected

schedule.

Chapter 6. System Status

237

Adding a Profile

Creating a Profile allows you to quickly connect single or multiple Receiver to

Transmitter connections.

To add a Profile, do the following:

1. On the Profile page click and then select Create Profile. The Create

Profile window appears:

Item Description

Name Enter a name for the Profile.

Description Enter a description for the Profile.

Permissions Click Select and check the box of the users / groups you

want to allow to connect this Profile. When the user logs

into a Receiver, the profile will appear listed in the OSD

menu on the Profile page (see page 166), allowing them

to connect it.

KVM over IP Matrix System User Manual

238

2. After filling in the information, click a Receiver, select Select TX and use

the drop-down menu select a Transmitter; or use Transmitter Li st at the

bottom of the page to drag-and-drop Transmitters to Receivers to create

the connection.

Access Mode This defines how the Transmitter in a Profile can be

accessed by Receivers when multiple users attempt to

access it.

View Only: Receivers only have view access to the

Transmitter’s video display.

Share: All users accessing the Transmitter can

simultaneously share control of the Transmitter. Input

from the users is placed in a queue and executed

chronologically.

Occupy: Set a time threshold for Receivers whose

Access Mode has been set to Occupy If there is no

activity from the Receiver occupying the port for the

amount of time set here, the Receiver is timed out and

the port is released. The first Receiver to send keyboard

or mouse input after the port has been released gets to

occupy the port. Input a value from 1 to 240 seconds.

Exclusive: The first Receiver to access the Transmitter

has exclusive control over the Transmitter. No other

users can view the Transmitter. The Timeout function

does not apply to Transmitters which have this setting.

Receiver before a Profile can connect it to a Transmitter.

When enabled, a user must be logged into the Receiver

or it will not connect to the Transmitter when the Profile is

initiated.

Lock OSD Checking this box will lock the Receiver’s OSD screen

when the Profile connects it to a Transmitter.

Location Use the drop-down menu to select a location to filter the

Receivers displayed on the page.

Click this icon to show individual Receivers.

Click this icon to show only video wall Receivers.

Click this icon to show only Receiver Group Receivers.

Save Click to save the changes.

Cancel Click to exit without saving.

Item Description

Chapter 6. System Status

239

3. After configuring the connections, click Save. The new Profile appears on

the Profile page.

4. To connect Profiles, check the box of the Profile(s) you want to connect,

and click .

5. To disconnect Profiles, click .

KVM over IP Matrix System User Manual

240

Adding a Schedule

Creating a Schedule allows you to connect Profiles at specific dates, times and

intervals.

To add a Schedule, do the following:

1. On the Profile page click .

2. Click and then select Create Schedule. The Create Schedule

window appears:

3. After the schedule is configured, click Save.

Item Description

Profile Use the drop-down menu to select a Profile to schedule.

Frequency Use the drop-down menu to select how often the Profile should run:

Once, Daily, Weekly and Monthly.

When you select Weekly/Monthly an additional drop-down menu

appears to select the Week Day/Month Day on which the profile will run.

Start Date Enter the date on which you want the schedule to begin running.

End Date Enter the date on which you want the schedule to stop running.

Start Time Enter the time of day that you want the profile to connect.

End Time Enter the time of day that you want the profile to disconnect.

Every If you select Daily, Monthly or Weekly, the Every option appears allowing

you to enter how often you want the schedule to run. For example, enter

3 months if you want the profile to run once every three months. If you

want to run the schedule once a day, once a week or once a month, use

the default entry of 1.

Chapter 6. System Status

241

Log

Click Log in the System Status panel to open the settings. The Log page lists

events that take place and provides a breakdown of the time, user, severity,

device, and log information. You can change the sort order of the display by

clicking on the column headings.



Click the drop-down menu beside a heading to filter events into

subcategories. Selecting a subcategory allows you to view only the logs

that relate to the choice. The meanings of the headings at the top of the

page are straightforward:



All Severity refers to the event’s severity type: Information, Error, or

Warning



All Device refers to the Transmitter or Receiver that relates to the

event. If no device is listed the event refers to the KE Matrix Manager

software.



All User refers to the username that the event relates to. If no username

appears, the event is general system information.



Time refers to the date and time that the event occurred.



Log Information provides detailed information about each event.



Click to delete the logs currently displayed in the list.



Click and enter text to search for an event log.



Click to save the log contents to a file on your computer.

Click to open a pop-up window that allows you to set how many days or

the number of records to record before over-writing old log files. Use the radio

button to select By Period (Days) or By Records and enter the number to use

before overwriting the oldest log files.

KVM over IP Matrix System User Manual

242

This Page Intentionally Left Blank

243

Chapter 7

System Settings

Overview

The System Settings are accessed by clicking

from the System Status

page (see Syst em Status, page 199). There are 7 tabs to configure the KE

Manager system settings: General, ANMS, FW Upgrade, Redundancy,

Backup/Restore, Certificates, and Sessions.

General

Clicking from the system status page opens the General tab, as shown

below:

KVM over IP Matrix System User Manual

244

Heading Item Description

Basic KE Manager Version This provides the version of the KE Manager

software.

Serial Number This provides the serial number and a link to

upgrade the software.

KE Manager Name Enter a name for the KE Manager.

Description Enter a description for the KE Manager.

Language Select the language for the KE Manager. Choices

are: English, Chinese (Traditional), Simplified

Chinese, Japanese, German, Korean, Russian,

French, Spanish, and Portuguese.

Beeper Select Enable to sound a beep from the

Transmitter/Receiver every time a configuration

change is made.

CCKM Timeout If there is no user input for the amount of time

entered in the box, a user logged into the CCKM

is automatically logged out. Check Disable to turn

this function off.

Authentication Lock When accidental power cut happens, the function

allows the user to retain his/her settings as was

shown before the power cut. The user keeps the

same authentication and display.



Uncheck Disable to turn this function on.



Specify a time (in seconds) you wish to keep

the authentication and display for.

When disabled or, if enabled, after the time

specified above, the manager will prompt you to

authenticate when you wish to access the KE

Manager.

Boundless Switching

Focus

When using Boundless Switching(see Boundless

Switching, page 232) across multiple receivers

within a receiver group or video wall, a colored

border is shown on the receiver display currently

being accessed (focus receiver).



Uncheck Always to only display the colored

border for a set time interval immediately after

switching the focus receiver.



Specify a time (in seconds) you wish to display

the colored border for upon switching the focus

receiver.

Push / Pull Login

Check

Enable to check the access rights of the users

receiving transmitter sessions upon push / pull.

Chapter 7. System Settings

245

Network

Ports

HTTP Port Sets the HTTP service port used to access the KE

Manager. This is the port number to use for a

browser login. The default is 8080.

Device Port Sets the Device service port used to access the

KE Manager. Configure this port number on the

Transmitter and Receiver to access to the KE

Manager software (see Manager Address,

page 152 and 144). The default is 9110.

HTTPS Port Sets the HTTPS service port used to access the

KE Manager. This is the port number to use for a

secure browser login. The default is 8443.

Example: To access the KE Manager with an IP

address of 192.168.0.100 using a secure browser

Fast Switching Select the default resolution to use so that you

can switch faster when changing Receiver to

Transmitter connections. If the monitor you are

using does not support fast switching the video

may not display correctly when this setting is

enabled.

Note: Make sure to disable Boundless Switching

when Fast Switching is enabled.

Account

Policy

Enforce Password

History

This setting determines the number of unique new

passwords that must be used before an old

password can be reused. Uncheck the box and

enter a number to enforce the password history

policy.

Enhance Password

Rule

Select Enable to enforce rules for creating

passwords, as follows:



The password length must be at least 8 charac-

ters.



The password must contain both upper and

lowercase characters.



The password must contain a number (0

through 9).



If a user types in the wrong password 5 times

consecutively, their account will be locked out

for 10 minutes.

CLI Mode CLI Mode Login Use the radio button to Enable or Disable

command line interface logins to the KE Manager.

Warning: If Disable CLI Mode Login is selected,

anybody can login via Telnet with administrator

privileges without needing to authenticate,

allowing control of the entire installation. For

installations requiring a high level of security, it’s

recommended that Enable CLI Mode Login be

applied.

Heading Item Description

KVM over IP Matrix System User Manual

246

Connection Redundancy

You can setup priority connection for receivers. Where a transmitter fails, this

function allows the receiver to connect to the transmitter of the highest priority

that is available.

Follow the steps below to setup the priority list.

1. Click Enable to enable this function.

2. Click Edit. A window will pop-up to allow editing.

Receiver

Settings

Anonymous Login Use this to anonymously login a user at select

Receivers. This option allows users to access the

Receiver and connect to Transmitters without

needing to login.

Click Device List to display the list and check the

box next to the Receiver(s) to enable the

Anonymous Login feature.

Anonymous Login

User

When Anonymous Login (above) is enabled for

Receivers, select a user from the drop-down

menu to use as the default account to

anonymously login to the Receiver.

EDID Mode EDID Mode Use this drop-down menu to set the default EDID

mode for all Transmitters. To set a different EDID

mode for each Transmitter, use the drop-down

menu to select Customized and then click Edit. A

Transmitter list will appear with drop-down menus

to configure each device’s EDID mode.

Connection Redundancy Use this drop-down menu to set connection

redundancy function. You can setup priority

connection with this function.

Please refer to Connection Redundancy on

page 246.

Save Click to save the changes.

Cancel Click to cancel the changes.

Heading Item Description

Chapter 7. System Settings

247

3. For Alarm Sound, click Enable.

4. To create a new list, click New. A Priority List 1 will be shown. (Click

New again to create another list.)

KVM over IP Matrix System User Manual

248

5. Select the transmitters you wish to be in the list from the “Available TX”

list and click Add. The added transmitter will be shifted to the “Selected

TX” list.

To deselect the transmitter, click to select the transmitter from the

“Selected TX” list and click Remove. The transmitter will be shifted back

to the “Available TX” list.

6. Select a target receiver by first clicking the drop-down menu “Target RX”,

and select a receiver.

7. Repeat steps 4-6 to add more priority lists.

8. Click Save to save the settings.

Chapter 7. System Settings

249

If your system includes an AiT device, “JavaClient/WinClient” (for remote

viewer) will appear at the bottom of the General tab to let you select the login

access priority depending on the user.

Share: User has full control and can simultaneously share control of the remote

viewer. Input from the users is placed in a queue and executed chronologically.

Occupy: The first user to access the remote viewer has control. However,

additional users may view the remote viewer. If the user controlling the remote

viewer is inactive for longer than the time set in the Transmitter’s Timeout box,

control is transferred to the first user to move the mouse or strike the keyboard.

View only: User can only view the remote viewer but cannot perform

operations on it.

Exclusive: The first user to access the remote viewer has exclusive control. No

other users can view the remote viewer. The Timeout function does not apply

when Transmitters are accessed with this setting.

KVM over IP Matrix System User Manual

250

ANMS

The ANMS (Advanced Network Management Settings) tab is used to set up

SNMP configurations. It is

organized into three pages, as described below.

Event Destination

SMTP Settings

To have the KE Manager email reports from the SMTP server to you, do

the following:

1. Enable the Enable report from the following SMTP Server, select the

Log Level (Information, Warning, or Error), and key in the SMTP

Server IP address and SMTP Port.

2. If your server requires authentication, check the Server requir es

authentication checkbox, and key in the appropriate information for the

Account Name and Password fields.

Chapter 7. System Settings

251

3. Key in the email address of where the report is being sent from in the

From field.

Note: 1. Only one email address is allowed in the From field, and it

cannot exceed 64 Bytes.

2. 1 Byte = 1 English alphanumeric character.

4. Key in the email address (addresses) of where you want the SMTP

reports sent to in the To field.

Note: If you are sending the report to more than one email address,

separate the addresses with a semicolon. The total cannot exceed

256 Bytes.

5. Click Save.

1. Once set, an SMTP report will be sent to the recipients for every

100 logs accumulated or once every 30 minutes.

2. An immediate SMTP report will also be sent whenever an error

log occurs.

Syslog Se t tings

To record all the events that take place on the KE Manager and write them

to a Syslog server, do the following:

1. Check Enable.

2. Use the drop-down menu to select the Log Level (Information,

Warning, or Error).

3. Key in the Server IP address of the Syslog server.

4. Key in the Service Port number. The valid port range is 1-65535.

5. Click Save.

KVM over IP Matrix System User Manual

252

Authentication & Authorization

RADIUS Settings

To allow authentication and authorization through a RADIUS server, do

the following:

1. Check Enable.

2. Fill in the IP addresses and service port of the Preferred RADIUS

Server and Alternate RADIUS Server.

3. In the Timeout field, set the time in seconds that the KE Manager waits

for a RADIUS server reply before it times out.

4. In the Retries field, set the number of allowed retries.

5. In the Shared Secret field, key in the character string that you want to

use for authentication between the KE Manager and the RADIUS

Server. A minimum of 6 characters is required.

6. On the RADIUS server, Users can be authenticated with any of the

following methods:

Use the same Username on both the RADIUS server and the KE

Manager.

Use the same Group name on both the RADIUS server and the

KE Manager.

Use the same Username/Group name on both the RADIUS server

and the KE Manager.

In each case, the user’s access rights are the ones assigned that were

assigned when the User or Group was created on the KE Manager.

LDAP / AD Settings:

Chapter 7. System Settings

253

To allow authentication and authorization for the KE Manager via LDAP /

AD, refer to the information in the table, below:

On the LDAP / AD server, Users can be authenticated with any of the

following methods:

With MS Active Directory schema.

Item Action

Enable Put a check in the Enable checkbox to allow LDAP / AD

authentication and authorization.

Enable SSL Put a check in the Enable checkbox to allow SSL connections.

LDAP Server IP

and Port

Fill in the IP address and port number for the LDAP / AD server.



You can use the IPv4 address, the IPv6 address or the domain

name in the LDAP Server field.



For LDAP, the default port number is 389.

Timeout Set the time in seconds that the KE Manager waits for an LDAP /

AD server reply before it times out.

Admin DN Consult the LDAP / AD administrator to ascertain the appropriate

entry for this field. For example, the entry might look like this:

ou=kn4132,dc=aten,dc=com

Admin Name Key in the LDAP administrator’s username.

Password Key in the LDAP administrator’s password.

Search DN Set the distinguished name of the search base. This is the

domain name where the search starts for user names.

KVM over IP Matrix System User Manual

254

Note: If this method is used, the LDAP schema for MS Active Directory

must be extended. Without schema – Only the Usernames used on

the KE Manager are matched to the names on the LDAP / AD server.

User privileges are the same as the ones configured in the KE

Manager.

Without schema – Only the Usernames used on the KE Manager are

matched to the names on the LDAP server. User privileges are the

same as the ones configured in the KE Manager software.

Without schema – Only Groups in AD are matched. User privileges are

the ones configured for the groups he belongs to in the KE Manager.

Without schema – Usernames and Groups in AD are matched. User

privileges are the ones configured for the User and the Groups in the

KE Manager.

TAC ACS+ Settin gs:

Enable TACACS+ and enter the following information:

Preferred TACACS+ Server

Preferred TACACS+ Service Port

Shared Secret 1

Alternate TACACS+ Server

Alternate TACACS+ Service Port

Shared Secret 2

Chapter 7. System Settings

255

SNMP

SNMP Trap & SNMP Agent

To be notified of SNMP trap events, do the following:

1. Check Enable SNMP Trap.

2. Enter the Server IP and the Port of the PC / server to be notified of

SNMP trap events.

3. Next to Notification, click Select and check the types of events for

sending SNMP notifications.

4. Check Enable SNMP Agent.

5. Check / uncheck the SNMP Agents for sending SNMP trap events.

To add additional SNMP Agents, you must first Disable SNMP

Agent.

6. Click Save.

KVM over IP Matrix System User Manual

256

FW Upgrade

In FW Upgrade all KE devices that are online are listed, allowing you to select

which devices get upgraded. New firmware versions can be downloaded from

our website as they become available. Check the website regularly to find the

latest upgrade packages.

To upgrade the firmware do the following:

1. Go to our website and download the firmware upgrade package

appropriate to your KE device.

2. Open your browser and log in to the KE Manager with an administrator’s

account.

3. Click the Settings icon; select the FW Upgrade tab, the FW Upgrade

page appears:

All the devices that are capable of being upgraded are listed.

Note: Only online devices show up in the list. Offline devices do not get

upgraded.

4. Check the checkbox in front of the devices you want to upgrade. Uncheck

the devices that you do not want to upgrade.

5. Click Browse. Navigate to the directory where the firmware upgrade file

is located and select it.

6. Enable or disable Check FW Version

If you enabled C heck FW Version the current firmware level is

compared with that of the upgrade file. If the current version is equal to

Chapter 7. System Settings

257

or higher than the upgrade version, a popup message appears, to inform

you of the situation and stops the upgrade procedure.

If you didn't enable Check FW Version, the upgrade file is installed

without checking what its level is.

If you cancel the firmware upgrade, you have to wait 12 seconds

before you can disable Check FW Version and restart the firmware

upgrade.

7. Click Upgrade to start the upgrade procedure. As the upgrade proceeds,

progress information is shown on the screen. Once the upgrade completes

successfully, the devices will reset.

8. Log in to each device and check the firmware version to be sure it is the

new one.

Firmware Upgrade Recovery

If the Upgrade Succeeded screen doesn't appear or the upgrade procedure is

abnormally halted (due to computer crash, power failure, etc.), the device may

become inoperable. If you find that the device does not work following a failed

or interrupted upgrade, do the following

1. Power off the KE device.

2. Press the Reset button, then power on the KE device while holding Reset.

3. Hold Reset for 7 seconds after the device is powered on.

4. The device will revert to a previous firmware version and recover from the

failure.

5. Upgrade the firmware to the most current version available.

KVM over IP Matrix System User Manual

258

Redundancy

The Redundancy tab allows you to set up a backup computer in case the

computer hosting the KE Manager goes offline. If the KE Manager goes

offline, the secondary computer will automatically take over operations,

allowing all connections to continue without disruption – with only a brief

period of 30 seconds when new connections can't be started. When the primary

computer comes back online it retrieves the updated database from the

secondary computer and re-takes all KE Manager operations.

A CCKM supports up to 5 secondary servers.

To set up Redundancy, do the following:

1. Install KE Manager on a secondary computer with a USB license key. For

detailed instructions, see page 176.

Note: A second USB license key is required if you have more than 8 KE

Series devices in your setup.

2. On the secondary computer, log in to the KE Manager, click and go to

the Redundancy tab.

3. Check Enable Redundancy and select the Secondary radio button.

4. Use the Primary Server IP drop-down menu to select the primary IP

address.

5. Click Save.

6. Redundancy is now running on the secondary computer.

Chapter 7. System Settings

259

7. On the primary computer, log in to the KE Manager, click and go to

the Redundancy tab.

8. Check Enable Redundancy and select the Primary radio button.

9. Use the Secondary Server IP drop-down menu to select the secondary IP

address.

10. Enter the Username and Password of the secondary computer’s local

administrator account.

11. Click Save.

12. Information about the Redundancy status can be found in the event log

(see Log, page 247 for details).

KVM over IP Matrix System User Manual

260

Backup / Restore

The Backup/ Resto re tab is divided into three panels: Backup, Restore, and

Export Device List:

The operations to perform backup/restore procedures are des cribed in the table

below and in the section that follo ws:

Procedure Operation

Backup Backs up theKE Manager configuration – including profile and

schedule configurations, user and group accounts, user profiles, logs,

and system settings.

Restore Deletes the current profile and schedule configurations, user and

group accounts, user profiles, logs, and system settings; then

restores those settings to the values that exist in the previously saved

backup file.

Export Device

List

Clicking Export allows you to save a file with a complete list of the

devices added to the KE Manager. The file contains the ID, name,

description and IP dddress of each transmitter and receiver. An

Existing column also lists if the device is available: Yes, it exists and is

available, or No, it is offline or has been removed.

Chapter 7. System Settings

261

Backup

To back up system configuration settings, do the following:

1. (Optional) In the Backup panel, check Add Password, and provide a

password for the backup file.

Note: Providing a password is a security feature – if you provide a

password, you will need to give the same password in order to

restore the configuration settings from this file.

2. Click Backup.

3. In the dialog box that comes up, Click Save to save the configuration file

(System.conf) to a location on your hard disk.

4. Navigate to the directory where you want to save the file and click Save.

Restore

To restore system configuration settings, do the following:

1. In the Restore panel, click Browse.

2. Navigate to the directory where the backup file is located and select it.

3. When you return to the Backup/Restore page enter the password you set

when the backup file was created.

Note: If you did not set a password for the file, leave the field blank.

4. Click Restore.

5. Click OK to confirm that you want to restore the configuration data.

When the Restore procedure is in process, a message stating that the KE

Manager will restart will appear. After a short while the KE Manager

closes and refreshes at the log in screen. When it comes back up the

configuration settings that were restored from the backup file are in effect.

KVM over IP Matrix System User Manual

262

Certificates

This tab provides information about Private Certificates:

Private Certificate

When logging in over a secure (SSL) connection, a signed certificate is used to

verify that the user is logging in to the intended site. For enhanced security, the

Private Certificate section allows you to use your own private encryption key

and signed certificate, rather than the default ATEN certificate.

There are two methods for establishing your private certificate: generating a

self-signed certificate; and importing a third-party certificate authority (CA)

signed certificate.

Generating a Self-Signed Certificate

If you wish to create your own self-signed certificate, a free utility –

openssl.exe – is available for download over the web. See Self-Signed

Private Certificates, page 380 for details about using OpenSSL to generate

your own private key and SSL certificate.

Obtaining a CA Signed SSL Server Certificate

For the greatest security, we recommend using a third party certificate

authority (CA) signed certificate. To obtain a third party signed certificate,

Chapter 7. System Settings

263

go to a CA (Certificate Authority) website to apply for an SSL certificate.

After the CA sends you the certificate and private encryption key, save

them to a convenient location on your computer.

Importing the Private Certificate

To import the private certificate, do the following:

1. Click Import from the bottom of the Private Certificate page, shown here:

2. Click Browse to the right of Certificate Filename; and browse to where

your certificate file is located; and select it.

3. Click Import to complete the procedure.

Note: Clicking Restore Defaults returns the device to using the default ATEN

certificate.

Certificate Signing Request

The Certificate Signing Request (CSR) section provides an automated way of

obtaining and installing a CA signed SSL server certificate.

To perform this operation do the following:

1. Click New. The following dialog box appears:

2. Fill in the form – with entries that are valid for your site – according to the

example information in the following table:

Information Example

Country (2 letter code) TW

State or Province Taiwan

KVM over IP Matrix System User Manual

264

3. After filling in the form (all fields are required), click Create.

A self-signed certificate based on the information you just provided is now

stored on the KE Manager software.

4. Click Get CSR, and save the certificate file (csr.cer) to a convenient

location on your computer.

This is the file that you give to the third party CA to apply for their signed

SSL certificate.

5. After the CA sends you the certificate, save it to a convenient location on

your computer. Click Import to locate the file; then click Import to store

it on the KE Manager.

Note: When you upload the file, the KE Manager checks the file to make sure

the specified information still matches. If it does, the file is accepted; if

not, it is rejected.

If you want to remove the certificate (to replace it with a new one because of a

domain name change, for example), simply click Restore Defaults.

Locality Taipei

Organization Your Company, Ltd.

Organization Unit Tech Department

Common Name mycompany.com

Note: This must be the exact domain name of the site

that you want the certificate to be valid for. If the site’s

domain name is www.mycompany.com, and you only

specify mycompany.com, the certificate will not be valid.

Email Address administrator@yourcompany.com

Information Example

Chapter 7. System Settings

265

Sessions

The Sessions tab shows all of the users that are logged into KE Manager and

OSD sessions and provides information concerning the “who, where and

when” of each session. This page also gives the administrator the option of

forcing a user logout by selecting the user and clicking Kill Session next to

each user.

Username refers to the user that logged in to establish a session.

User Type refers to the account type of the user.

Service refers to how the user logged into their session – via KE Manager,

Command Line, or OSD.

IP refers to the IP address from which the user has logged in.

Login Time refers to the date/time that the user logged into the session.

Last Access refers to the last time the user session was active.

Operation provides the Kill Session button to force a user logout.

KVM over IP Matrix System User Manual

266

This Page Intentionally Left Blank

267

Chapter 8

Connections

Overview

The Connections panel is found on the KE Matrix Manager Main Page, just

below System Status. Connections provides a diagram of current Transmitter

to Receiver connections. Before connections are established the panel appears

blank, as shown below. To connect Receivers to Transmitters, use the Instant

Link panel (page 192), or create a connection Profile (page 242).

When connections are made, clicking a device in the left column provides a

way to view the connection, hovering the mouse cursor over the connection

diagram in the right column allows you to disconnect the device, as explained

in the sections that follows.

KVM over IP Matrix System User Manual

268

Connections

When Receivers connect to Transmitters, they appears in the Connections

panel. There are two columns – each lists either Transmitters or Receivers. The

columns can be swapped by clicking the TX-RX or RX-TX button. Devices in

the left column can be clicked to display their connection to devices, shown in

the right column. Connections, shown in the right column, can be disconnected

by clicking the

over the connection diagram.

Item Description

On the heading bar under Connections, click this icon to

change the sort order of the Transmitters or Receivers

listed in the left column.

Left Column Click a device in the left column to view its connection in

the right column. A diagram to its connected device(s)

appears in the right column.

Right Column The right column displays a connection diagram when a

device in the left column is selected. Move the mouse

cursor over the diagram and click

to disconnect the

devices. This column also shows the user and access

type (Exclusive, Occupy, Share, View Only) used to

establish the connection.

Transmitter Lists Transmitters that are online and connected to

Receivers.

Receiver Lists Receivers that are online and connected to

Transmitters.

Click to view Transmitter to Receiver connections. This

will list Transmitters in the left column so that they can be

selected to view their connection diagram, shown in the

right column.

Click to view Receiver to Transmitter connections. This

will list Receivers in the left column so that they can be

selected to view their connection diagram, shown in the

right column.

Chapter 8. Connections

269

Based on the different access types, users attempting to connect to device ports

that are already being accessed by another user may or may not be able to

connect. See the table below for scenarios where users are granted (O) or

denied access (X).

Click this icon to Refresh the Transmitters and Receivers

list in Connections panel.

Undo Click this icon to undo the most recent disconnection.

New Connect

Attempt

Currently

Connected

Exclusive Share Occupy View Only

XCLUSIVE

XXXX

Share X O X O

Occupy X X O O

View Only X O O O

NoneOOOO

Item Description

KVM over IP Matrix System User Manual

270

271

Chapter 9

Scheduled Profile

Overview

The Scheduled Profile panel is found on the KE Matrix Manager Main Page,

just below Connections. Scheduled Profiles displays connection profiles that

have been scheduled. Click Go to Schedule to edit and create profile schedules

(page 246). To create Profiles, see page 242.

Item Description

Headings The headings provide the schedules: Name, Description,

Start, End, and Status. Start and End show the time/date

the profile is scheduled to begin and end. Status displays

the number of days until to the next scheduled run.

Go to Schedule Clicking Go to Schedule opens the Profile settings page

which allows you to create and edit connection profiles.

See Profile, page 242 for details.

Click this icon to Refresh the connections list in the right

column.

Undo Click this icon to undo the most recent disconnection.

KVM over IP Matrix System User Manual

272

This Page Intentionally Left Blank

273

Chapter 10

Sessions

Overview

The Sessions panel is found at the bottom of the KE Matrix Manager Main

Page, just below Scheduled Profile. Sessions displays information about users

logged into devices and the KE Matrix Manager web GUI. Click Go to

Sessions to view the settings page (see page 271).

Item Description

Headings The headings provide information about each user

session: Username, User Level, Service, IP, Login Time,

and Last Access. For more details about each heading,

see Sessions, page 271.

Go to Sessions Clicking Go to Sessions opens the Sessions settings

page which provides a page displaying the same

information found in this panel.

Click this icon to Refresh the Sessions list.

KVM over IP Matrix System User Manual

274

This Page Intentionally Left Blank

275

Chapter 11

Remote Viewer (AiT Models only)

Introduction

If the video source(s) of your AiT model is connected, the remote viewer can

be used to access these video source(s) as if it were your local system.

A window will be presented and the remote server is displayed inside this

window.

You can maximize the window, drag the borders to resize the window and

use the scrollbars to move around the screen.

Due to net lag, there might be a slight delay before your keystrokes show

up. You may also have to wait a bit for the remote mouse to catch up to

your local mouse before you click.

Due to net lag, or insufficient computing power on the local machine,

some images, especially motion images, may display poorly.

There are several ways you can access the remote servers and are listed below:

1. Windows viewer accessed directly from the web browser GUI.

2. Java viewer accessed directly from the web browser GUI.

3. Windows Client Viewer AP (without browser). On the browser login

page, a “Download Windows Client AP” is available. Refer to The

Windows/Java Client AP on page 278 for more information.

4. Java Client Viewer AP (without browser). Since the control is identical

to the windows client viewer, refer to The Contro l Panel on page 281 on

the control of the viewer interface.

KVM over IP Matrix System User Manual

276

Windows and Java Client Viewer (web access)

The Windows and Java Client Viewer is accessible via a web browser.

At the login screen of the Remote Viewer page, enter the username/password

and click Login. You can change the login language by using the language

drop-down menu.

A second or two after, the video source(s)’ display appears as a window on

your desktop:

Chapter 11. Remote Viewer (AiT Models only)

277

The control/access is laid out in the control panel. Refer to The Control Panel

on page 281 for access/control information.

By default, if you use Internet Explorer as your browser, the Windows Client

viewer is used. If you use other browsers, the Java Client viewer is used.

If you manually set the preference to Java Client when you use Internet

Explorer as your browser, the Java Client viewer is also used.

KVM over IP Matrix System User Manual

278

The Windows/Java Client AP

Download

To download the stand-alone Windows or Java Client program, go to the

browser login page and click the Download Windows Client AP or

Download Java Client AP button.

Note: Make sure your system has JRE 6 Update 3 or later installed. Java is

available for free download from Sun’s Java web site (http://

java.sun.com).

Chapter 11. Remote Viewer (AiT Models only)

279

Starting Up

For the first time running the AP, right-click the Windows/Java Client AP and

click “Run as administrator” to start.

The Client Connection Screen is shown below and each components are

described in the table. Windows Client will be the example shown here.

1. Double-click the unit. When the unit

connected, a login window appears:

Item Description

Server List When you run the Client program, it automatically searches

the user’s local LAN segment for AiT units, and lists

whichever ones it finds in this box. If you want to connect to

one of these units, double-click to connect.

Server If the AiT unit you wish to connect to is at a remote location, it

will not be found on your LAN. You can enter its IP address

and port yourself.

If you don’t know the Port number, contact the Administrator.

When the IP address and Port number for the unit you wish to

connect to have been specified, click Connect to start the

connection.

Connect Starts connecting to the AiT unit.

Disconnect These buttons become active once you log into the AiT unit.

Switch to remote view

Message panel The blank field on the right of the Server section shows the

current status of the server connection.

KVM over IP Matrix System User Manual

280

2. Provide a valid Username and Password and click OK to continue.

Note: The default Username is administrator and the default Password is

password.

After you have successfully logged in, the connection screen reappears:

At this time there are two active buttons and are described in the table

below:

3. Click Switch to remote view to access the video source(s)’ display(s).

Refer to The Control Panel on page 281 for information about the remote

access interface.

Button Action

Disconnect Breaks the connection to the unit.

Switch to remote

view

Opens a window on the user’s desktop containing the remote

server’s display that is the same as the one that appears with the

browser-based Windows client.

Chapter 11. Remote Viewer (AiT Models only)

281

The Control Panel

The control panel is hidden at the upper or lower center of the screen (the

default is up). It becomes visible when you move the mouse pointer over it:

Note: 1. The above image shows the complete Control Panel. The icons that

appear can be customized. See Control Panel Configuration,

page 296, for details.

2. To move the Control Panel to a different location, click and drag the

Control Panel.

The panel is consisted of two rows.

The second row shows the video resolution of the remote display, the bus

the user is on, and an information button where you can click it for a

menu-style version of the control panel toolbar (see below).

Right clicking the second row area also brings up the menu-style control

panel. This menu allows you to select options for the Screen Mode, Zoom,

Mouse Pointer type, and Mous e Sync Mo de. These functions are discussed

in the sections that follow.

KVM over IP Matrix System User Manual

282

Control Panel Functions

The Control Panel functions are described in the table below.

Icon Function

This is a toggle. Click to ping the Control Panel to the window where

it is always displayed on top of other screen elements. Click again to

have it display normally.

Click to bring up the Video Options dialog box. (See Video Settings,

page 286, for details).

Toggles the display between Full Screen Mode and Windowed

Mode.

Click to take a snapshot (screen capture) of the remote display. To

configure the Snapshot parameters, refer to Snapshot on page 297.

Click to toggle the remote display between color and grayscale.

Click to zoom the remote display window.

Note: This feature is only available in windowed mode (Full Screen

Mode is off). See Zoom, page 292 for details.

Click to send a Ctrl+Alt+Del signal to the remote system.

Click to bring up the on-screen keyboard (see The On-Screen

Keyboard, page 293).

Click to select the mouse pointer type.

Note: This icon changes depending on which mouse pointer type is

selected (see Mouse Pointer Type, page 294).

Click to toggle Automatic or Manual mouse sync.



When the selection is Automatic, a green mark appears on the

icon.



When the selection is Manual, a red mark appears on the icon.

See Mouse DynaSync Mode, page 294 for a complete explanation

of this feature.

Chapter 11. Remote Viewer (AiT Models only)

283

These icons show the Num Lock, Caps Lock, and Scroll Lock status

of the remote computer.



When the lock state is On, the LED is bright orange.



When the lock state is Off, the LED is dull blue.

Click on the icon to toggle the status.

Note: These icons and your local keyboard icons are in sync.

Clicking an icon causes the corresponding LED on your keyboard to

change accordingly. Likewise, pressing a Lock key on your

keyboard causes the icon’s color to change accordingly.

Click to bring up the Macro dialog box (see Macros, page 284 for

more details).

Click to bring up the Virtual Media dialog box. The icon changes

when a virtual media device is mounted on the port. See Virtual

Media, page 289, for specific details.

Note: This icon displays in gray when the function is disabled or not

available to the user.

Click to bring up the Control Panel Configuration dialog box.

See Control Panel Configuration, page 296, for details on

configuring the Control Panel.

Icon Function

KVM over IP Matrix System User Manual

284

Macros

The Macros icon provides access to three functions found in the Macros

dialog box: Hotkeys, User Macros, and System Macros. Each of these

functions is described in the following sections.

Hotkeys

Various actions, corresponding to clicking the Control Panel icons, can be

accomplished directly from the keyboard with hotkeys. Selecting the Hotkeys

radio button lets you configure which hotkeys perform the actions. The actions

are listed to the left; their hotkeys are shown to the right. Use the checkbox to

the left of an action’s name to enable or disable its hotkey.

If you find the default Hotkey combinations inconvenient, you can reconfigure

them as follows:

1. Highlight an Action, then click Set Hotkey.

2. Press your selected Function keys (one at a time). The key names appear in

the Hotkeys field as you press them.

You can use the same function keys for more than one action, as long

as the key sequence is not the same.

To cancel setting a hotkey value, click Cancel; to clear an action’s

Hotkeys field, click Clear.

3. When you have finished keying in your sequence, click Save.

Chapter 11. Remote Viewer (AiT Models only)

285

To reset all the hotkeys to their default values, click Reset.

An explanation of the Hotkey actions is given in the table below:

Action Explanation

Exit remote location Exits the remote view. This is equivalent to clicking the Exit icon

on the Control Panel. The default keys are F2, F3, F4.

Adjust Video Brings up the Video Settings dialog box. This is equivalent to

clicking the Video Settings icon on the Control Panel. The default

keys are F5, F6, F7.

Toggle Control

Panel

Toggles the Control Panel Off and On. The default keys are F3,

F4, F5.

Toggle Mouse

Display

If you find the display of the two mouse pointers (local and

remote) to be confusing or annoying, you can use this function to

shrink the non-functioning pointer down to a barely noticeable

tiny circle, which can be ignored. Since this function is a toggle,

use the hotkeys again to bring the mouse display back to its

original configuration. This is equivalent to selecting the Dot

pointer type from the Mouse Pointer icon on the Control Panel.

The default keys are F7, F8, F9.

Note: The Java Control Panel does not have this feature.

Adjust mouse This synchronizes the local and remote mouse movements. The

default keys are F8, F7, F6.

Video Auto-sync This combination performs an auto-sync operation. It is

equivalent to clicking the Video Autosync icon on the Control

Panel. The default keys are F6, F7, F8.

Show/Hide Local

Cursor

Toggles the display of your local mouse pointer off and on. This is

equivalent to selecting the Null pointer type from the Mouse

Pointer icon on the Control Panel. The default keys are F4,F5.

Substitute Ctrl key If your local computer captures Ctrl key combinations, preventing

them from being sent to the remote system, you can implement

their effects on the remote system by specifying a function key to

substitute for the Ctrl key. If you substitute the F11 key, for

example, pressing [F11 + 5] would appear to the remote system

as [Ctrl + 5]. The default key is F11.

Substitute Alt key Although all other keyboard input is captured and sent to the

remote system, [Alt + Tab] and [Ctrl + Alt + Del] work on your

local computer. In order to implement their effects on the remote

system, another key may be substituted for the Alt key. If you

substitute the F12 key, for example, you would use [F12 + Tab]

and [Ctrl + F12 + Del]. The default key is F12.

KVM over IP Matrix System User Manual

286

Video Settings

The Video Settings dialog box allows you to adjust the placement and

picture quality of the remote screen display on your monitor.

The adjustment options are as follows:

Option Usage

Click this to control the transparency of the Video Settings dialog

box.

Performance Select the type of internet connection that exists between the

Local Client computer and the unit. The unit will use that

selection to automatically adjust the Video Quality settings to

optimize the quality of the video display.

Since network conditions vary, if none of the preset choices seem

to work well, you can select Customize and use the Video

Quality slider bars to adjust the settings to suit your conditions.

Advanced See page 287 for details.

Chapter 11. Remote Viewer (AiT Models only)

287

Gamma Adjustment

For greater control and if it is necessary to correct the gamma level for the

remote video display, use the Gamma function of the Advanced Video

Settings by clicking the Advanced button.

For gamma level, there are ten preset and four user-defined levels to choose

from. Click the drop-down menu and choose the most suitable one.

The additional options in the Advanced screen are as follows:

Option Usage

RGB Drag the slider bars to adjust the RGB (Red, Green, Blue)

values. When an RGB value is increased, the RGB component of

the image is correspondingly increased.

If you enable Set to G r a ys cale, the remote video display is

changed to grayscale.

Gamma This section allows you to adjust the video display’s gamma

level.

Click and drag the diagonal line at as many points as you wish to

achieve the display output you desire.

Click Save As to save up to four user-defined configurations

derived from this method. Saved configurations can be recalled

from the list box at a future time.

Click Reset to abandon any changes and return the gamma line

to its original diagonal position.

KVM over IP Matrix System User Manual

288

Click OK to save your changes and close the dialog box.

Click Cancel to abandon your changes and close the dialog box.

Note: For best results, change the gamma while viewing a remote computer.

Video Quality Drag the slider bar to adjust the overall video quality. The larger

the value, the clearer the picture and the more video data goes

through the network. Depending on the network bandwidth, a

high value may adversely affect response time.

Enable Refresh The unit can redraw the screen every 1 to 99 seconds,

eliminating unwanted artifacts from the screen. Select Enable

Refresh and enter a number from 1 through 99. The unit will

redraw the screen at the interval you specify. This feature is

disabled by default. Click to put a check mark in the box next to

Enable Refresh to enable this feature.

Note: 1. The switch starts counting the time interval when

mouse movement stops.

2. Enabling this feature increases the volume of video

data transmitted over the network. The lower the

number specified, the more often the video data is

transmitted. Setting too low a value may adversely

affect overall operating responsiveness.

Transparency Drag the slider bars to adjust the transparency of the remote

display.

Color Depth Control This setting determines the richness of the video display by

adjusting the amount of color information.

Option Usage

Chapter 11. Remote Viewer (AiT Models only)

289

Virtual Media

The Virtual Media feature allows a drive, folder, image file, or

removable disk on a local client computer to appear and act as if it were

installed on the remote server.

Virtual Media also supports a smart card reader function that allows a reader

plugged into a local client computer to appear as if it were plugged into the

remote server.

Virtual Media Icons

The Virtual Media icon on the Control Panel changes to indicate whether the

virtual media function is available, or if a virtual media device has already been

mounted on the remote server, as shown in the table below:

Virtual Media Redirection

To implement the virtual media redirection feature, do the following:

1. Click the Virtual Media icon to bring up the Virtual Media dialog box:

Icon Function

The icon displays as shown on the left to indicate that the virtual

media function is disabled or not available.

The icon displays as shown on the left to indicate that the virtual

media function is available. Click the icon to bring up the virtual

media dialog box.

The icon displays as shown on the left to indicate that a virtual media

device has been mounted on the remote server. Click the icon to

unmount all redirected devices.

KVM over IP Matrix System User Manual

290

2. Click Add and select the media source.

Depending on your selection, additional dialog boxes appear enabling you

to select the drive, file, folder, or removable disk you desire. See Virtual

Media Support, page 399 for details about mounting these media types.

3. To add additional media sources, click Add, and select the source.

Up to three virtual media choices can be added. To rearrange the selection

order, highlight the device you want to move, then click the Up or Down

Arrow button to promote or demote it in the list.

4. Read refers to the redirected device being able to send data to the remote

server. Write refers to the redirected device being able to have data from

the remote server written to it. The default is Read. If you want the

redirected device to be writable, check the Enable Writ e checkbox:

Note: 1. If a redirected device cannot be written to, or if a user does not

have write permissions, it appears in gray and cannot be selected.

2. See Virtual Media Support, page 399, for a list of supported

virtual media types.

5. To remove an entry from the list, highlight it and click Remove.

6. After you have made your media source selections, click Mount. The

dialog box closes. The virtual media devices that you have selected are

redirected to the remote system, where they show up as drives, files and

folders on the remote system’s file system.

Chapter 11. Remote Viewer (AiT Models only)

291

Once mounted, you can treat the virtual media as if they were really on the

remote server – drag and drop files to/from them; open files on the remote

system for editing and save them to the redirected media, etc.

Files that you save to the redirected media will actually be saved on your

local system. Files that you drag from the redirected media will actually

come from your local system.

7. To end the redirection, bring up the Contr ol Pa nel and click on the Virtual

Media icon. All mounted devices are automatically unmounted.

KVM over IP Matrix System User Manual

292

Smart Card Reader

Note: This feature is only available when using the WinClient View er or the

Windows Client AP.

The smart card reader function allows a reader plugged into a local client

computer’s USB port to be redirected, and appear as if it were plugged into the

remote server. One purpose of smart cards (Common Access Cards, for

example), is to allow authentication to the remote server from the local client.

When a smart card reader is connected to the local client computer, an entry for

it appears when you bring up the Virtual Media dialog box and click Add:

Make your selection and click Mount to complete the redirection.

Zoom

The Zoom icon controls the zoom factor for the remote view window.

Settings are as follows:

Setting Description

100% Sizes and displays the remote view window at 100%.

75% Sizes and displays the remote view window at 75%.

50% Sizes and displays the remote view window at 50%.

25% Sizes and displays the remote view window at 25%.

1:1 Sizes and displays the remote view window at 100%. The difference

between this setting and the 100% setting is that when the remote

view window is resized its contents don’t resize – they remain at the

size they were. To see any objects that are outside of the viewing

area move the mouse to the window edge, to have the screen scroll.

Chapter 11. Remote Viewer (AiT Models only)

293

The On-Screen Keyboard

The unit supports an on-screen keyboard, available in multiple

languages, with all the standard keys for each supported language.

Click this icon to pop up the on-screen keyboard:

One of the major advantages of the on-screen keyboard is that if the keyboard

languages of the remote and local systems are not the same, you do not have to

change the configuration settings for either system. The user just has to bring

up the on-screen keyboard; select the language used by the computer on the

port he is accessing; and use the on-screen keyboard to communicate with it.

Note: You must use your mouse to click on the keys. You cannot use your

actual keyboard.

To change languages, do the following:

1. Click the down arrow next to the currently selected language to drop down

the language list.

2. Select the new language from the list.

KVM over IP Matrix System User Manual

294

To display/hide the expanded keyboard keys, click the arrow to the right of

the language list arrow.

Mouse Pointer Type

The CN9600 offers a number of mouse pointer options when working

in the remote display. Click this icon to select the type that you would

like to work with:

Note: 1. The Dot pointer is not available with the Java Client Viewer or the

Java Client AP.

2. Selecting the Single pointer has the same effect as the Toggl e mouse

display hotkey function (see Toggle Mouse Display, page 285 for

details).

3. The icon on the Control Panel changes to match your choice.

Mouse DynaSync Mode

Clicking this icon selects whether synchronization of the local and

remote mouse pointers is accomplished either automatically or

manually.

The icon on the toolbar indicates the synchronization mode status as follows:

Icon Function

The green mark on this icon indicates that Mouse DynaSync is

available and is enabled. This is the default setting when Mouse

DynaSync is available.

Chapter 11. Remote Viewer (AiT Models only)

295

When Mouse DynaSync is available, clicking the icon toggles between enabled

and disabled. If you choose to disable Mouse DynaSync mode, you must use

the manual syncing procedures described in the next section.

Automatic Mouse Synchronization (DynaSync)

Mouse DynaSync provides automatic locked-in synching of the remote and

local mouse pointers – eliminating the need to constantly resync the two

movements.

Manual Mouse Synchronization

If you are using Manual mouse synchronization instead of automatic

DynaSync and the local mouse pointer goes out of sync with the remote

system's mouse pointer, there are a number of methods to bring them back into

sync:

1. Invoke the Adjust Mouse function with the Adjust Mouse hotkeys (see

Adjust mouse, page 285, for details).

2. Move the pointer into all 4 corners of the screen (in any order).

3. Drag the Control Panel to a different position on the screen.

4. Set the mouse speed and acceleration for each problematic computer

attached to the switch. See Additi onal Mouse Synchro nization Proced ures,

page 397, for instructions.

The red mark on this icon indicates that Mouse DynaSync is

available but is not enabled.

Icon Function

KVM over IP Matrix System User Manual

296

Control Panel Configuration

Clicking the Customi z e Control Panel icon brings up a dialog box that

allows you to configure the items that appear on the Control Panel, as

well as its graphical settings:

The dialog box is organized into five main sections as described in the table

below:

Item Description

Customize

Control Panel

Allows you to select which icons are displayed in the Control Panel.

Control Panel

Style



Enabling Transparent makes the Control Panel semi-transparent,

so that you can see through it to the display underneath.



Enabling Icon causes the Control Panel to display as an icon until

you mouse over it. When you mouse over the icon, the full panel

comes up.

Chapter 11. Remote Viewer (AiT Models only)

297

Screen Options



If Full Screen Mode is enabled, the remote display fills the entire

screen.



If Full Screen Mode is not enabled, the remote display appears as

a window on the client desktop. If the remote screen is larger than

what is able to fit in the window, scroll bars will appear.



If Keep Screen Size is enabled, the remote screen is not resized.



If the remote resolution is smaller than that of the client

monitor, its display appears like a window centered on the

screen.



If the remote resolution is larger than that of the client monitor,

its display is scaled to the client monitor size.



If Keep Screen Size is not enabled, the remote screen is resized

to fit the client monitor's resolution.

Scrolling

Method

In cases where the remote screen display is larger than your monitor,

you can choose how to scroll to the areas that are off-screen.



If you select Mouse Movement, the screen will scroll when you

move the mouse pointer to your screen border.



If you select Scroll Bars, scroll bars appear around the screen

borders that you can use to scroll to the off-screen areas.

User Info If User Numbers is enabled, the total number of users logged into the

unit displays beside the resolution on the second row of the Control

Panel (See the Control Panel diagram on page 281 for an example.)

Snapshot These settings let the user configure the unit’s screen capture

parameters (see the Snapshot description under The Control Panel,

page 281):



Path lets you select a directory that the captured screens

automatically get saved to. Click Browse; navigate to the directory

of your choice; then click OK. If you don’t specify a directory here,

the snapshot is saved to your desktop.



Click a radio button to choose whether you want the captured

screen to be saved as a BMP or a JPEG (JPG) file.



If you choose JPEG, you can select the quality of the captured file

with the slider bar. The higher the quality, the better looking the

image, but the larger the file size.

Keyboard Pass

Through

When this is enabled, the Alt-Tab key press is passed to the remote

server and affects that server. If it is not enabled, Alt-Tab acts on your

local client computer.

Window Title Use the drop-down menu to select which remote server information is

displayed on the window title.

Item Description

KVM over IP Matrix System User Manual

298

This Page Intentionally Left Blank

299

Chapter 12

Firmware Upgrade Utility

The Windows-based Firmware Upgrade Utility (FWUpgrade.exe) provides a

smooth, automated process for upgrading the firmware. The Utility comes as

part of a Firmware Upgrade Package that is specific for each device. New

firmware upgrade packages are posted on our web site as new firmware

revisions become available. Check the web site regularly to find the latest

packages and information relating to them:

http://www.aten.com

For browser based firmware upgrade, please refer to FW Upgrade on page 262.

Preparation

1. From a computer that is not part of your installation go to our Internet

support site and choose the model name that relates to your KE device to

get a list of available Firmware Upgrade Packages.

2. Choose the Firmware Upgrade Package you want to install (usually the

most recent), and download it to your computer.

3. Be sure that the computer is connected to the same LAN segment as the

KE devices.

KVM over IP Matrix System User Manual

300

Starting the Upgrade

To upgrade your firmware:

1. Run the downloaded Firmware Upgrade Package file - either by double

clicking the file icon, or by opening a command line and entering the full

path to it. The Firmware Upgrade Utility Welcome screen appears:

Note: The screens shown in this section are for reference only.

2. Read the License Agreement (enable the I Agree radio button).

3. Click Next. The Firmware Upgrade Utility main screen appears:

Chapter 12. Firmware Upgrade Utility

301

4. The Utility inspects your installation. All the devices capable of being

upgraded by the package are listed in the Select Master Device list.

5. After you have made your device selection, Click OK and then Next to

begin the upgrade.

If you enabled Check Firmware Version, the Utility compares the device’s

firmware level with that of the upgrade files. If it finds that the device’s

version is higher than the upgrade version, it brings up a dialog box

informing you of the situation and gives you the option to Continue or

Cancel.

If you didn’t enable Check Firmwar e Version, the Utility installs the

upgrade files without checking whether they are a higher level, or not.

As the Upgrade proceeds status messages appear in the Status Messages

panel, and the progress toward completion is shown on the Progress bar.

KVM over IP Matrix System User Manual

302

Upgrade Succeeded

After the upgrade has completed, a screen appears to inform you that the

procedure was successful:

Chapter 12. Firmware Upgrade Utility

303

Firmware Upgrade Recovery

If the Upgrade Succeeded screen doesn't appear or the upgrade procedure is

abnormally halted (due to computer crash, power failure, etc.), the device may

become inoperable. If you find that the device does not work following a failed

or interrupted upgrade, do the following

1. Power off the KE device.

2. Press the Reset button, then power on the KE device while holding Reset.

3. Hold Reset for 7 seconds after the device is powered on.

4. The device will revert to a previous firmware version and recover from the

failure.

5. Upgrade the firmware to the most current version available.

KVM over IP Matrix System User Manual

304

This Page Intentionally Left Blank

305

Chapter 13

CLI Commands

Serial Control Protocol Commands

The KE Series’s built-in bi-directional RS-232 serial interface and LAN port

connection allows system control via Receivers through a high-end controller

or PC. This control feature can also be accessed via TCP/IP through a computer

running Telnet. The port for Telnet commands should be set to 9130.

Configuring the Serial Port

The controller’s serial port should be configured the same as the Receiver’s

default configuration, as shown below:

The Receiver’s Function Switch should be set to RS-232 Config (see page 11).

Before executing RS-232 commands across a network you must install the KE

Matrix Manager software on a computer and ensure that it is online. For the

Slim Version of KE Series (KE8900ST/8900SR/9900ST). Please make sure

the RS-232 Serial Port is not connected before executing commands.

On your computer, open a terminal (command line) session. Please press

"T/t" to start “CLI Session”.

Baud Rate 9600

Data Bits 8

Parity None

Stop Bits 1

Flow Control None

KVM over IP Matrix System User Manual

306

Device/Profile Commands

When typing a device or profile into a command string, you can enter the name

by: IP address (device only), ID or @ with the List number for the device/

profile in the command line interface.

Note: To find out about the List number for a device/profile, execute a List

command (page 322).

Telnet

The KE Series can be operated and configured via a remote terminal session

using Telnet. This is a useful means for configuring devices when they are first

setup and connected to the network.

To log into the KE Series device by means of a Telnet session, do the

following:

1. On your computer, open a terminal (command line) session.

2. At the prompt, key in the KE device’s IP address with port 9130 in the

following way:

telnet [IP address] [port]

3. Press Enter. The login screen appears. At the login prompt, provide the

Password.

Verification

After sending a command, a verification message appears at the end of the

command line. Use the echo command to identify a command by number:

Command OK - the command is correct and performed successfully

Command incorrect - the command has the wrong format and/or values.

Echo Command - at the end of a command string, type: e1234 – where

1234 can be any number. The verification message returns with the echo

number.

Chapter 13. CLI Commands

307

Switch Port Command

The formula for Switch Port commands is as follows:

Command + Output + Num1 + Input + Num2 + Mode + Stream +

Connect + [Enter]

1. For example, if you want to switch the Receiver’s connection to

Transmitter (192.168.0.20), type the following:

sw i192.168.0.20 [Enter]

2. For example, if you want to disconnect the Receiver from its Transmitter

connections, type the following:

sw off [Enter]

3. For example, if you want to connect Receiver (192.168.0.99) to

Transmitter (192.168.0.79) with exclusive access to stream video and

audio, type the following:

sw o192.168.0.99 i192.168.0.79 exclusive video audio on [Enter]

4. For example, to disconnect Receiver (192.168.0.11) from the video stream

and return it to the OSD menu, type the following:

sw o192.168.0.11 off [Enter]

5. For example, to disconnect Receiver (192.168.0.09) from the video stream

and logout the OSD, type the following:

sw o192.168.0.09 logout [Enter]

6. For example, to disconnect the Receiver’s USB stream, type the

following:

sw usb off [Enter]

7. For example, to switch the Receiver to the 5th Transmitter listed in the

command line interface, type the following:

sw i@5 exclusive all on [Enter]

8. For example, to switch the Receiver to the 7th Transmitter listed in the

command line interface with echo command 4312, type the following:

sw i@7 exclusive all on e4312

9. For example, to switch Receiver (192.168.0.12) to the 14th Transmitter

listed in the command line interface with occupy access to stream video

audio and USB, type the following:

sw o192.168.0.12 i@14 occupy video audio usb on [Enter]

KVM over IP Matrix System User Manual

308

The following tables show the possible values for the Switch Port commands:

Command Description

sw Switch port command

Output Description

o Output port command (RX)

Num1 Description

xx Output port

xx: Receiver ID or IP address

@zz List #

zz: 1~99

To use the 4th Receiver listed in

the command line interface,

type: o@4

Input Description

i Input command (TX)

Num2 Description

yy Input port

yy: Transmitter ID or IP address

@zz List #

zz: 1~99

To use the 8th Transmitter listed

in the command line interface,

type: i@8

Mode Description

exclusive Sets the Access Mode to

exclusive.

share Sets the Access Mode to share.

occupy Sets the Access Mode to occupy.

viewonly Sets the Access Mode to view

only. If the mode is omitted, view

only is used by default.

Stream Description

video Sets the video source stream

audio Sets the audio source stream

serial Sets the serial source stream

Chapter 13. CLI Commands

309

The following table lists the available Switch Port commands:

usb Sets the USB source stream

all Sets all source streams

Connect Description

on Connect

off Disconnect

logout Logout OSD

Command Output Num1 Input Num2 Mode Stream Con-

nect

Description

sw o xx i yy exclusive video

audio

serial

usb

all

on Switch output xx to input

yy with exclusive access

to source(s).

xx: Receiver ID

yy: Transmitter ID

sw o xx i yy share video

audio

serial

usb

all

on Switch output xx to input

yy with share access to

stream source(s).

xx: Receiver ID

yy: Transmitter ID

sw o xx i yy occupy video

audio

serial

usb

all

on Switch output xx to input

yy with occupy access to

stream source(s).

xx: Receiver ID

yy: Transmitter ID

sw o xx i yy viewonly video

audio

serial

usb

all

on Switch output xx to input

yy with viewonly access

to stream source(s).

xx: Receiver ID

yy: Transmitter ID

sw o xx off Switch output xx,

disconnect streams,

return to OSD menu.

xx: Receiver ID

sw o xx logout Switch output xx,

disconnect streams and

logout from OSD menu.

xx: Receiver ID

sw video

audio

serial

usb

all

off Switch Receiver

stream(s) to disconnect.

Stream Description

KVM over IP Matrix System User Manual

310

Note: 1. Each command string can be separated with a space.

2. The Mode command string can be skipped and view only will be used

by default.

3. Skip the Output and Num1 command strings to configure the local

Receiver.

sw off Switch Receiver

disconnect streams,

return to OSD menu.

sw i @zz exclusive

occupy

viewonly

video

audio

serial

usb

all

on Switch Receiver to input

@zz with [mode] access

to stream source(s).

zz: Transmitter # by

order listed in the

command line interface.

sw o xx i @zz exclusive video

audio

serial

usb

all

on Switch output xx to input

@zz with [mode] access

to stream source(s).

xx: Receiver ID

zz: Transmitter # by

order listed in command

line interface.

Command Output Num1 Input Num2 Mode Stream Con-

nect

Description

Chapter 13. CLI Commands

311

Mute Command

The Mute command allows you to enable or disable the audio.

The formula for the Mute command is as follows:

Command + Output + Num1 + Control + [Enter]

1. For example, to turn mute off (audio on) for the Receiver, type the

following:

mute off [Enter]

2. For example, to turn mute on for Receiver (192.168.0.11), type the

following:

mute o192.168.0.11 on [Enter]

3. For example, to turn mute off for Receiver (192.168.0.18), type the

following:

mute o192.168.0.18 off [Enter]

The following tables show the possible values for the Mute commands:

The following table lists the available Mute commands:

Command Description

mute Mute command

Output Description

o Output port command

Num1 Description

xx Output number

xx: Receiver ID or IP address

Control Description

on Mute on; audio disabled

off Mute off; audio enabled (default)

Command Output Num1 Control Description

mute o xx on Turn mute on for output xx

xx: Receiver ID

mute o xx off Turn mute off for output xx

xx: Receiver ID

KVM over IP Matrix System User Manual

312

Note: 1. Each command string can be separated with a space.

2. The Control command string can be skipped and off will be used by

default.

3. Skip the Output and Num1 command strings to configure the local

Receiver.

mute on Turn mute on for Receiver

mute off Turn mute off for Receiver

Command Output Num1 Control Description

Chapter 13. CLI Commands

313

Profile Command

The Profile command allows you to connect profiles and video walls.

The formula for Profile commands is as follows:

Command + Profile + Num1 + Control + [Enter]

1. For example, to connect profile 8 and lock the OSD menu, type the

following:

profile f8 [Enter]

2. For example, to connect profile 4 with access to the OSD menu, type the

following:

profile f4 release [Enter]

3. For example, to disconnect profile 12 and return to the Receiver to the

OSD menu, type the following:

profile f12 back [Enter]

The following tables show th e possible values for the Profile commands:

Command Description

profile Profile command

Profile Description

f Profile ID

Num1 Description

xx Profile or Video Wall ID

xx: 1-99

Control Description

lock Connect profile, lock access to

OSD menu (default)

release Connect profile, allow access to

OSD menu

back Disconnect profile, return

Receiver to OSD menu

KVM over IP Matrix System User Manual

314

The following table lists the available Profile commands:

Note: 1. Each command string can be separated with a space.

2. The Control command string can be skipped and lock will be used by

default.

3. For functional lock and release commands, make sure the Lock OSD

when connecting option is checked during Create Pr ofile. Refer to

Lock OSD, page 238 for more information.

Command Profile Num1 Control Description

profile f xx lock Connect profile xx, lock

OSD access

xx:1~99

profile f xx release Connect profile xx, allow

OSD access

xx:1~99

profile f xx back Disconnect profile xx

and return Receiver to

OSD menu

xx: 1~99

Chapter 13. CLI Commands

315

EDID Command

Extended Display Identification Data (EDID) is a data that contains a display's

basic information and is used to communicate with the video source. The EDID

commands allow you to change the EDID setting of a Transmitter. For more

information on configuring EDID settings, see Properties, page 149.

The formula for the EDID command is as follows:

Command + Address + Number + Control + [Enter]

1. For example, if you want to configure device (192.168.0.3) to use the

remix EDID mode, type the following:

edid a192.168.0.3 remix [Enter]

The following tables show th e possible values f or the EDID commands:

Command Description

edid EDID command

Address Description

a Address command

Number Description

xx Address number

xx: Receiver ID or IP address

Control Description

auto Checks the EDID of all connected

displays and the ATEN default EDID to

use the best common resolution for all

displays.

remix Manually checks the EDID of all

connected displays and the ATEN default

EDID to use the best common resolution

for all displays (see EDID Mode,

page 161).

default Implements ATEN’s default EDID.

(default)

manual Manually set the EDID configuration from

the Receiver’s OSD (see EDID Mode,

page 161).

KVM over IP Matrix System User Manual

316

The following table lists the available EDID commands:

Command Address Number Control Enter Description

edid a xx auto [Enter] Set EDID of address xx to auto.

xx: Device ID or IP Address

edid a xx remix [Enter] Set EDID of address xx to remix.

xx: Device ID or IP Address

edid a xx default [Enter] Set EDID of address xx to

default.

xx: Device ID or IP Address

edid a xx manual [Enter] Set EDID of address xx to

manual.

xx: Device ID or IP Address

Chapter 13. CLI Commands

317

Reset Command

The Reset command allows you to reset a device back to the default factory

settings. Reset includes resetting the devices IP address.

Note: The Reset command resets everything but the login information to the

factory default settings. To reset the login information, refer to Reset All

Information on page 375.

The formula for the Reset command is as follows:

Command + Address + Number + [Enter]

1. For example, to reset device (192.168.0.95), type the following:

reset a192.168.0.95 [Enter]

2. For example, to reset the Receiver, type the following:

reset [Enter]

The following tables show th e possible values for the Reset command:

The following table lists the available Reset commands:

Note: 1. Each command string can be separated with a space.

2. Skip the Address and Number command strings to reset the local

Receiver.

Command Description

reset Reset command

Address Description

a Address command

Number Description

xx Address number

xx: Receiver ID or IP address

Command Address Num Enter Description

reset a xx [Enter] Reset address xx back to the

factory default settings

xx: Device ID or IP Address

reset [Enter] Resets the Receiver settings

KVM over IP Matrix System User Manual

318

RS-232 Command

The RS-232 command allows you to set the RS-232 settings for a device.

The formula for the RS-232 command is as follows:

Command + Address + Number + Baud Rate + Parity + Data Bit +

Stop Bit + Flow Control [Enter]

1. For example, to set device (192.168.0.33) with a baud rate of 38400, parity

of none, data bit of 8, and stop bit of 1, type the following:

baud a192.168.0.33 38400 none 8 1 [Enter]

2. For example, to set the local device with a baud rate of 19200, type the

following:

baud 19200 [Enter]

The following tables s how the possible values for the RS-232 command:

Command Description

baud RS-232 command

Address Description

a Address command

Num1 Description

xx Address number

xx: Device ID or IP address

Baud Rate Description

9600 Use 9600 baud rate

19200 Use 19200 baud rate

38400 Use 38400 baud rate

115200 Use 115200 baud rate

Parity Description

None Sets the parity to none

Even Sets the parity to even

Odd Sets the parity to odd

Data Bit Description

5 Sets the data bit to 5

6 Sets the data bit to 6

Chapter 13. CLI Commands

319

The following table lists the available Baud Rate commands:

7 Sets the data bit to 7

8 Sets the data bit to 8

Stop Bit Description

1 Sets the stop bit to 1

2 Sets the stop bit to 2

Flow Control Description

None Sets flow control to none

Hardware Sets flow control to hardware

Xon Sets flow control to Xon

Xoff Sets flow control to Xoff

Com

mand Address Num

Baud

Rate Parity Data

Bit

Stop

Bit

Flow

Control Description

baud a xx 9600 None

Even

Odd

None

Hardware

Xon/Xoff

Set address xx

baud rate to

9600, with

parity/ data bit/

stop bit / flow

control setting

baud a xx 19200 None

Even

Odd

None

Hardware

Xon/Xoff

Set address xx

baud rate to

19200, with

parity/ data bit/

stop bit / flow

control setting

baud a xx 38400 None

Even

Odd

None

Hardware

Xon/Xoff

Set address xx

baud rate to

38400, with

parity/ data bit/

stop bit / flow

control setting

baud a xx 115200 None

Even

Odd

None

Hardware

Xon/Xoff

Set address xx

baud rate to

115200, with

parity/ data bit/

stop bit / flow

control setting

Data Bit Description

KVM over IP Matrix System User Manual

320

Note: 1. Each command string can be separated with a space.

2. The Baud Rate value is required but Parity, Data Bit and Stop Bit

can be skipped and their setting will not change.

3. Skip the Address and Number command strings to configure the

local device settings.

baud 9600 Set local device

baud rate to

9600

baud 19200 Set local device

baud rate to

19200

baud 38400 Set local device

baud rate to

38400

baud 115200 Set local device

baud rate to

115200

Com

mand Address Num

Baud

Rate Parity Data

Bit

Stop

Bit

Flow

Control Description

Chapter 13. CLI Commands

321

OSD Command

To enable or disable the On-Screen Display (OSD) menu for a Receiver, use

the following command:

Command + Output + Number + Control + [Enter]

1. For example, to enable the OSD for Receiver 192.168.0.51, type:

osd o192.168.0.51 on [Enter]

2. For example, to disable the OSD for the local Receiver, type:

osd off [Enter]

The following tables show the possible values for the OSD command:

The following table lists the available OSD commands:

Note: 1. Each command string can be separated with a space.

2. Skip the Output and Number command strings to configure the local

Receiver.

Command Description

osd OSD command

Output Description

o Output command

Number Description

xx Output number

xx: Receiver ID or IP address

Control Description

on Enable OSD functions

off Disable OSD functions (default)

Comman

dOutput Number Control Enter Description

osd

oxx

on [Enter] Enable OSD functions for

output xx

xx: Receiver ID or IP

address

osd

oxx

off [Enter] Disable OSD functions for

output xx off (default)

xx: Receiver ID or IP

address

KVM over IP Matrix System User Manual

322

List Command

The List command allows you to retrieve information about users, settings and

connections.

The formula for the List command is as follows:

Command + Output + Input + Number + Control [Enter]

1. For example, for a complete list of available channels, type the following:

list channel [Enter]

2. For example, for a complete list of available profiles, type the following:

list profile [Enter]

3. For example, to list all users logged into all OSD menus, type the

following:

4. list login [Enter]

5. For example, to list the user logged into the OSD on Receiver

(192.168.0.44), type the following:

list o192.168.0.44 login [Enter]

6. For example, for a complete list of available connections, type the

following:

list connection [Enter]

7. For example, to list the current connections on Transmitter (192.168.0.88),

type the following:

list i192.168.0.88 connection [Enter]

The following tables s how the possible values for the List command

Command Description

list List command

Output Description

o Output command

Input Description

i Input command

Number Description

xx Output or Input number

xx: Device ID or IP address

Chapter 13. CLI Commands

323

The following table lists the available List commands:

Note: 1. Each command string can be separated with a space.

2. Skip the Output or Input and Number command strings to view the

local Receiver.

Control Description

channel Lists information about the available

channel(s)

profile Lists information about the available

profile and TV wall connections

rx Lists information about the Receiver

into to the OSD menu

connection Lists information about a Transmitters

current connections

Comman

dOutput Input Number Control Description

list o xx login List output xx user

logged into OSD.

list o xx rx List output xx Receiver

information

list i xx connection List input xx

Transmitter information

list channel List all available

channel information

list profile List all available profile

information

list rx List information about

all Receivers

list login List information about

all OSD logins

list connection List information about

all connections

KVM over IP Matrix System User Manual

324

Read Command

The Read command allows you to retrieve the properties of a device.

The formula for the Read command is as follows:

Command + Output + Input + Number + Control [Enter]

1. For example, to read all of the local Receiver’s properties, type the

following:

read all [Enter]

2. For example, to read all of Receiver (192.168.0.19) device properties, type

the following:

read o192.168.0.19 all [Enter]

3. For example, to read all of Transmitter (192.168.0.28) device properties,

type the following:

read i192.168.0.28 all [Enter]

4. For example, to read the basic properties of Receiver (192.168.0.61), type

the following:

read o192.168.0.61 basic [Enter]

5. For example, to read the network properties of Transmitter (192.168.0.71),

type the following:

read i192.168.0.71 network [Enter]

The following tables show the possible values for the Read command

Command Description

read Read command

Output Description

o Output command

Input Description

i Input command

Number Description

xx Output or Input number

xx: Device ID or IP address

Control Description

all Read all device properties

Chapter 13. CLI Commands

325

The following table lists the available Read commands:

basic Read basic properties

network Read network properties

ipsettings Read IP settings

rs232 Read RS232 properties

properties Read connection properties

manager Read KE Matrix Manager software

properties

streams Read enable media properties

tx Read source stream IP properties

(Receiver)

usbmode Read USB mode properties

(Receiver)

multicast Read multicast properties

(Transmitter)

videoqtyadvanced Read advanced video properties

(Transmitter)

ossettings Read OS properties

(Transmitter)

Comman

dOutput Input Number Control Description

read o i xx all Read output or input xx

all device properties

xx: Device ID or IP

address

read o i xx basic Read output or input xx

basic properties

xx: Device ID or IP

address

read o i xx network Read output or input xx

network properties

xx: Device ID or IP

address

read o i xx ipsettings Read output or input xx

IP address properties

xx: Device ID or IP

address

Control Description

KVM over IP Matrix System User Manual

326

read o i xx rs232 Read output or input xx

RS-232 properties

xx: Device ID or IP

address

read o i xx properties Read output or input xx

connection properties

xx: Device ID or IP

address

read o i xx manager Read output or input xx

KE Matrix Manager IP

and port properties

xx: Device ID or IP

address

read o i xx streams Read output or input xx

enable media

properties

xx: Device ID or IP

address

read o xx tx Read output xx source

stream IP address

properties

xx: Receiver ID or IP

address

read o xx usbmode Read output xx USB

mode properties

xx: Receiver ID or IP

address

read i xx multicast Read input xx multicast

properties

xx: Transmitter ID or IP

address

read i xx videoqtyad

vanced

Read input xx

advanced video

properties

xx: Transmitter ID or IP

address

read i xx ossettings Read input xx OS

properties

xx: Transmitter ID or IP

address

read all Read all properties of

local Receiver

Comman

dOutput Input Number Control Description

Chapter 13. CLI Commands

327

Note: 1. Each command string can be separated with a space.

2. Skip the Output or Input and Number command strings to read the

local Receiver properties.

read basic

network

ipsettings

rs232

properties

manager

streams

usbmode

Read [control]

properties of local

Receiver.

Comman

dOutput Input Number Control Description

KVM over IP Matrix System User Manual

328

Set Command

The Set command allows you to configure the properties of a device. Some

settings require that both the device and Matrix Manager are online or the

command will fail.

The formula for the Set command is as follows:

Command + Output + Input + Number + Control + Value + [Enter]

1. For example, to set the name of the local Receiver to KE6940TX1, type

the following:

set Name=KE6940TX1 [Enter]

2. For example, to set the description of Transmitter (192.168.0.33) to KE

Room B, type the following:

set o192.168.0.19 Description=KE Room B [Enter]

3. For example, to set the DHCP settings of Transmitter (192.168.0.28) to

static, type the following:

set i192.168.0.28 dhcpFlag=STATIC [Enter]

4. For example, to set the IP settings of the local Receiver to 192.168.0.2,

type the following:

set ipAddr=192.168.0.2 [Enter]

5. For example, to set the Transmitter Video IP setting to 192.168.0.44 for

Receiver (192.168.0.56), type the following:

set o192.168.0.56 TxVideoIP=192.168.0.44 [Enter]

The following tables s how the possible values for the Set command

Command Description

set Set command

Output Description

o Output command

Input Description

i Input command

Number Description

xx Output or Input number

xx: Device ID or IP address

Chapter 13. CLI Commands

329

Control Description

Name Sets the device name

Description Sets the device description

ipInstallerFlag Sets the IP installer option

dhcpFlag Sets the DHCP setting

ipAddr Sets the IP address

netmask Sets the subnet mask

gw Sets the default gateway

modeFlag Sets the device mode

BaudRate Sets the baud rate setting

Parity Sets the parity setting

DataBit Sets the data bit setting

StopBit Sets the stop bit setting

FlowCtrl Sets the flow control setting

TxVideoIP Sets the Transmitter video IP setting

TxAudioIP Sets the Transmitter audio IP setting

TxUSBIP Sets the Transmitter USB IP setting

TxRSIP Sets the Transmitter RS-232 IP setting

VideoEnFlag Sets the (enable media) video source

stream

AudioEnFlag Sets the (enable media) audio source

stream

USBEnFlag Sets the (enable media) USB source

stream

RSEnFlag Sets the (enable media) RS232

source stream

ManagerIP Sets the KE Matrix Manager software

ManagerPort Sets the KE Matrix Manager software

port

Beeper Sets the beeper

RxVM Sets the USB mode setting

USBSecure Sets the USB encryption

PortOS Sets the port OS setting

OSLanguage Sets the OS language

videoMCastEn Sets the enable multicast video setting

KVM over IP Matrix System User Manual

330

The following table lists the available Set commands:

audioMCastEn Sets the enable multicast audio setting

Edid Sets the EDID mode selection setting

VideoType Sets the video type setting

ColorDepth Sets the color depth setting

BandwidthLimit Sets the bandwidth limit setting

VideoQty Sets the video quality setting

BGRefresh Sets the background refresh setting

Beeper Sets the beeper setting

OccupyTimeout Sets the occupy timeout setting

Resolution Sets the resolution setting

Value Description

=yy Set value to yy

yy: Enter a value that corresponds to

the control being used

Comm

and Output Input Number Control Value Description

Set o i xx Name yy Set output or input xx

Name to yy

xx: Device ID or IP

address

yy: Name value

Set o i xx Description yy Set output or input xx

Description to yy

xx: Device ID or IP

address

yy: Description value

Set o i xx ipInstallerFlag yy Set output or input xx

ipInstallerFlag to yy

xx: Device ID or IP

address

yy: enable, viewonly,

disable

Control Description

Chapter 13. CLI Commands

331

Set o i xx dhcpFlag yy Set output or input xx

dhcpFlag to yy

xx: Device ID or IP

address

yy: dhcp, static

Set o i xx ipAddr yy Set output or input xx

ipAddr to yy

xx: Device ID or IP

address

yy: IP address value

Set o i xx netmask yy Set output or input xx

netmask to yy

xx: Device ID or IP

address

yy: Subnet mask value

Set o i xx gw yy Set output or input xx

gw to yy

xx: Device ID or IP

address

yy: Default gateway

value

Set o i xx modeFlag yy Set output or input xx

modeFlag to yy

xx: Device ID or IP

address

yy: extender, matrix

Set o i xx BaudRate yy Set output or input xx

BaudRate to yy

xx: Device ID or IP

address

yy: 9600, 19200,

38400, 115200

Set o i xx Parity yy Set output or input xx

Parity to yy

xx: Device ID or IP

address

yy: none, even, odd

Set o i xx DataBit yy Set output or input xx

DataBit to yy

xx: Device ID or IP

address

yy: 5, 6, 7, 8

Comm

and Output Input Number Control Value Description

KVM over IP Matrix System User Manual

332

Set o i xx StopBit yy Set output or input xx

StopBit to yy

xx: Device ID or IP

address

yy: 1, 1.5, 2

Set o i xx FlowCtrl yy Set output or input xx

FlowCtrl to yy

xx: Device ID or IP

address

yy: none, hardware,

Xon, Xoff

Set o i xx TxVideoIP yy Set output xx

TxVideoIP to yy

xx: Device ID or IP

address

yy: IP address value

Set o xx TxAudioIP yy Set output xx

TxAudioIP to yy

xx: Device ID or IP

address

yy: IP address value

Set o xx TxUSBIP yy Set output xx TxUSBIP

to yy

xx: Device ID or IP

address

yy: IP address value

Set o xx TxRSIP yy Set output xx TxRSIP

to yy

xx: Device ID or IP

address

yy: IP address value

Set o i xx VideoEnFlag yy Set output or input xx

VideoEnFlag to yy

xx: Device ID or IP

address

yy: enable, disable

Set o i xx AudioEnFlag yy Set output or input xx

AudioEnFlag to yy

xx: Device ID or IP

address

yy: enable, disable

Comm

and Output Input Number Control Value Description

Chapter 13. CLI Commands

333

Set o i xx USBEnFlag yy Set output or input xx

USBEnFlag to yy

xx: Device ID or IP

address

yy: enable, disable

Set o i xx RSEnFlag yy Set output or input xx

RSEnFlag to yy

xx: Device ID or IP

address

yy: enable, disable

Set o i xx ManagerIP yy Set output or input xx

ManagerIP to yy

xx: Device ID or IP

address

yy: KE Matrix Manager

software IP address

Set o i xx ManagerPort yy Set output or input xx

ManagerPort to yy

xx: Device ID or IP

address

yy: KE Matrix Manager

software port

Set o i xx Beeper yy Set output or input xx

Beeper to yy

xx: Device ID or IP

address

yy: enable, disable

Set o xx RxVM yy Set output xx RxVM to

xx: Device ID or IP

address

yy: vm, vusb

Set o xx USBSecure yy Set output xx

USBSecure to yy

xx: Device ID or IP

address

yy: on, off

Set i xx PortOS yy Set input xx PortOS to

xx: Device ID or IP

address

yy: win, mac, sun, other

Comm

and Output Input Number Control Value Description

KVM over IP Matrix System User Manual

334

Set i xx OSLanguage yy Set input xx

OSLanguage to yy

xx: Device ID or IP

address

yy: english, japanese,

french, german,

spanish, korean,

chinese(traditional),

english(uk), swedish,

arabic, belgian,

canadian-bilingual,

french(canada), czech,

danish, finnish, greek,

hebrew, hungarian,

international(iso),

italian, latin american,

dutch, norwegian,

persian(farsi), polish,

portuguese, russian,

slovak, french

(switzerland), german

(switzerland),

switzerland, reserved,

turkish-q, reserved,

serbo-croatian

Set i xx videoMCastEn yy Set input xx

videoMCastEn to yy

xx: Device ID or IP

address

yy: enable, disable

Set i xx audioMCastEn yy Set input xx

audioMCastEn to yy

xx: Device ID or IP

address

yy: enable, disable

Set i xx Edid yy Set input xx Edid to yy

xx: Device ID or IP

address

yy: default, auto,

manual, remix

Set i xx VideoType yy Set input xx VideoType

to yy

xx: Device ID or IP

address

yy: dvi-d, dvi-a

Comm

and Output Input Number Control Value Description

Chapter 13. CLI Commands

335

Set i xx ColorDepth yy Set input xx ColorDepth

to yy

xx: Device ID or IP

address

yy: 8, 16, 24,

and 36 (only for KE89

Series)

Set i xx BandwidthLimit yy Set input xx

BandwidthLimit to yy

xx: Device ID or IP

address

yy: unlimited, 100, 200,

500

Set i xx VideoQty yy Set input xx VideoQty

to yy

xx: Device ID or IP

address

yy: 1, 2, 3, 4, 5

Set i xx BGRefresh yy Set input xx BGRefresh

to yy

xx: Device ID or IP

address

yy: off, 16, 32, 64, 128,

256

Set i xx OccupyTimeout yy Set input xx

OccupyTimeout to yy

xx: Device ID or IP

address

yy: 1~240

Comm

and Output Input Number Control Value Description

KVM over IP Matrix System User Manual

336

Set i xx Resolution yy Set input xx Resolution

to yy

xx: Device ID or IP

address

yy: 1920x1200,

1920x1080,

1680x1050,

1600x1200, 1600x900,

1440x900, 1400x1050,

1366x768, 1280x1024,

1280x960, 1280x720,

1152x864, 1024x768,

800x600, 720x400,

640x480, 2560x1080*,

3840x2160*,

1920x1440*,

2560x1600*,

2560x1440*,

2048x1536*

*Only for KE89 Series

Comm

and Output Input Number Control Value Description

337

Appendix

Safety Instructions

General

This product is for indoor use only.

Read all of these instructions. Save them for future reference.

Follow all warnings and instructions marked on the device.

Do not place the device on any unstable surface (cart, stand, table, etc.). If

the device falls, serious damage will result.

Do not use the device near water.

Do not place the device near, or over, radiators or heat registers.

The device cabinet is provided with slots and openings to allow for

adequate ventilation. To ensure reliable operation, and to protect against

overheating, these openings must never be blocked or covered.



The device should never be placed on a soft surface (bed, sofa, rug, etc.) as

this will block its ventilation openings. Likewise, the device should not be

placed in a built in enclosure unless adequate ventilation has been provided.



Never spill liquid of any kind on the device.



Avoid circuit overloads. Before connecting equipment to a circuit, know

the power supply’s limit and never exceed it. Always review the electrical

specifications of a circuit to ensure that you are not creating a dangerous

condition or that one doesn’t already exist. Circuit overloads can cause a

fire and destroy equipment.



Unplug the device from the wall outlet before cleaning. Do not use liquid

or aerosol cleaners. Use a damp cloth for cleaning.



The device should be operated from the type of power source indicated on

the marking label. If you are not sure of the type of power available,

consult your dealer or local power company.



To prevent damage to your installation it is important that all devices are

properly grounded.



Do not allow anything to rest on the power cord or cables. Route the

power cord and cables so that they cannot be stepped on or tripped over.



Position system cables and power cables carefully; Be sure that nothing

rests on any cables.

UPS User Manual

338



Never push objects of any kind into or through cabinet slots. They may

touch dangerous voltage points or short out parts resulting in a risk of fire

or electrical shock.



Do not attempt to service the device yourself. Refer all servicing to

qualified service personnel.



If the following conditions occur, unplug the device from the wall outlet

and bring it to qualified service personnel for repair.



The power cord or plug has become damaged or frayed.



Liquid has been spilled into the device.



The device has been exposed to rain or water.



The device has been dropped, or the cabinet has been damaged.



The device exhibits a distinct change in performance, indicating a need

for service.



The device does not operate normally when the operating instructions

are followed.



Only adjust those controls that are covered in the operating instructions.

Improper adjustment of other controls may result in damage that will

require extensive work by a qualified technician to repair.

Appendix

339

Rack Mounting

Before working on the rack, make sure that the stabilizers are secured to

the rack, extended to the floor, and that the full weight of the rack rests on

the floor. Install front and side stabilizers on a single rack or front

stabilizers for joined multiple racks before working on the rack.

Always load the rack from the bottom up, and load the heaviest item in the

rack first.

Make sure that the rack is level and stable before extending a device from

the rack.

Use caution when pressing the device rail release latches and sliding a

device into or out of a rack; the slide rails can pinch your fingers.

After a device is inserted into the rack, carefully extend the rail into a

locking position, and then slide the device into the rack.

Do not overload the AC supply branch circuit that provides power to the

rack. The total rack load should not exceed 80 percent of the branch circuit

rating.

Make sure that all equipment used on the rack – including power strips and

other electrical connectors – is properly grounded.

Ensure that proper airflow is provided to devices in the rack.

Ensure that the operating ambient temperature of the rack environment

does not exceed the maximum ambient temperature specified for the

equipment by the manufacturer.

Do not step on or stand on any device when servicing other devices in a

rack.

UPS User Manual

340

Technical Support

International

For online technical support – including troubleshooting, documentation,

and software updates: http://support.aten.com

For telephone support, see Telephone Support, page iii.

North America

When you contact us, please have the following information ready beforehand:

Product model number, serial number, and date of purchase.

Your computer configuration, including operating system, revision level,

expansion cards, and software.

Any error messages displayed at the time the error occurred.

The sequence of operations that led up to the error.

Any other information you feel may be of help.

Email Support support@aten-usa.com

Online

Technical

Support

Troubleshooting

Documentation

Software Updates

http://www.aten-usa.com/support

Telephone Support 1-888-999-ATEN ext 4988

1-949-428-1111

Appendix

341

Specifications

KE6900T / KE6940T

Function KE6900T KE6940T

Connectors Console

Ports

Keyboard 1 x USB Type A Female (White)

Video 1 x DVI-I Female

(White)

2 x DVI-I Female

(White)

Mouse 1 x USB Type A Female (White)

Speaker 1 x Mini Stereo Jack Female (Green)

Mic. 1 x Mini Stereo Jack Female (Pink)

RS-232 1 x DB-9 Male (Black)

KVM

Ports

KB / Mouse USB Type B Female (White)

Speaker 1 x Mini Stereo Jack (Green)

Mic. 1 x Mini Stereo Jack (Pink)

Video 1 x DVI-I Female

(White)

2 x DVI-I Female

(White)

RS-232 1 x DB-9 Female (Black)

Power 1 x DC Jack (Black)

LAN 1 x RJ-45 Female (Black)

Switches Function 1 x Slide switch (Black)

(Auto, RS-232 Config, Local)

Reset 1 x Semi-recessed Pushbutton

LEDs LAN 1 (Green / Orange)

Power 1 x Blue

Local 1 x Green

Remote 1 x Green

Emulation Keyboard / Mouse USB

Power Consumption DC 5V, 7.34W DC 5V, 8.91W

Video Resolution Up to 1920 x 1200

Environment Operating Temp. 0–50ºC

Storage Temp. -20–60ºC

Humidity 0–95% RH, Non-condensing

UPS User Manual

342

Physical

Properties

Housing Metal

Weight 1.14 kg 1.15 kg

Dimensions

(L x W x H)

21.50 x 16.29 x 4.18 cm

Function KE6900T KE6940T

Appendix

343

KE6900R / KE6940R

Function KE6900R KE6940R

Connectors USB Virtual Media 2 x USB Type A Female (White)

Console

Ports

Keyboard 1 x USB Type A Female (White)

Video 1 x DVI-I Female

(White)

2 x DVI-I Female

(White)

Mouse 1 x USB Type A Female (White)

Speaker 1 x Mini Stereo Jack Female (Green)

Mic. 1 x Mini Stereo Jack Female (Pink)

RS-232 1 x DB-9 Male (Black)

Power 1 x DC Jack (Black)

LAN 1 x RJ-45 Female (Black)

Switches OSD 1 x Pushbutton

Video 1 x Pushbutton

Graphics 1 x Pushbutton

Function 1 x Slide Switch (Black)

(Extension, RS-232 Config)

Reset 1 x Semi-recessed Pushbutton

LEDs LAN 1 (Green / Orange)

Power 1 x Blue

Local 1 x Green

Remote 1 x Green

Emulation Keyboard / Mouse USB

Power Consumption DC 5V, 6.9W DC 5V, 9.53W

Video Resolution Up to 1920 x 1200

Environment Operating Temp. 0–50ºC

Storage Temp. -20–60ºC

Humidity 0–95% RH, Non-condensing

Physical

Properties

Housing Metal

Weight 1.25 kg 1.25 kg

Dimensions

(L x W x H)

22.75 x 17.16 x 5.48 cm

UPS User Manual

344

KE6900AT / KE6940AT

Function KE6900AT KE6940AT

Connectors Console

Ports

Keyboard 1 x USB Type A Female (White)

Video 1 x DVI-I Female

(White)

2 x DVI-I Female

(White)

Mouse 1 x USB Type A Female (White)

Speaker 1 x Mini Stereo Jack Female (Green)

Mic. 1 x Mini Stereo Jack Female (Pink)

RS-232 1 x DB-9 Male (Black)

KVM

Ports

KB / Mouse 1 x USB Type B Female (White)

Speaker 1 x Mini Stereo Jack (Green)

Mic. 1 x Mini Stereo Jack (Pink)

Video 1 x DVI-I Female

(White)

2 x DVI-I Female

(White)

RS-232 1 x DB-9 Female (Black)

Power 2 x DC Jack (Black)

LAN 1 x RJ-45 Female (Black)

1 x SFP Slot

Switches Function 1 x Slide switch (Black)

(Auto, RS-232 Config/Access Control, Local)

Reset 1 x Semi-recessed Pushbutton

LEDs LAN 1 (10: Orange / 100: Orange & Green / 1000:

Green)

Power 1 x Blue

Local 1 x Green

Remote 1 x Green

Emulation Keyboard / Mouse USB

Power Consumption DC 5V, 7.95W DC 5V, 12.2W

Video Resolution Up to 1920 x 1200 @ 60Hz

Environment Operating Temp. 0–50ºC

Storage Temp. -20–60ºC

Humidity 0–95% RH, Non-condensing

Appendix

345

Physical

Properties

Housing Metal

Weight 1.15 kg (2.53 lb) 1.17 kg (2.58 lb)

Dimensions

(L x W x H)

21.50 x 16.33 x 4.18 cm

(8.46 x 6.43 x 1.65 in.)

Function KE6900AT KE6940AT

UPS User Manual

346

KE6900AR / KE6940AR

Function KE6900AR KE6940AR

Connectors USB Virtual Media 2 x USB Type A Female (White)

Console

Ports

Keyboard 1 x USB Type A Female (White)

Video 1 x DVI-I Female

(White)

2 x DVI-I Female

(White)

Mouse 1 x USB Type A Female (White)

Speaker 1 x Mini Stereo Jack Female (Green)

Mic. 1 x Mini Stereo Jack Female (Pink)

RS-232 1 x DB-9 Male (Black)

Power 2 x DC Jack (Black)

LAN 1 x RJ-45 Female (Black)

1 x SFP Slot

Switches OSD 1 x Pushbutton

Video 1 x Pushbutton

Graphics 1 x Pushbutton

Function 1 x Slide Switch (Black)

(Extension, RS-232 Config)

Reset 1 x Semi-recessed Pushbutton

LEDs LAN 1 (10: Orange / 100: Orange & Green / 1000:

Green)

Power 1 x Blue

Local 1 x Green

Remote 1 x Green

Emulation Keyboard / Mouse USB

Power Consumption DC 5V, 6.35W DC 5V, 8.51W

Video Resolution Up to 1920 x 1200 @ 60Hz

Environment Operating Temp. 0–50ºC

Storage Temp. -20–60ºC

Humidity 0–95% RH, Non-condensing

Physical

Properties

Housing Metal

Weight 1.30 kg (2.86 lb) 1.31 kg (2.89 lb)

Dimensions

(L x W x H)

22.75 x 17.16 x 5.48 cm

(8.96 x 6.76 x 2.16 in.)

Appendix

347

KE6900AiT / KE6940AiT

Function KE6900AiT KE6940AiT

Connectors Console

Ports

Keyboard 1 x USB Type A Female (White)

Video 1 x DVI-I Female

(White)

2 x DVI-I Female

(White)

Mouse 1 x USB Type A Female (White)

Speaker 1 x Mini Stereo Jack Female (Green)

Mic. 1 x Mini Stereo Jack Female (Pink)

RS-232 1 x DB-9 Male (Black)

KVM

Ports

KB / Mouse 1 x USB Type B Female (White)

Speaker 1 x Mini Stereo Jack (Green)

Mic. 1 x Mini Stereo Jack (Pink)

Video 1 x DVI-I Female

(White)

2 x DVI-I Female

(White)

RS-232 1 x DB-9 Female (Black)

Power 2 x DC Jack (Black)

LAN 1 x RJ-45 Female (Black)

1 x SFP Slot

Internet Port 1 x RJ-45 Female (Black)

Switches Function 1 x Slide switch (Black)

(Auto, RS-232 Config/Access Control, Local)

Reset 1 x Semi-recessed Pushbutton

LEDs LAN 1 (10: Orange / 100: Orange & Green / 1000:

Green)

Power 1 x Blue

Local 1 x Green

Remote 1 x Green

Emulation Keyboard / Mouse USB

Power Consumption DC 12V:12W:60BTU DC 12V: 18.36W:

90BTU

Video Resolution Up to 1920 x 1200 @ 60Hz

Environment Operating Temp. 0–50ºC

Storage Temp. -20–60ºC

Humidity 0–95% RH, Non-condensing

UPS User Manual

348

Physical

Properties

Housing Metal

Weight 1.16 kg (2.56 lb) 1.18 kg (2.60 lb)

Dimensions

(L x W x H)

21.50 x 16.33 x 4.18 cm

(8.46 x 6.43 x 1.65 in.)

Function KE6900AiT KE6940AiT

Appendix

349

KE6900ST

Function KE6900ST

Connectors

KVM

Ports

KB / Mouse USB Type B Female (White)

Video 1 x DVI-D Male (White)

RS-232 1 x DB-9 Female (Black)

Power 1 x DC Jack (Black)

LAN 1 x RJ-45 Female (Black)

Switch Reset 1 x Semi-recessed Pushbutton

LEDs LAN 1 (Green / Orange)

Power 1 x Blue

Emulation Keyboard / Mouse USB

Power Consumption 5 V / 7.3 W

Video Resolution Up to 1920 x 1200

Environment Operating Temp. 0–50ºC

Storage Temp. -20–60ºC

Humidity 0–95% RH, Non-condensing

Physical

Properties

Housing Metal

Weight 0.43 kg

Dimensions

(L x W x H)

14.39 x 10.30 x 3.00 cm

UPS User Manual

350

KE6910

Function KE6910R KE6910T

Connectors Virtual Media 2 x USB Type A Female

(White)

N/A

Console Ports 2 x USB Type A Female

(White)

2 x USB Type A Female

(White)

1 x DVI-D Female (White) 1 x DVI-D Female (White)

1 x Mini Stereo Jack

(Green)

1 x Mini Stereo Jack

(Green)

1 x Mini Stereo Jack

(Pink)

1 x Mini Stereo Jack

(Pink)

1 x DB-9 Male (Black) 1 x DB-9 Male (Black)

KVM Ports N/A 1 x USB Type B Female

(White)

1 x DVI-D Female (White)

1 x Mini Stereo Jack

(Green)

1 x Mini Stereo Jack

(Pink)

1 x DB-9 Male (Black)

Power 2 x DC Jack (Black) 2 x DC Jack (Black)

LAN 1 x RJ-45 (Black)

1 x SFP Slot

Switches OSD 1 x Pushbutton N/A

Video 1 x Pushbutton N/A

Graphics 1 x Pushbutton N/A

Reset 1 x Semi-recessed Pushbutton

Mode

Selection

1 x Slide Switch

(Extension, RS-232 Con-

fig)

1 x Slide Switch

(Auto, RS-232 Config/

Access Control, Local)

LEDs 10/100/1000

Mbps

1 (10: Orange / 100: Orange & Green / 1000: Green)

Power 1 x Blue

Local 1 x Green

Remote 1 x Green

Emulation Keyboard /

Mouse

USB

Appendix

351

Power Consumption DC 5V, 9.02 W DC 5V, 10.02 W

Video Resolution Up to 2560 x 2048 @ 50 Hz

Environment Operating

Te m p .

0–50ºC

Storage

Te m p .

-20–60ºC

Humidity 0–95% RH, Non-condensing

Physical

Properties

Housing Metal

Weight 1.26 kg 1.13 kg

Dimensions

(L x W x H)

22.75 x 17.16 x 5.48 cm 21.5 x 16.33 x 4.18 cm

Function KE6910R KE6910T

UPS User Manual

352

KE6912

Function KE6912R KE6912T

Connectors Virtual Media 2 x USB Type A Female

(White)

N/A

Console Ports 2 x USB Type A Female

(White)

2 x USB Type A Female

(White)

1 x DVI-D Female (White) 1 x DVI-D Female (White)

1 x Mini Stereo Jack

(Green)

1 x Mini Stereo Jack

(Green)

1 x Mini Stereo Jack

(Pink)

1 x Mini Stereo Jack

(Pink)

1 x DB-9 Male (Black) 1 x DB-9 Male (Black)

KVM Ports N/A 1 x USB Type B Female

(White)

1 x DVI-D Female (White)

1 x Mini Stereo Jack

(Green)

1 x Mini Stereo Jack

(Pink)

1 x DB-9 Male (Black)

Power 1 x DC Jack (Black)

1 x RJ-45 (Black, PoE)

1 x DC Jack (Black)

1 x RJ-45 (Black, PoE)

LAN 1 x RJ-45 (Black, PoE)

1 x SFP Slot

1 x RJ-45 (Black, PoE)

1 x SFP Slot

Switches OSD 1 x Pushbutton N/A

Video 1 x Pushbutton N/A

Graphics 1 x Pushbutton N/A

Reset 1 x Semi-recessed Pushbutton

Mode

Selection

1 x Slide Switch

(Extension, RS-232 Con-

fig)

1 x Slide Switch

(Auto, RS-232 Config/

Access Control, Local)

LEDs 10/100/1000

Mbps

1 (10: Orange / 100: Orange & Green / 1000: Green)

Power 1 x Blue

Local 1 x Green

Remote 1 x Green

Emulation Keyboard /

Mouse

USB

Appendix

353

Power Consumption DC48V / 11.27W (PoE) DC48V / 12.53W (PoE)

Video Resolution Up to 2560 x 2048 @ 50 Hz

Environment Operating

Te m p .

0–50ºC

Storage

Te m p .

-20–60ºC

Humidity 0–95% RH, Non-condensing

Physical

Properties

Housing Metal

Weight 1.28 kg 1.17 kg

Dimensions

(L x W x H)

22.75 x 17.16 x 5.48 cm 21.5 x 16.33 x 4.18 cm

Function KE6912R KE6912T

UPS User Manual

354

KE6920

Function KE6920R KE6920T

Connectors Virtual Media 2 x USB Type A Female

(White)

N/A

Console Ports 2 x USB Type A Female

(White)

2 x USB Type A Female

(White)

1 x DVI-D Female (White) 1 x DVI-D Female (White)

1 x Mini Stereo Jack

(Green)

1 x Mini Stereo Jack

(Green)

1 x Mini Stereo Jack

(Pink)

1 x Mini Stereo Jack

(Pink)

1 x DB-9 Male (Black) 1 x DB-9 Male (Black)

KVM Ports N/A 1 x USB Type B Female

(White)

1 x DVI-D Female (White)

1 x Mini Stereo Jack

(Green)

1 x Mini Stereo Jack

(Pink)

1 x DB-9 Male (Black)

Power 2 x DC Jack (Black) 2 x DC Jack (Black)

LAN 1 x RJ-45 (Black)

2 x SFP Slot

Switches OSD 1 x Pushbutton N/A

Video 1 x Pushbutton N/A

Graphics 1 x Pushbutton N/A

Reset 1 x Semi-recessed Pushbutton

Mode

Selection

1 x Slide Switch

(Extension, RS-232 Con-

fig)

1 x Slide Switch

(Auto, RS-232 Config/

Access Control, Local)

LEDs 10/100/1000

Mbps

1 (10: Orange / 100: Orange & Green / 1000: Green)

Power 1 x Blue

Local 1 x Green

Remote 1 x Green

Emulation Keyboard /

Mouse

USB

Appendix

355

Power Consumption DC 5V, 8.86 W DC 5V, 10.87 W

Video Resolution Up to 2560 x 2048 @ 50 Hz / 2560 x 1600 @ 60 Hz

Environment Operating

Te m p .

0–50ºC

Storage

Te m p .

-20–60ºC

Humidity 0–95% RH, Non-condensing

Physical

Properties

Housing Metal

Weight 1.27 kg (2.8 lb) 1.15 kg (2.53 lb)

Dimensions

(L x W x H)

22.75 x 17.16 x 5.48 cm

(8.96 x 6.76 x 2.16 in.)

21.50 x 16.33 x 4.18 cm

(8.46 x 6.43 x 1.65 in.)

Function KE6920R KE6920T

UPS User Manual

356

KE6922

Function KE6922R KE6922T

Connectors Virtual Media 2 x USB Type A Female

(White)

N/A

Console Ports 2 x USB Type A Female

(White)

2 x USB Type A Female

(White)

1 x DVI-D Female (White) 1 x DVI-D Female (White)

1 x Mini Stereo Jack

(Green)

1 x Mini Stereo Jack

(Green)

1 x Mini Stereo Jack

(Pink)

1 x Mini Stereo Jack

(Pink)

1 x DB-9 Male (Black) 1 x DB-9 Male (Black)

KVM Ports N/A 1 x USB Type B Female

(White)

1 x DVI-D Female (White)

1 x Mini Stereo Jack

(Green)

1 x Mini Stereo Jack

(Pink)

1 x DB-9 Male (Black)

Power 2 x DC Jack (Black)

1 x RJ-45 (Black, PoE)

2 x DC Jack (Black)

1 x RJ-45 (Black, PoE)

LAN 1 x RJ-45 (Black, PoE)

2 x SFP Slot

1 x RJ-45 (Black, PoE)

2 x SFP Slot

Switches OSD 1 x Pushbutton N/A

Video 1 x Pushbutton N/A

Graphics 1 x Pushbutton N/A

Reset 1 x Semi-recessed Pushbutton

Mode

Selection

1 x Slide Switch

(Extension, RS-232 Con-

fig)

1 x Slide Switch

(Auto, RS-232 Config/

Access Control, Local)

LEDs 10/100/1000

Mbps

1 (10: Orange / 100: Orange & Green / 1000: Green)

Power 1 x Blue

Local 1 x Green

Remote 1 x Green

Emulation Keyboard /

Mouse

USB

Appendix

357

Power Consumption DC48V / 11.54W DC48V / 13.59W

Video Resolution Up to 2560 x 2048 @ 50 Hz / 2560 x 1600 @ 60 Hz

Environment Operating

Te m p .

0–50ºC

Storage

Te m p .

-20–60ºC

Humidity 0–95% RH, Non-condensing

Physical

Properties

Housing Metal

Weight 1.30 kg (2.86 lb) 1.18 kg (2.6 lb)

Dimensions

(L x W x H)

22.75 x 17.16 x 5.48 cm

(8.96 x 6.76 x 2.16 in.)

21.50 x 16.33 x 4.18 cm

(8.46 x 6.43 x 1.65 in.)

Function KE6922R KE6922T

UPS User Manual

358

KE8900S

Function KE8900SR KE8900ST

Connectors Virtual Media 2 x USB Type A Female

(Black)

N/A

Console Ports 2 x USB Type A Female

(Black)

N/A

1 x HDMI Female (Black)

1 x DB-9 Male (Black)

KVM Ports N/A 1 x USB Type B Female

(White)

1 x HDMI Female (Black)

1 x DB-9 Male (Black)

Power 1 x DC Jack (Black) 1 x DC Jack (Black)

1 x 3-Pole Terminal Block

Connector (Green)

LAN 1 x RJ-45 (Black)

Switches Reset 1 x Semi-recessed Pushbutton

LEDs 10/100/1000

Mbps

1 (10: Orange / 100: Orange & Green / 1000: Green)

Power 1 x Blue

Emulation Keyboard /

Mouse

USB

Power Consumption DC 5V, 4.35 W DC 5V, 3.8 W

DC 48V, 5.53 W

Video Resolution Up to 1920 x 1200 @ 60 Hz

Environment Operating

Temp.

0–50ºC

Storage

Temp.

-20–60ºC

Humidity 0–95% RH, Non-condensing

Physical

Properties

Housing Metal

Weight 0.64 kg 0.65 kg

Dimensions

(L x W x H)

18.20 x 11.75 x 2.87 cm

Appendix

359

KE8950T / KE8952T

Function KE8950T KE8952T

Connectors Console

Ports

Keyboard 1 x USB Type A Female (White)

Video 1 x HDMI Female (Silver)

Mouse 1 x USB Type A Female (White)

Speaker 1 x Mini Stereo Jack Female (Green)

Mic. 1 x Mini Stereo Jack Female (Pink)

RS-232 1 x DB-9 Male (Black)

KVM

Ports

KB / Mouse 1 x USB Type B Female (White)

Speaker 1 x Mini Stereo Jack (Green)

Mic. 1 x Mini Stereo Jack (Pink)

Video 1 x HDMI Female (Silver)

RS-232 1 x DB-9 Female (Black)

LAN 1 x RJ-45 Female

(Black)

1 x RJ-45 Female

(Black; PoE)

LAN 1 x SFP Module Female (Black)

Power 1 x DC Jack (Black)

Switches Function 1 x Slide Switch (Black)

(Auto, RS-232 Config, Local)

Reset 1 x Semi-recessed Pushbutton

LEDs LAN 1 (10: Orange / 100: Orange & Green / 1000:

Green)

Power 1 x Blue

Local 1 x Green

Remote 1 x Green

Emulation Keyboard / Mouse USB

Power Consumption DC 5V, 7.22 W DC48V, 9.02W (PoE)

Video Resolution Up to 3840 x 2160 @ 30 Hz (4:4:4)

Environment Operating Temp. 0–50ºC

Storage Temp. -20–60ºC

Humidity 0–95% RH, Non-condensing

Physical

Properties

Housing Metal

Weight 1.10 kg (2.42 lb) 1.13 kg (2.49 lb)

Dimensions

(L x W x H)

21.50 x 16.29 x 4.18 cm

(8.46 x 6.41 x 1.65 in.)

UPS User Manual

360

KE8950R / KE8952R

Function KE8950R KE8952R

Connectors USB Virtual Media 2 x USB Type A Female (White)

Console

Ports

Keyboard 1 x USB Type A Female (White)

Video 1 x HDMI Female (Silver)

Mouse 1 x USB Type A Female (White)

Speaker 1 x Mini Stereo Jack Female (Green)

Mic. 1 x Mini Stereo Jack Female (Pink)

RS-232 1 x DB-9 Male (Black)

LAN 1 x RJ-45 Female

(Black)

1 x RJ-45 Female

(Black; PoE)

LAN 1 x SFP Module Female (Black)

Power 1 x DC Jack (Black)

Switches OSD 1 x Pushbutton

Video 1 x Pushbutton

Graphics 1 x Pushbutton

Function 1 x Slide Switch (Black)

(Extension, RS-232 Config)

Reset 1 x Semi-recessed Pushbutton

LEDs LAN 1 (10: Orange / 100: Orange & Green / 1000:

Green)

Power 1 x Blue

Local 1 x Green

Remote 1 x Green

Emulation Keyboard / Mouse USB

Power Consumption DC 5V, 5.65 W DC48V, 7.06W (PoE)

Video Resolution Up to 3840 x 2160 @ 30 Hz (4:4:4)

Environment Operating Temp. 0–50ºC

Storage Temp. -20–60ºC

Humidity 0–95% RH, Non-condensing

Physical

Properties

Housing Metal

Weight 1.23 kg (2.71 lb) 1.26 kg (2.78 lb)

Dimensions

(L x W x H)

22.75 x 17.16 x 5.48 cm

(8.96 x 6.76 x 2.16 in.)

Appendix

361

KE9900ST

Function KE9900ST

Connectors KVM Ports 1 x USB Type B Female (White)

1 x DisplayPort Female (Black)

1 x DB-9 Male (Black)

Power 1 x DC Jack (Black)

1 x 3-Pole Terminal Block Connector (Green)

LAN 1 x RJ-45 (Black)

Switches Reset 1 x Semi-recessed Pushbutton

LEDs 10/100/1000 Mbps 1 (10: Orange / 100: Orange & Green / 1000:

Green)

Power 1 x Blue

Emulation Keyboard / Mouse USB

Power Consumption DC 5V, 4.75 W; DC 48V, 6.97 W

Video Resolution Up to 1920 x 1200 @ 60 Hz

Environment Operating Temp. 0–50ºC

Storage Temp. -20–60ºC

Humidity 0–95% RH, Non-condensing

Physical

Properties

Housing Metal

Weight 0.65 kg (1.43 lb)

Dimensions

(L x W x H)

18.20 x 11.75 x 2.87 cm

(7.17 x 4.63 x 1.13 in.)

UPS User Manual

362

KE9950

Function KE9950R KE9950T

Connectors Virtual Media 2 x USB Type A Female

(White)

N/A

Console Ports 2 x USB Type A Female (White)

1 x DisplayPort Female (Black)

1 x Mini Stereo Jack (Green)

1 x Mini Stereo Jack (Pink)

1 x DB-9 Male (Black)

KVM Ports N/A 1 x USB Type B Female

(White)

1 x DisplayPort Female

(Black)

1 x Mini Stereo Jack

(Green)

1 x Mini Stereo Jack

(Pink)

1 x DB-9 Male (Black)

Power 2 x DC Jack (Black)

LAN 1 x RJ-45 (Black)

1 x SFP Slot

Switches OSD 1 x Pushbutton N/A

Video 1 x Pushbutton N/A

Graphics 1 x Pushbutton N/A

Reset 1 x Semi-recessed Pushbutton

Mode

Selection

1 x Slide Switch

(Extension, RS-232 Con-

fig)

1 x Slide Switch

(Auto, RS-232 Config/

Access Control, Local)

LEDs 10/100/1000

Mbps

1 (10: Orange / 100: Orange & Green / 1000: Green)

Power 1 x Blue

Local 1 x Green

Remote 1 x Green

Emulation Keyboard /

Mouse

USB

Power Consumption DC 5V, 8.03 W DC 5V, 9.51 W

Video Resolution Up to 3840 x 2160 @ 30 Hz

Appendix

363

Environment Operating

Te m p .

0–50ºC

Storage

Te m p .

-20–60ºC

Humidity 0–95% RH, Non-condensing

Physical

Properties

Housing Metal

Weight 1.24 kg (2.73 lb) 1.12 kg (2.47 lb)

Dimensions

(L x W x H)

22.75 x 17.16 x 5.48 cm

(8.96 x 6.76 x 2.16 in.)

21.50 x 16.29 x 4.18 cm

(8.46 x 6.41 x 1.65 in.)

Function KE9950R KE9950T

UPS User Manual

364

KE9952

Function KE9952R KE9952T

Connectors Virtual Media 2 x USB Type A Female

(White)

N/A

Console Ports 2 x USB Type A Female (White)

1 x DisplayPort Female (Black)

1 x Mini Stereo Jack (Green)

1 x Mini Stereo Jack (Pink)

1 x DB-9 Male (Black)

KVM Ports N/A 1 x USB Type B Female

(White)

1 x DisplayPort Female

(Black)

1 x Mini Stereo Jack

(Green)

1 x Mini Stereo Jack

(Pink)

1 x DB-9 Male (Black)

Power 1 x DC Jack (Black)

1 x RJ-45 (Black, PoE)

1 x DC Jack (Black)

1 x RJ-45 (Black, PoE)

LAN 1 x RJ-45 (Black, PoE)

1 x SFP Slot

1 x RJ-45 (Black, PoE)

1 x SFP Slot

Switches OSD 1 x Pushbutton N/A

Video 1 x Pushbutton

Graphics 1 x Pushbutton

Reset 1 x Semi-recessed Pushbutton

Mode

Selection

1 x Slide Switch

(Extension, RS-232 Con-

fig)

1 x Slide Switch

(Auto, RS-232 Config/

Access Control, Local)

LEDs 10/100/1000

Mbps

1 (10: Orange / 100: Orange & Green / 1000: Green)

Power 1 x Blue

Local 1 x Green

Remote 1 x Green

Emulation Keyboard /

Mouse

USB

Power Consumption DC48V / 10.04W (PoE) DC48V / 11.88W (PoE)

Appendix

365

Video Resolution Up to 3840 x 2160 @ 30 Hz

Environment Operating

Te m p .

0–50ºC

Storage

Te m p .

-20–60ºC

Humidity 0–95% RH, Non-condensing

Physical

Properties

Housing Metal

Weight 1.27 kg (2.8 lb) 1.15 kg (2.53 lb)

Dimensions

(L x W x H)

22.75 x 17.16 x 5.48 cm

(8.96 x 6.76 x 2.16 in.)

21.50 x 16.29 x 4.18 cm

(8.46 x 6.41 x 1.65 in.)

Function KE9952R KE9952T

UPS User Manual

366

Optional Rack Mounting

For convenience and flexibility, three optional rack mounting kits are available

as shown in the following table:

*Supports KE6900/KE6900A/KE6910/KE6912/KE6920/KE6922/KE6940/

KE6940A/KE8950/KE8952/KE9950/KE9952.

**Please refer to VE-RMK 1U User Manual on how to mount these units.

Dual Rack Mounting

The 2X-021G Dual Rack Mounting Kit installs two KE6900/KE6900A/

KE6910/KE6912/KE6920/KE6922/KE6940/KE6940A/KE8950/KE8952/

KE9950/KE9952 units side by side in 1U of server rack space.

Transmitter Dual Rack Mounting

KE8950T is the example used here.

1. Remove four screws from the units and then use the same screws to secure

the units together with the link bracket provided with the kit.

Mounting Type Model

Dual Rack Mount Kit* 2X-021G

Single Rack Mount Kit* 2X-031G

Video Extender Rack Mount Kit**

(for KE6900ST, KE8900ST,

KE8900SR and KE9900ST)

VE-RMK 1U

Appendix

367

2. Remove the bottom and side screws from each unit.

3. Use the screws in step 2 to install the left and right mounting brackets.

4. Screw the mounting brackets to the rack.

UPS User Manual

368

Receiver Dual Rack Mounting

KE8950R is the example used here.

1. Remove the eight screws and plastic guards from the receiver units.

2. Remove four screws from the units and then use the same screws to secure

the units together with the link bracket provided with the kit.

Appendix

369

3. Remove the bottom and side screws from each unit.

4. Use the screws in step 3 to install the left and right mounting brackets.

5. Screw the mounting brackets to the rack.

UPS User Manual

370

Single Rack Mounting

The 2X-031G Single Rack Mounting kit installs one KE6900/KE6940/

KE8950/KE8952 unit in 1U of server rack space.

1. Remove the eight screws and plastic guards from the unit (Receiver units

only).

2. Remove the bottom and side screws from the unit.

Appendix

371

3. Use the screws in step 2 to install the right and left mounting brackets.

4. Screw the mounting brackets to the rack.

UPS User Manual

372

IP Installer

From a client computer running Windows, an IP address for a transmitter or

receiver can be assigned with the IP Installer utility. The utility can be obtained

from the Download area of our website or from the product page on the

Software & Driver tab. After downloading the utility to your client computer,

do the following:

1. Unzip the contents of IPInstaller.zip to a directory on your hard drive.

2. Go to the directory that you unzipped the IPInstaller program to and run

IPInstaller.exe. A dialog box similar to the one below appears:

3. Select the Transmitter or Receiver in the Device List.

Note: 1. If the list is empty, or your device doesn't appear, click

Enumerate to refresh the Device List.

2. If there is more than one device in the list, use the MAC address

to pick the one you want. The MAC address is located on the

devices bottom panel.

4. Select either Obtain an IP address automatically (DHCP), or Specify an

IP address. If you chose the latter, fill the IP Address, Subnet Mask, and

Gateway fields with the information appropriate to your network.

5. Click Set IP.

6. After the IP address shows up in the Device List, click Exit.

Appendix

373

Trusted Certificates

Overview

When you try to log in to the device from your browser, a Security Alert

message appears to inform you that the device’s certificate is not trusted, and

asks if you want to proceed.

The certificate can be trusted, but the alert is triggered because the certificate’s

name is not found on the Microsoft list of Trusted Authorities. You can ignore

the warning and click Yes to go on.

UPS User Manual

374

Self-Signed Private Certificates

If you wish to create your own self-signed encryption key and certificate, a free

utility – openssl.exe – is available for download over the web at

www.openssl.org. To create your private key and certificate do the following:

1. Go to the directory where you downloaded and extracted openssl.exe to.

2. Run openssl.exe with the following parameters:

openssl req -new -newkey rsa:1024 -days 3653 -nodes -x509

-keyout CA.key -out CA.cer -config openssl.cnf

Note: 1. The command should be entered all on one line (i.e., do not press

[Enter] until all the parameters have been keyed in).

2. If there are spaces in the input, surround the entry in quotes (e.g.,

“ATEN International”).

To avoid having to input information during key generation the following

additional parameters can be used:

/C /ST /L /O /OU /CN /emailAddress.

Examples

openssl req -new -newkey rsa:1024 -days 3653 -nodes -x509

-keyout CA.key -out CA.cer -config openssl.cnf -subj

“/C=yourcountry/ST=yourstateorprovince/L=yourlocationor

city/O=yourorganiztion/OU=yourorganizationalunit/

CN=yourcommonname/emailAddress=name@yourcompany.com

openssl req -new -newkey rsa:1024 -days 3653 -nodes -x509

-keyout CA.key -out CA.cer -config openssl.cnf -subj

“/C=CA/ST=BC/L=Richmond/O=ATEN International/OU=ATEN

/CN=ATEN/emailAddress=eservice@aten.com.tw

Importing the Files

After the openssl.exe program completes, two files – CA.key (the private key)

and CA.cer (the self-signed SSL certificate) – are created in the directory that

you ran the program from.

Appendix

375

Reset All Information

To reset all information (including passwords) to their default settings, follow

the steps below:

1. Power off the unit and remove its housing.

2. Use a jumper cap to short the mainboard pins labeled DEFAULT

PASSWORD. An example is shown:

3. Power on the unit.

4. After the unit is turned on, power off the unit.

5. Remove the jumper cap from the Reset pins and close the housing.

6. Power on the unit again.

After powering on the unit, you can use the default administrator

Username and Password (see Logging In, page 185) to log in.

UPS User Manual

376

Default Password Pins

The Default Password pins for different models are shown below.

KE6900ST

KE6900AR

KE6900AT

Appendix

377

KE6900AiT

KE6940AR

KE6940AT

UPS User Manual

378

KE6940AiT

KE6910R / KE6912R

KE6910T / KE6912T

Appendix

379

KE6920R / KE6922R

KE6920T / KE6922T

KE8900SR

UPS User Manual

380

KE8900ST

KE8950R / KE8952R

KE8950T / KE8952T

Appendix

381

KE9900ST

KE9950R / KE9952R

KE9950T / KE9952T

UPS User Manual

382

RS-232 Pin Assignments

Pin assignments for the Transmitter and Receiver’s rear RS-232 port that is

used for connecting to a serial terminal are given in the table, below:

Transmitter Front RS-232 Port

Pin assignments for the Transmitter’s front RS-232 port that is used for

connecting to a computer for serial control are given in the table, below:

Pin Assignment

1 N/A None

DB9 Male

2 RXD Receive Data

3 TXD Transmit Data

4 DTR Data Terminal Ready

5 GND Signal Ground

6 DSR Data Set Ready

7 RTS Request to Sent

8 CTS Clear to Sent

9 N/A None

Pin Assignment

1 N/A None

DB9 Female

2 TXD Transmit Data

3 RXD Receive Data

4 DSR Data Set Ready

5 GND Signal Ground

6 DTR Data Terminal Ready

7 CTS Clear to Sent

8 RTS Request to Sent

9 N/A None

Appendix

383

Multicast IP Address

Multicasting helps to broadcast audio and video data from a transmitter to

multiple Receivers over a network. To setup up Multicasting on a network

switch you must know the Audio and Video Multicast IP address which can be

found on the KE Transmitter. To determinate the default Multicast IP address

set by the KE device use the instructions below. The Multicast IP addresses can

be set manually using Telnet.

KE Multicast Rule

All Audio and Video Multicast IP addresses use the format: 230.X.Y.Z.

X.Y.Z relates to the Transmitter’s IP address and 230 is always the first octet

of a Multicast IP address. You use the Transmitter’s IP address to find X and

then use it to calculate the Audio and Video Multicast IP address.

Multicast IP Formula

To calculate the Audio and Video Multicast IP address, use the Transmitter’s

IP address to determine X and then use the appropriate table below to calculate

the Multicast IP address for each data stream (audio/video).

Example:

Transmitter IP Address: 172.16.27.146; (172.X.Y.Z)

X =16

If X is between 0 ~ 127

Transmitter IP XVideo

X + 128

Audio

X + 192

Multicast

Video IP

Address

Multicast

Audio IP

Address

172.16.27.146

(example)

16 16 + 128 =

144

16 + 192 =

208

230.144.27.146 230.208.27.146

___+ 128 = ___+ 192 =

230.___.___.__ 230.___.___.__

___+ 128 = ___+ 192 =

230.___.___.__ 230.___.___.__

___+ 128 = ___+ 192 =

230.___.___.__ 230.___.___.__

UPS User Manual

384

If X is between 128 ~ 192

If X is 192 or higher

Transmitter

X - 128

= A

Video

A + 128

Audio

A + 192

Multicast

Video IP

Address

Multicast

Audio IP

Address

172.168.27.14

(example)

168 - 128

= 40

40 + 128

= 168

40 + 192

= 232

230.168.27.14 230.232.27.14

___ - 128

___+ 128

___+ 192

= 230.___.___.__ 230.___.___.__

___ - 128

___+ 128

___+ 192

= 230.___.___.__ 230.___.___.__

___ - 128

___+ 128

___+ 192

= 230.___.___.__ 230.___.___.__

Transmitter

X - 192

= A

Video

A + 128

Audio

A + 192

Multicast

Video IP

Address

Multicast

Audio IP

Address

172.200.27.14

(example)

200 - 192

= 8

8 + 128

= 136

8 + 192

= 200

230.136.27.14 230.200.27.14

___ - 192

___+ 128

___+ 192

= 230.___.___.__ 230.___.___.__

___ - 192

___+ 128

___+ 192

= 230.___.___.__ 230.___.___.__

___ - 192

___+ 128

___+ 192

= 230.___.___.__ 230.___.___.__

Appendix

385

Keys to Network Performance

For optimum performance, KE Series devices requires high amounts of data to

be transferred across a network; therefore we recommend the following

strategies to setup KE Series devices. Using our suggestions will provide better

performance and the highest video resolutions possible. Use each of the keys

to ensure the best transmission of data and the highest throughput possible.

Build a Network Diagram

To build an effective KE installation, start by mapping out the layout. Create a

diagram with the KE devices, computers and routers along with how they will

be connected across the network. It also helps to write out how the devices will

interact. Use this diagram as the frame work as you decide what devices to

purchase and how to build the network effectively for the best data throughput.

Considerations:

If possible, create a private network for the KE devices

Use the same switch model throughout

Use a flat cascaded layout

Avoid a tree or pyramid structure

Limit cascades to two levels

Install network switches near each other

Minimize the distance of connections

Install KE Matrix Manager (CCKM) computer and KE devices on the

same subnet

Check the 3 Other Factors before installation

Other Factors

Choose the Right Cable

Always use Cat 5/6e Ethernet cable or higher installed by a professional

between any two devices you are installing. We recommend using ATEN

Brand Ethernet cable to ensure the quality. It’s best when installing KE devices

to use brand new Ethernet cabling for each part of the installation to ensure the

reliability of the data being transmitted. This is a key to getting the best

uninterrupted video resolution across the network.

UPS User Manual

386

Determine the Distance

Distance is an important factor when setting up networks, with a shorter

distance and fewer hops through routers, data can be transmitted more

efficiently. So whenever possible decrease the distance and direct network

traffic effectively between subnets that communicate with each other to

increase the data throughput.

Ensure the Bandwidth

Ensuring the bandwidth ahead of time will guarantee performance before

installing KE devices on a network. This will eliminate the primary cause of

problems related to video quality and transmission of data. If the speed is right

at all ends of your network, then the only other causes are derived from device

failure or limits caused by a router, switch or device setting.

Sample Network Diagram

Appendix

387

Choose a High Performance Switch

A high performance network switch is the means of a successful KE setup.

When choosing a network switch, first select the type:

Layer 2 or Layer 3 Switches

You’ll need to determine whether you need a layer 2 or a layer 3 switch for

your KE network. Layer 3 switches cost more than layer 2 switches because

they are more complex and handle more network traffic. The best way to

calculate which type of switch you need is to first determine if you will have a

dedicated network for the KE devices or if the KE devices will be on a network

that shares throughput with other network equipment such as computers,

servers and printers. If they share the network with other devices its best to

consider a layer 3 switch and use layer 2 switches exclusively for the KE device

connections. For larger installations we recommend using Layer 3 switches.

The major differences are:

Layer 3 Switch: IP addresses in packets are examined and intelligent

forwarding decisions are made. On a larger network broken into subnets

across long distances, a layer 3 switch becomes the best choice as they

can improve network efficiency and provide better traffic flow. They

are better at directing more traffic to different locations on a larger more

complex network, and with layer two switches working below them.

Layer 2 Switch: Packets are examined and forwarded using only the

MAC address. If you have a small central network, a layer 2 switch

should do the job. If the network is exclusive and will only transmit the

bandwidth of KE devices, layer 2 switches with the correct settings can

get the job done effectively.

Considerations

Number of ports

Choose a switch that has enough ports to match the number of KE devices you

will be installing. Switches typically come in 5, 8, 10, 16, 24, 28, 48, and 52-

port configurations. If you are installing 13 KE transmitters and 13 KE

receivers, you will need to purchase a switch with at least 28 ports.

Stackable verse Standalone

Stackable switches allow you to easily manage and configure ports spanning

across multiple switches that the KE devices are connected through. This

provides a centralized method to configure and troubleshoot the initial setup of

UPS User Manual

388

KE devices on a network which makes fine tuning the bandwidth, data

throughput and video quality easier. Stackable switches can be configured to

direct the KE transmissions between many units more specifically and

effectively. Standalone switches provide the same configuration features as

Stackable switches but they must be set individually.

Stackable switches provide an easy way to manage multiple switches, as one

unit. For example, instead of configuring, managing, and troubleshooting 6 28-

port switches individually, you can manage the six as if they are a single unit

using Stackable Switches. The six switches (168 ports) function as a single

switch and are managed from one web or GUI interface.

What Stackable Switches Can do:

1. Create a link aggregation group with one port in one unit of the stack and

another port of that group in another switch in the stack.

2. Select a port on one switch in the stack and mirror the traffic to a switch

port on another unit of the stack; thus copy the configuration to direct

traffic more effectively between KE devices.

3. Apply custom ACL security settings to any port on any switch in the stack.

4. Stackable switches can be setup in a ring configuration, so that if a port or

cable fails, the stack automatically routes around the failure, at

microsecond speeds. Stackable Switches also allow you to add and remove

stack “members” which are automatically updated and recognized as such.

Switch Specifications

The following specifications are recommended when choosing a layer 2 or

layer 3 switch:

1000Mbps Gigabit Ethernet switches (1000Mbps or faster Ethernet ports)

High bandwidth between switches, if possible using Fibre Channel

Layer 3 switches that efficiently processes IGMP queries

IGMP Snooping v2 or v3

Flow Control Functions

Throughput of: Full Duplex, 1Gbps up- and down- stream speeds per port

Performance of their most onerous tasks (e.g. IGMP snooping) with

multiple dedicated processors (ASICS)

Use the same switch make and model throughout each subnet

Appendix

389

The maximum number of simultaneous ‘snoopable groups’ the switch can

handle meets or exceeds the number of KE transmitters that will be used to

create Channel groups

Configuring Switches and KE Devices

Configuring the switch correctly will pass data more efficiently, allowing a

better stream across the network to each KE device. The following settings will

help optimize your network traffic through a switch:

Enable IGMP Snooping on L2 switches

Enable IGMP Querier on the L3 switch

Enable IGMP Fast-Leave on all switches where KE units are directly

connected

Enable Spanning Tree Protocol (STP) on all switches and enable Portfast

exclusively on switch ports that have KE units connected

Pick an appropriate forwarding mode on all switches. Use Cut-through if

available, or Store and Forward (see Recommended Network Switches

below)

KE transmitter Settings:

Adjust the KE transmitter settings one at a time, in small intervals, and

view the images as you do, so that you can adjust to the positive or

negative results and achieve the best quality and bandwidth possible

If the quality of color is important, set the Color Depth to 24 bits (KE69

Series) or 36 bits (KE89 Series) and manually adjust other settings until

you are satisfied with the visual appearance

If moving video images are shown frequently, increase the Video Quality

setting to the highest level and reduce the Bandwidth Limit and Color

Depth setting.

When images on the screen are more often static, increase the Background

Refresh and/or the Video Quality settings

Check that all KE units have been updated with the latest firmware version

Recommended Network Switches

Below are the network switches that have passed ATEN's stress tests using the

KE Series extenders. Our tests streamed content over a network with a

resolution of 1920 x 1200 @60Hz (KE69 Series, KE8900S, KE9900ST); 24 bit

color depth and 3840 x 2160 @30Hz (KE8950 and KE8952); 36 bit color

depth.

UPS User Manual

390

Cisco Catalyst 2960X / Catalyst 2960XR / Catalyst 3750

HP Procurve 2920

H3C S5120

Huawei S5700

DLink DGS-1510

Please refer to the FAQ link below on how to select network switches and

network switch information collected by ATEN Customer Service Division,

where the collected information includes customer's feedback from their actual

experience in using and installing the product(s).

https://eservice.aten.com/eServiceCx/Common/FAQ/view.do?id=6276

Appendix

391

Additional Mouse Synchronization Procedures

If the mouse synchronization procedures mentioned in the manual fail to

resolve mouse pointer problems for particular computers, try the following:

Windows:

Note: In order for the local and remote mouses to synchronize, you must use

the generic mouse driver supplied with the MS operating system. If you

have a third party driver installed - such as one supplied by the mouse

manufacturer - you must remove it.

1. Windows 2000:

a) Open the Mouse Properties dialog box (Control Panel

→

Mouse

→

Mouse Properties)

b) Click the Motion tab

c) Bring the mouse speed to the middle position (6 units in from the left)

d) Set the mouse acceleration to None

2. Windows XP / Windows Server 2003 / Windows 7 / Windows 8 /

Windows 10:

a) Open the Mouse Properties dialog box (Control Panel

→

Mouse)

(For Windows 10, click Start

→

Devices

→

Mouse

→

Additional

mouse options)

UPS User Manual

392

b) Click the Pointer Options tab

c) Bring the mouse speed to the middle position (6 units in from the left)

d) Disable Enhance Pointer Precision

3. Windows ME:

Set the mouse speed to the middle position; disable mouse acceleration

(click Advanced to get the dialog box for this).

4. Windows NT / Windows 98 / Windows 95:

Set the mouse speed to the slowest position.

Sun / Linux

Open a terminal session and issue the following command:

Sun: xset m 1

Linux: xset m 0

xset m 1

(If one does not help, try the other.)

Appendix

393

Virtual Media Support

WinClient ActiveX Viewer / WinClient AP

IDE CDROM/DVD-ROM Drives – Read Only

IDE Hard Drives – Read Only

USB CDROM/DVD-ROM Drives – Read Only

USB Hard Drives – Read/Write*

USB Flash Drives – Read/Write*

USB Floppy Drives – Read/Write

*These drives can be mounted either as Drives or Removable Disks

(see Virtual Media, page 295). Mounting them as removable disks allow

booting the remote server if the disk contains a bootable OS. In addition,

if the disk contains more than one partition, the remote server can access

all the partitions.

ISO Files – Read Only

Folders – Read/Write

Smart Card Readers

Java Applet Viewer / Java Client AP

ISO Files – Read Only

Folders – Read/Write

Note: 1. The Java Client supports Virtual Media in the same way as WinClient

does – however, the account should have Administrator level

privilege.

2. Folder mapping uses a FAT16 file system, so there is a 2G limitation.

Virtual Media only supports ISO files less than 4G.

UPS User Manual

394

Setup CCKM Server IP address on Windows

1. Select Network and Sharing Center and click Change adapter settings.

2. Right-click Local Area Connection and select Properties.

3. In the Local Area Connection Properties window, highlight Internet

Protocol Version 4 (TCP/IPv4) then click Properties.

4. Select Use the following IP address and enter in the IP for the CCKM

server (e.g. any IP address not in use, and in between 192.168.0.2 and

192.168.0.253)*, Subnet Mask (e.g. 255.255.255.0), and Default Gateway

that corresponds with your network setup.

5. Click OK to change the CCKM server’s IP address.

Note: Make sure the CCKM server's IP address is not a duplicate to prevent

IP address conflict.

To connect to the CCKM server via web browser, enter the CCKM IP address

and port number (default: 8443). For example, if the CCKM IP address is

192.168.0.10, then enter https://192.168.0.10: 8443.

If you have a 2nd NIC, please follow the following steps.

6. Select Network and Sharing Center and click Change adapter settings.

7. Right-click Local Area Connection for the 2nd NIC and select

Properties.

8. In the Local Area Connection Properties window, highlight Internet

Protocol Version 4 (TCP/IPv4) then click Properties.

9. Select Use the following IP address and enter in the IP of the 2nd subnet

for the CCKM server (e.g. any IP address not in use, and in between

192.168.1.2 and 192.168.1.253)*, Subnet Mask (e.g. 255.255.255.0), and

Default Gateway that corresponds with your network setup.

10. Click OK to change the CCKM server’s IP address of the 2nd subnet.

Appendix

395

Limited Warranty

ATEN warrants its hardware in the country of purchase against flaws in

materials and workmanship for a Warranty Period of two [2] years (warranty

period may vary in certain regions/countries) commencing on the date of

original purchase. This warranty period includes the LCD panel of ATEN LCD

KVM switches. Select products are warranted for an additional year (see A+

Warranty for further details). Cables and accessories are not covered by the

Standard Warranty.

What is covered by the Limited Hardware Warranty

ATEN will provide a repair service, without charge, during the Warranty

Period. If a product is detective, ATEN will, at its discretion, have the option

to (1) repair said product with new or repaired components, or (2) replace the

entire product with an identical product or with a similar product which fulfills

the same function as the defective product. Replaced products assume the

warranty of the original product for the remaining period or a period of 90 days,

whichever is longer. When the products or components are replaced, the

replacing articles shall become customer property and the replaced articles

shall become the property of ATEN.

To learn more about our warranty policies, please visit our website:

http://www.aten.com/global/en/legal/policies/warranty-policy/

Table of Contents

ATEN KE6900AR User Manual

Related Manuals